CHRIST (Deemed to University), Bangalore

DEPARTMENT OF business-and-management

school-of-business-and-management

Syllabus for
Bachelor of Business Administration (Honours)
Academic Year  (2020)

 
1 Semester - 2020 - Batch
Course Code
Course
Type
Hours Per
Week
Credits
Marks
BBA131 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT Core Courses 4 4 100
BBA132 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING Core Courses 4 4 100
BBA133 MICRO ECONOMICS Core Courses 4 4 100
BBBA111 SOCIAL SENSITIVITY SKILLS Skill Enhancement Courses 2 2 100
BBBH134 BUSINESS MATHEMATICS Core Courses 4 4 100
BBS191 A SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BBS191 B A LIFE WORTH LIVING - FROM HEALTH TO WELL BEING Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BBS191C MAHABHARATHA AND MODERN MANAGEMENT Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BBS191D CYBER SECURITY FOR THE MILLENNIAL GENERATION Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BBS191E TOURISM, CULTURE, AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BBS191F DIGITAL TRANSFORMATION AND ITS IMPACT ON SOCIETY Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BBS191G TECHNOLOGY AND LIFE Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BECH191A INSTITUTIONS AND INFORMAL ECONOMY Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BECH191B ECONOMICS OF CORRUPTION Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BEN121 LANGUAGE IN CONTEXT-I Ability Enhancement Compulsory Courses 3 3 100
BENG191 B GLOBAL ETHICS FOR CONTEMPORARY SOCIETIES Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BENG191A READING TECHNOLOGY IN/AND SCIENCE FICTION Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BHIS191A ENCOUNTERING HISTORIES: THE FUTURE OF THE PAST Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BMED191A MEDIA LITERACY Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BMED191B UNDERSTANDING THE VISUAL LANGUAGE OF CINEMA Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BPOL191A PEACE AND CONFLICT MANAGEMENT Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BPOL191B GLOBAL POWER POLITICS Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BPOL191C FUNDAMENTALS OF PUBLIC POLICY Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BPSY191A SCIENCE OF WELLNESS Generic Elective Courses 3 03 100
BPSY191B ADVERTISEMENT PSYCHOLOGY Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
LAN121 DEVELOPING FLUENCY AND CLARITY IN ENGLISH FOR BUSINESS Ability Enhancement Compulsory Courses 3 3 100
2 Semester - 2020 - Batch
Course Code
Course
Type
Hours Per
Week
Credits
Marks
BBA231 ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR Core Courses 4 4 100
BBA232 BUSINESS STATISTICS Core Courses 4 4 100
BBA233 MACRO ECONOMICS Core Courses 4 4 100
BBBA211 EXPRESSIVE SKILLS Skill Enhancement Courses 2 2 100
BBBA281 SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY PROJECT Skill Enhancement Courses 0 2 50
BBBH234 CORPORATE ACCOUNTING Core Courses 4 4 100
BBS291A APPLIED ETHICS-A MULTICULTURAL APPROACH Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BBS291B GLOBAL LEADERSHIP AND CULTURE Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BBS291C COURTESY AND ETIQUETTES Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BBS291D MAHATMA AND MANAGEMENT Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BBS291E SACRED GAMES AND THE RULE OF LAW Generic Elective Courses 2 3 100
BBS291F CONSUMPTION AND CULTURE IN INDIA Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BECH291A ECONOMICS AND LITERATURE Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BECH291B DESIGNING POLICIES FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BEN221 LANGUAGE IN CONTEXT-II Ability Enhancement Compulsory Courses 3 3 100
BENG291A READING CITYSCAPES: BANGALORE HISTORIES Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BENG291B READING THE CYBERSPACE: PUBLIC AND THE PRIVATE Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BHIS291A THE POLITICS OF MEMORY: THE MAKINGS OF GENOCIDE Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BMED291A INTER-CULTURAL COMMUNICATION Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BMED291B AUDIO CONSUMPTION IN EVERYDAY LIFE Generic Elective Courses 3 03 100
BPOL291A POLITICS IN INDIA Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BPOL291B STATE AND TERRORISM Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BPSY291A APPRECIATING AESTHETICS Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
BPSY291B HUMAN ENGINEERING AND ERGONOMICS Generic Elective Courses 3 3 100
EVS221 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES Ability Enhancement Compulsory Courses 0 2 100
LAN221 THOUGHT WRITING AND VISUALITY Ability Enhancement Compulsory Courses 3 3 100
3 Semester - 2019 - Batch
Course Code
Course
Type
Hours Per
Week
Credits
Marks
BBBH311 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY Skill Enhancement Courses 4 4 100
BBBH312 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT Skill Enhancement Courses 4 4 100
BBBH331 COST ACCOUNTING Core Courses 4 4 100
BBBH332 MARKETING MANAGEMENT Core Courses 4 4 100
BBBH333 INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM Core Courses 4 4 100
BBBH334 PRINCIPLES OF MACRO ECONOMICS Core Courses 4 4 100
BBBH335 FUNDAMENTALS OF BUSINESS ANALYTICS Core Courses 4 4 100
BSDBS312 KNOWLEDGE ACQUISITION SKILLS Skill Enhancement Courses 2 1 50
4 Semester - 2019 - Batch
Course Code
Course
Type
Hours Per
Week
Credits
Marks
BBBH411 BUSINESS ETHICS AND SUSTAINABILITY Core Courses 4 4 100
BBBH431 BUSINESS FINANCE Core Courses 4 4 100
BBBH432 SERVICES MARKETING Core Courses 4 4 50
BBBH433 COMPANY LAW AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE Core Courses 4 4 100
BBBH434 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT Core Courses 4 4 100
BBBH435 MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING Core Courses 4 4 100
BBBH461 BANKING AND INSURANCE Generic Elective Courses 4 3 100
BSDBS412 KNOWLEDGE APPLICATION SKILLS Skill Enhancement Courses 2 1 50
5 Semester - 2018 - Batch
Course Code
Course
Type
Hours Per
Week
Credits
Marks
BBBH531 INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS Core Courses 4 4 100
BBBH532 TAXATION LAW- 1 Core Courses 4 4 100
BBBH533 STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT Core Courses 4 3 100
BBBH534 MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM AND COMPUTING Core Courses 4 3 100
BBBHE541D DESIGN THINKING AND INNOVATION MANAGEMENT Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 100
BBBHE542D FAMILY BUSINESS MANAGEMENT Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 100
BBBHE543D CLIENTELE DEVELOPMENT Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 50
BBBHH541C INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS LAW Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 100
BBBHH542C PERFORMANCE AND COMPENSATION MANAGEMENT Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 100
BBBHH543C PEOPLE ANALYTICS Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 50
BBBHM541B CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 100
BBBHM542B BRAND MANAGEMENT AND LUXURY MARKETING Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 100
BBBHM543B RETAIL MANAGEMENT AND ANALYTICS Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 100
BBBHT541 A SECURITY ANALYSIS AND PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 100
BBBHT542A GLOBAL BUSINESS FINANCE Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 100
BBBHT543 A FINANCIAL MODELLING AND DERIVATIVES Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 100
BBBHT581 INTERNSHIP Skill Enhancement Courses 3 2 50
BSDBS512 SELF ENHANCEMENT SKILLS 1 Skill Enhancement Courses 3 3 100
6 Semester - 2018 - Batch
Course Code
Course
Type
Hours Per
Week
Credits
Marks
BBBH631 GOODS AND SERVICES TAX AND CUSTOMS DUTY Core Courses 4 4 100
BBBH632 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Core Courses 4 3 100
BBBH633 BUSINESS LAW Core Courses 4 3 100
BBBHE641D INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 50
BBBHE642D PROJECT FINANCING AND INSTITUTIONAL MECHANISM FOR START UPS Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 100
BBBHE643D PROJECT ASSESSMENT AND BUSINESS PLAN Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 50
BBBHH641C INTERNATIONAL HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 100
BBBHH642C ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 100
BBBHH643C LEARNING AND DEVELOPMENT Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 50
BBBHM641B ADVERTISING AND DIGITAL MARKETING Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 100
BBBHM642B SALES MANAGEMENT AND ANALYTICS Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 100
BBBHM643B RURAL MARKETING Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 100
BBBHT641A STRATEGIC COST MANAGEMENT Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 100
BBBHT642A MERGERS AND ACQUISITIONS Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 100
BBBHT643A PROJECT APPRAISAL Discipline Specific Elective Courses 4 4 100
BBBHT681 PROJECT Skill Enhancement Courses 3 3 100
BSDBS612 SELF ENHANCEMENT SKILLS II Skill Enhancement Courses 2 0 100
    

    

Introduction to Program:

The undergraduate programme in Bachelor of Business Administration - Honors (BBAH) offered by School of Business and Management focuses on an inter-disciplinary approach towards developing students in order to excel in managerial and entrepreneurial skills. The students will be exposed to various functional areas of Management such as Marketing, Finance, Human Resource and Entrepreneurship. The programme will offer an opportunity for every student to determine, to design and to develop his/her own areas of expertise. The student-centric learning will be adopted through various pedagogical tools like business games, management games, simulations, case studies, internships, guest lectures, conferences, research projects, and industrial visits. The Inter-disciplinary Courses embedded into the programme encompasses the various nuances of technology, sociology, philosophy, economics, life, tourism, history, political science and media. The three year programme will also train the students to develop social sensitivity skills, expressive skills, knowledge acquisition skills, knowledge application skills, self enhancement skills and business research skills. The National and International Level Management Fests and Co-Curricular Activities of the School will also enable the students to develop their leadership and their decision making skills, which are not only essential to face the challenges of today's business world but also to contribute immensely to both businesses and society

Programme Outcome/Programme Learning Goals/Programme Learning Outcome:

PLG 1 : ? Social Responsibility and Ethical Sensitivity

PLO 1.1: Demonstrate awareness of social issues (RBTL2)

PLO 1.2: Identify ethical issues in business (RBTL3)

PLO 1.3: Compare ethical practices in different contexts (RBTL4)

PLO 1.4: Analyze stakeholder impact on social issues (RBTL4)

PLO 1.5: Evaluate ethical perspectives of business actions (RBTL5)

PLO 1.6: Propose initiatives to address social issues (RBTL6)

PLG 2: Functional Knowledge and Application

PLO 2.1: Demonstrate understanding of concepts/theories of management (RBTL2)

PLO 2.2: Utilize domain specific concepts/techniques to address business problems (RBTL3)

PLO 2.3: Examine business decisions with cross functional lens (RBTL4)

PLO 2.4: Compare organizational practices to theoretical frameworks (RBTL5)

PLO 2.5: Estimate relevance of management theories in business scenarios (RBTL6)

PLG 3: ? Communication

PLO 3.1: Oral Communication - Summarize key facts with clarity (RBTL2)

PLO 3.2: Oral Communication - Organize content with appropriate structure and style (RBTL3)

PLO 3.3: Oral Communication - Choose appropriate language (verbal and non-verbal) while expressing views (RBTL5)

PLO 3.4: Written Communication - Demonstrate clarity and coherence in writing (RBTL2)

PLO 3. 5: Written Communication - Develop documents with appropriate structure and style (RBTL3)

PLG 4: Problem Solving (Our students will be equipped to solve problems in a scientific manner)

PLO 4.1 : Outline relevant facts in the context (RBTL2)

PLO 4.2: Identify causes of the problem (RBTL3)

PLO 4.3: List relevant assumptions (RBTL4)

PLO 4.4: Choose appropriate framework for analysis (RBTL5)

PLO 4.5: Propose possible solutions with their implications (RBTL6)

PLG5: Managerial Acumen(PSO)

PLO5.1: Demonstrate understanding of business stakeholders? perspectives PLO 5.2 Identify business opportunities and challenges (RBTL3)

PLO5.2: Identify implications of business decisions on relevant stakeholders (RBTL3)

PLO5.3: Examine business decisions from compliance perspectives (RBTL4)

PLO5.4: Estimate business risks through environmental scanning (RBTL5)

PLO5.5: Discuss models for business performance from a multi-stakeholder perspective (RBTL6)

Assesment Pattern

 

 CIA 1 - 20 Marks  - Quiz / Test / Written Assignment/Case analysis/Simulation exercises
 
CIA 2 - Mid sem exam - 50 Marks converted to 25 Marks - Simple/Medium/Complex questions - 2/5/10 Marks + Case study - 10 Marks
 
CIA 3 - 20 Marks - Presentation/Role Play/Case presentation/Mini project/Research based - Article review/Book review/Mastery project
 
End sem exam - 50 Marks converted to 30 Marks - Simple/Medium/Complex questions - 2/5/10 Marks + Case study - 10 Marks
 
Attendance - 5 Marks 
Examination And Assesments

 

  Classroom instruction through audio visual aids.

Case studies.

Role-play.

Industry visits.

Industry placements.

Projects.

Field visits.

Seminar presentations.

BBA131 - PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description: This subject is a comprehensive learning on what management is all about and different schools of thoughts on management. It gives a clear understanding of management practices and the various functions of management and also gives away the principles of management developed by eminent management thinkers. The syllabus is structured to provide basic conceptual knowledge on the principles of planning, organizing, staffing, motivation, leadership, controlling and to offer orientation to the recent dynamics of managerial practice.

Course Objectives: This course attempts to introduce the basic concepts, functions and processes of management and it enables students to develop competencies and knowledge to become an effective manager.

Course Outcome

Course Learning Outcomes: On having completed this course student should be able to:

CLO1   Identify the basic activities which any manager will conduct in the organization.

CLO2   Appreciate the role of general management for the success of an organization.

CLO3   Enhance their managerial ability and professional skills.

CLO4   Analyze the managerial issues they will have to tackle in the competitive environment.

CLO5   Explore the latest trends in the field of management.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT
 

Definition – nature, process and significance of management –Role of managers – Managerial Skills and Roles - Evolution of Management Thought : Classical Management Approaches, Behavioural Management Approaches, Quantitative Management Approaches, Modern Management Approaches -  Management as a Science or Art - Management as a profession- Administration and Management- Functions of Management – Functional Areas of Management. 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
PLANNING AND DECISION MAKING
 

Planning - Nature and Importance of Planning- Types of Plans - Levels of Planning - Steps in planning - Making Effective Plans- Objectives and Management By Objective (MBO) –Management By Exception (MBE) -  Policy and Strategy- Forecasting and Decision Making - Nature of decision making - Types of decisions – Decision Making Process – Rational Perspectives and Behavioural Aspects of decision making.          

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
ORGANIZING
 

Organizing - Nature and purpose - Principles of Organization - Types of Organization - Organisational Structure and Design – Line, Staff and functional authority – Conflict between Line and Staff – Overcoming the Line-Staff Conflict. Committees, Departmentation - Span of control – Authority, Responsibility and Accountability - Principles of Delegation - Steps - Centralization Vs Decentralization – Factors determining the degree of Decentralization of authority.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:10
STAFFING
 

Staffing - Nature and Purpose of staffing – Importance of staffing – Components of Staffing - Manpower planning - Recruitment and Selection - Training and Development - Performance

Appraisal.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:9
DIRECTING
 

Directing – Nature of Directing function - Principles – Importance of Effective Direction – Motivating people at work – Motivation theories: Early theories, Contemporary theories – Morale Building – Job Satisfaction - Effective Communication skills for directing – Barriers of communication.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:7
CONTROLLING AND SUPERVISION
 

Controlling - Concept, Nature and Importance - Essentials of Control - Requirements of an Effective Control System – Behavioural Implications of Control – Techniques of Managerial control - Co-ordination – Need for co-ordination – Types of Co-ordination - Techniques of Coordination - Cooperation. Supervision – Position of a supervisor – Qualities of a good supervisor – Key Man – Man in the middle – Middle marginal man – Human relations specialist – Essential requirements of effective supervision.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:4
CONTEMPORARY ISSUES AND CHALLENGES IN MANAGEMENT OF 21st CENTURY
 

Leadership and change, Total quality management, Work force diversity, Globalization and innovation, Enterprise mobility, How to manage and control virtual teams, creating an ethical workplace.

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.      Stoner, Freeman, Gilbert Jr. (2014). Management (6th edition), New Delhi: Prentice Hall India.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.      Daft, R. L. (2009). Principles of Management (1st edition), Cengage Learning.

2.      Gupta, R.S., Sharma, B.D., & Bhalla. N.S. (2011). Principles & Practices of Management (11th edition). New Delhi: Kalyani Publishers.

3.      Williams. Management, (International edition) South-western Cengage Learning.

4.      John R. Schermerhorn. Management, Wiley-India

5.      Koontz, H., &Weihrich, H.  Essentials of Management, McGraw Hill Publishers.

6.      L M Prasad, (2007). Principles and Practices of Management, Himalaya Publishing House

7.      Rao, P.S. (2009). Principles of Management, Himalaya Publishing House.

Moshal, B.S. Principles of Management, Ane Books.

Evaluation Pattern
Evaluation Pattern
Component of Final Grade Max Marks per Component Weightage towards Final Grade Total Marks per Component in Final Grade
CIA-I 30 15% 15
CIA-II 50 25% 25
CIA-III 30 15% 15
End – Term 100 40% 40
Attendance 5 5% 5
Total     100

BBA132 - FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Any organisation which deals with money or money’s worth needs to record every transaction that it enters into. This course is essential for all individuals exposed to financial information in the workplace and involved in the preparation or use of company financial statements.It intends to introduce basic accounting principles and practices. It also deals with subsidiary books maintained in business organizations. The students will have knowledge about the fundamental accounting processes such as journalizing, ledger posting, preparation of trial balance and final accounts in sole trading business. It also deals with providing an overview of accounting standards and IFRS. This course will be useful for all those who are desirous of having an understanding and application of financial dynamics of the business and become successful financial managers/entrepreneurs.

Course Outcome

  • To provide an understanding of application of various principles and practice of Accounting.
  • To demonstrate the knowledge on the process of accounting cycle and basic steps involved in Accounting
  • To extend the knowledge of systematic maintenance of books of accounts to real life business.
  • To interpret Annual Financial statements of Sole proprietorship form of business.
  • To outline the need for Accounting standards and IFRS.

Text Books And Reference Books:
Essential Reading / Recommended Reading
Evaluation Pattern
Evaluation Pattern
Component of Final Grade Max Marks per Component Weightage towards Final Grade Total Marks per Component in Final Grade
CIA-I 30 15% 15
CIA-II 50 25% 25
CIA-III 30 15% 15
End – Term 100 40% 40
Attendance 5 5% 5
Total     100

BBA133 - MICRO ECONOMICS (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description: Business environment is an integral part of the economic system. This course helps in the economic way of thinking which aids in establishing a connection between unlimited wants and limited resources available to an individual, firm and the society.This course deals with the application of economic analysis in formulation of business decisions. In this context, the course deals with demand, supply, pricing, theory of consumer choice and theories of production. 

 

Course Objectives

 

  • To describe how economic trade-offs and social values impact business decisions
  • To understand the causes and consequences of different market conditions
  • To explain the theory of consumer choice using the utility concepts
  • To apply the concept of equilibrium to firms
  • To apply the theory of production and cost while making business decisions
  • To evaluate the efficiency and inefficiency of the markets from the point of view of consumers and the producers

 

 

Course Outcome

COURSE OUTCOMES

  • Illustrate society's trade-offs by using Production Possibility Frontier 
  • Explain how consumers maximise total utility within a given income using the utility concepts
  • Explain the effect of shifts in market supply and demand curves on price and quantity produced by firms
  • Demonstrate the relationship between cost and production functions
  • Examine the effects of negative and positive externalities and examine the real-world externality situations
  • Compare and contrast the pricing mechanism and output determination under different market conditions

Text Books And Reference Books:
Essential Reading / Recommended Reading
Evaluation Pattern
Evaluation Pattern
Component of Final Grade Max Marks per Component Weightage towards Final Grade Total Marks per Component in Final Grade
CIA-I 30 15% 15
CIA-II 50 25% 25
CIA-III 30 15% 15
End – Term 100 40% 40
Attendance 5 5% 5
Total     100

BBBA111 - SOCIAL SENSITIVITY SKILLS (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:2
Max Marks:100
Credits:2

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

The course develops social sensitivity skill, a practice by which an individual can observe, identify, and understand the indications from socio-cultural contexts and social interactions or relationships. Social sensitivity allows students to be respectful of people around them and their respective environment. Social sensitivity combines emotional, social, and adaptive intelligence and helps students to fully prepare for ‘new normal’ expectations from all walks of life, especially business.

Course Objectives:

 

1)      To create self-awareness on social and cultural diversity and individuality

 

2)      To sensitize in responsible and meaningful behaviour with multicultural people and/or milieu

Course Outcome

CLO1 Develop listening, observing, interactive and participative skills

  

CLO2 Develop empathy, objective analysis, and self-reflection

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:13
Capacity building
 

UNIT–I                                                                                                                       10 Hrs

 

Level of Knowledge: Basic

Capacity building – how to listen, how to observe, how to interact, how to participate, how to develop ‘we-feeling’, how to understand ‘other’, how to solve problems.

 

EVALUATION–I                                                                                                       3 Hrs

Individual Activity

Capturing Lifestory – Choose a person you like and ask him/her to narrate the lifestory to you. Record it and convert into text exactly (verbal and nonverbal cues - voice, tone, emotions, pause, etc.). Now interpret (without any judgment) his/her lifestory in your own words and present it in the class.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:17
Relationship building
 

Level of Knowledge: Conceptual

 

Relationship building – emotional intelligence, social intelligence, adaptive intelligence, mindfulness, daily reflection, acceptable and respectful behaviour, positive and helping attitude, constructive criticism and feedback.

 

EVALUATION–II                                                                                                         3 Hrs

Group Activity (2 member team)

Exchanging Culture– Choose a classmate from a very different cultural background than your own. Interact with each other and learn about each other’s culture. Make notes on the cultural differences and cultural shock (if any) with thoughtful understanding. Present each other’s culture as a team in the class - highlighting uniqueness in your friend’s culture, breaking stereotypes and identity labelling of his/her culture.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Theresa Cheung. The Sensitivity Code: Life strategies for thriving in an overwhelming world. London, Thread Publication, 2020 (editions in Paperback, Kindle, Audiobook).

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Martin M. Antony and Richard P. Swinson. The Shyness and Social Anxiety Workbook: Proven, Step-by-Step Techniques for Overcoming Your Fear. Oakland: Canada, New Harbinger Publications, Inc., 2017 (editions in Paperback, Kindle).

Evaluation Pattern

EVALUATION–I                                                                                                       3 Hrs

Individual Activity

Capturing Lifestory – Choose a person you like and ask him/her to narrate the lifestory to you. Record it and convert into text exactly (verbal and nonverbal cues - voice, tone, emotions, pause, etc.). Now interpret (without any judgment) his/her lifestory in your own words and present it in the class. ( 50 Marks)

EVALUATION–II                                                                                                         3 Hrs

Group Activity (2 member team)

 

Exchanging Culture– Choose a classmate from a very different cultural background than your own. Interact with each other and learn about each other’s culture. Make notes on the cultural differences and cultural shock (if any) with thoughtful understanding. Present each other’s culture as a team in the class - highlighting uniqueness in your friend’s culture, breaking stereotypes and identity labelling of his/her culture.

 

BBBH134 - BUSINESS MATHEMATICS (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

In recent times Mathematics has emerged as the key for major decision making process. The subject is introduced as to give the basic subject giving emphasis on the applications in business. Understanding of mathematical models is essential to project the real life scenario in s simplified form in business. The study of matrices helps to handle mathematical models with many variables. The decision making environment is so complex that the right and appropriate decision can only be made with good analytical skills. The subject is introduced with such an outlook.

 

Course Objectives

 

  1. The basic objective of teaching Business Mathematics is for students to appreciate and apply mathematical concepts in decision making.
  2. To understand difference between mathematical equations and inequalities and their solutions
  3. To be able to appreciate uses of Mathematical models in real life situations
  4. To understand commercial arithmetic and calculus and its applications 

 

Course Outcome

CLO1   Students will be able to understand and apply Mathematical concepts relating to equations and inequalities in decision making

CLO2   The students will also be able to interpret Mathematical analysis of Linear programming

CLO3   Interpret The students will also be able to interpret Mathematical analysis of calculus

CLO4 Understanding of usage of mathematical tool and techniques in our day to day life. 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:5
Linear Models
 

Linear Equations and Straight Lines- Coordinate systems and Graphs

Linear Inequalities – standard form, slope of a straight line.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
System of Linesr Equations And Matrices
 

Addition of matrices – System of linear equations, addition and multiplication of Matrices –Determinants – Inverse of a matrix by Gauss Jordan method.  Application of matrices and Determinants – Solution of a system of linear equations- Gauss elimination method.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
Linear Programming Problems
 

Definition – Linear Programming Problem – Formulation – Solution by Graphical method – simplex method – minimization and maximization problems.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:10
Probability And Probability Distributions
 

Introduction to Probability, Basic Concepts of Probability, Conditional Probability, Independent Events, Bayes’ Theorem. Probability Distributions – Binomial, Poisson and Normal distributions, Expected Value.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:10
Commercial Arithmetic
 

Simple interest – Compound Interest. Equivalent Rate –   Depreciation - Present value. Annuity – Sinking Fund.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:10
Calculus
 

Limits – Differentiation - Methods of differentiation – Second order derivative – Maxima and Minima.  

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:5
Application to commerce and Economics
 

Revenue Function – Cost function –      Profit function – Elasticity of demand – Breakeven point.

Text Books And Reference Books:

·       Singh, J.K (2015). Business Mathematics (5th Edition). Mumbai, Himalaya Publishing House.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

 

 

 

Reference Books

·       Sancheti, D. C., & Kapoor, V. K. (2009). Business Mathematics. New Delhi: Sultan Chand and Sons.

·       Padmalochan, H. (2015). A Text Book of Business Mathematics, New Delhi: Sultan Chand and Sons.

·       G K Ranganath& T V Narasimha Rao. Business Mathematics. New Delhi: Himalaya Publishing House.

·       Larry J Goldstein, David I Schneider  & Martha J Siegel Finite Mathematics and its applications, 9th edition  A WMU Publication.

 
Evaluation Pattern

 

Components of CIA-I       20 marks

 

 

 

CIA I Linear equations – Real life data analysis –(GROUP ACTIVITY – 2 in a group)

 

 Need to plot 10 to 20 stock prices of two allotted companies from one sector Two hours duration

 

                                                                                           

 

Assignment Description: 

 

Objective:

 

To understand the applications of linear equations

 

 Linear equations – Real life data analysis –(GROUP ACTIVITY – 2 in a group)

 

 Need to plot 10 to 20 stock prices of two allotted companies from one sector

 

Parameters :

 

Introduction to the company 5 Marks

 

Screen shot of Data and Graph (drawn manually) : 5 Marks

 

Trend line and interpretation:10 Marks

 

Assessment Policy: Late submissions will be subject to loss of 1 mark per day

 

Evaluation Rubric/s:

 

 

 

Introduction to the company

 

Screen shot of Data and Graph (drawn manually)

Trend line and interpretation

Components of CIA-II                                                                                        50 Marks (TO BE CONVERTED TO 25 MARKS)

Mid Term Exam Syllabus: Unit I, II, III

      Pattern (Example)

  • Section A – Answer any four out of six (4X10=40 marks)
  • Section B- Case Study Compulsory Question (Embedded Question) (1X10= 10 marks)

Components of CIA-III                                                                                        20 Marks

             

CIA III To understand the applications of linear equations

Least square method: (Individual)

Journal based data analysis:

Minimum of 5 values to be obtained and predictions to be done

 Two hours duration

Assignment Description: To understand the applications of linear equations

 Least square method: (Individual)

Live data analysis:

Minimum of 5 values to be obtained and predictions to be done

Parameters :

Introduction - 5 marks

Screen shot of Data  5 marks

Trend equation  and interpretation : 10 marks

 

Learning outcomes:

·         The student will also will be able to apply and  interpret Mathematical equations and inequalities and their solutions in real life situations

·         The student will also will be able to apply and  interpret mathematical analysis

Evaluation Rubric/s:

Parameters :

Introduction

Screen shot of Data 

Trend equation  and interpretation

BBS191 A - SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

To create a sense of ownership of issues related to CSR, Environment and sustainability of businesses.

Understand the basic concept of Sustainable Development (SD), the environmental, social and economic dimensions.

To teach how to critically analyze, evaluate and judge competing perspectives on the challenge of creating a sustainablefuture.

To understand the Sustainable development challenge for companies, their responsibility and their potentials for action.

Course Outcome

Concern for society and nature

Ability to create sustainable organizations

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:9
Introduction
 

Meaning and Scope, Corporate Social Responsibility, Sustainability, Sustainability Terminologies and Meanings, why is Sustainability an Imperative, Sustainability Case Studies, Triple Bottom Line (TBL)

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:9
Sustainable Development Strategy
 

Reasons to adopt sustainable strategy by firms, tools used by the firm to implement their sustainable development strategies, evaluation of firm’s commitment to sustainable strategies by the stakeholders.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:9
Environmental Management Systems:
 

Using Standards, Certification and other Systems to further SD goals Introduction, Global management systems exist to guide firms in establishing and implementing a strategy,how do these various approaches, including certification, encourage sustainable business practices.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:9
Sustainable Future
 

Establishing priorities for sustainable future, Role of women in sustainability, Challenge of creating a green economy, Sustainability crisis in 21st century, failures of global capitalism, transforming global capitalism, creating a restorative economy.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:9
Corporate Sustainability Reporting Frameworks
 

Global Reporting Initiative Guidelines, National Voluntary Guidelines on Social, Environmental and Economic Responsibilities of, Business, International Standards, Sustainability Indices, Principles of Responsible Investment, Challenges in Mainstreaming Sustainability Reporting, Sustainability Reporting Case Studies

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.      Balachandran V, & Chandrashekharan V, (2011). Corporate Governance, Ethics and social responsibility, PHI.

2.      Concepts of Environmental Management for Sustainable Development

3.      Baxi C. V & Rupamanjari Sinha Ray, (2012). Corporate Social Responsibility: A Study of CSR Practices in Indian Industry, Vikas Publishing House.

4.      Corporate Goverance – Badi N. V, Vrinda Publications, 2012.

5.      Fernando A. C, (2011). Corporate Governance: principles, policies and practices, Pearson.

6.      Ghosh B. N, (2012). Business Ethics and Corporate Governance , Tata McGraw-Hill.

7.      Keshoo Prasad, Corporate Governance -, PHI.

8.      Lawrence and Weber, (2010). Business and Society, Tata McGraw-Hill.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Andrew Crane & Dirk Matten (2010). Business ethics, Oxford.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1 - Written assignment on cases relating to sustainability practices followed in any country. (No country should be repeated) (20 marks)

CIA 2 - Mid sem Class exam (25 marks)

CIA 3 - Group presentation and report for pre allotted topics.(20 marks)

End sem - Class exam (30 marks)

BBS191 B - A LIFE WORTH LIVING - FROM HEALTH TO WELL BEING (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

To examine health in its truest sense, one must explore beyond the limits of medicine to engage a much wider set of questions embracing social, cultural, political, economic, moral and spiritual aspects of human experience. The course focuses on the knowledge and skills that students require to lead a healthy, productive and balanced life.

 

Course Outcome

On completing the course, students will be able to:

  • Explain health as a multi-dimensional and dynamic concept, which necessarily integrates individual, societal, biomedical, spiritual, cultural and historical influences, and how this relates to health issues encountered in everyday life.
  • Assess the inter-relatedness of health perceptions and practices across cultures.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:6
Introduction to health
 

Health of individuals and communities – The significance of determinants of health and how these raise or lower the health of individuals and communities - Health promotion to improve health - Personal and popular attitudes and beliefs and their impact on decision making - self-management - interpersonal and key consumer health skills - Factors influencing health, and actions and strategies to protect and promote health, through investigation and inquiry processes.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
Food and Values
 

Philosophy of food, Values – Three different types of values, Meat – Is it wrong to eat animals?Hunger – Do we have a duty to help starving people? - Drugs – Why is it wrong to take drugs? - GM food – How should food technology be regulated? - Capitalism – Food, globalization, and equality - Art – Can food be art? What is art? - Taste – Is taste entirely subjective? - Science – Can science explain conscious taste experiences? -Eating – Eat to live, or live to eat

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:6
Nutrition
 

Balanced diet & Nutrition, Macro and micro nutrients – Nutritive and non nutritive components of diet – Eating for weight control – healthy weight – The pitfalls of dieting – food intolerance and food myths – Food supplements for adolescents. 

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Physical Education
 

Concept of physical education – Meaning – definition – aims – objectives of physical education and fitness – Need & importance of fitness – Types of fitness – Health related physical fitness – performance related physical fitness – physical activities and health benefits - Activities for developing physical fitness

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:6
Sleep
 

What is sleep? – The phylogeny of sleep – Developmental course of sleep – Dreams- Functions of sleep – Daytime sleepiness and alertness – Sleep disorders.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:6
Safety education and health promotion
 

Principles of accident prevention – health and safety in daily life – health and safety at work – first aid and emergency care – common injuries and their management

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:9
Spirituality, Religion and Social Change
 

Meaning of life - Meaning of death- Indian Rituals, symbols, and myths - Spirituality, altruism and moral justice - Resources to deal with stress, temptations, disappointments and failures, social oppression, the loss of possessions and of loved ones, and with one’s own death. 

Text Books And Reference Books:

Indian Journals of health and well being

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

As prescribed by the facilitator

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1, Mid sem, CIA 3, End sem - 100 Marks

BBS191C - MAHABHARATHA AND MODERN MANAGEMENT (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description:

The Mahabharata of the great Maharishi Veda Vyasa is a treasure trove of knowledge, principles and paradigms. It is written that what is not in the Mahabharata will not be found elsewhere. Written nearly thousands of years ago, the Mahabharata is as yet a source of knowledge, especially modern management principles.In essence it highlights the victory of Dharma in times of Adharma.This subject is a comprehensive learning on management lessons which can be inferred from the great epic. It gives a clear understanding and comparison of management Principles, practices and the various functions of management with the epic. The syllabus is structured to provide basic conceptual knowledge on the principles of management. It also deals with behavioral issues in the individual processes, group and interpersonal processes.

Course Objectives:

  •  Discuss the epic by summarizing the various parvas/units in class in accordance with the management concept
  •  Review and make a critical estimate of the epic with a focus on morals, ethics, legal and management concepts
  • To develop competencies and knowledge of students to become effective professionals

Course Outcome

Course Learning Outcome: Students will get to know team work and group dynamics

  • Students will get to know determination and hard work and its implication on business decision
  • Students will be able to appreciate the role of general management for the success of an organization.
  • This subject will enable them to enhance their Moral, social, ethical and professional skills
  • To understand the manner in which strategic and competitive advantage is developed

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:9
Introduction to Mahabharatha
 

The older generations-The Pandava and Kaurava princes- Lakshagraha (the house of lac)

Establishment of the kingdom-Administration and Management principles

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:9
Marriage and Building of New city
 

Marriage to Draupadi- An event study approach.

Indraprastha-A new beginning- Pressure for change – Change process, Types of change, Factors influencing change, Resistance to change

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:9
The Big Game
 

The dice game- Cooperative strategies & Reasons for strategic alliances-

Exile and return- Risks and costs of strategic alliances

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:9
The battle at Kurukshetra
 

The battle at Kurukshetra - Strategic Planning and Management- levels at which strategy operates- Event approaches to strategic decision making,

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:9
Post Kurukshetra
 

The end of the Pandavas- Succession Planning,Authority and Responsibility

The reunion Organizing- Choosing the organizational structure

 

Text Books And Reference Books:

Stoner, Freeman, Gilbert Jr. (2014). Management (6th edition), New Delhi: Prentice Hall India.

Rao, V.S.P., & Krishna, V.H., (2011). Strategic Management: Text and Cases. New Delhi: Excel Books.

Pratap Chandra Roy ,The complete Mahabharata translated into English prose directly from the original sanskrit text.(1st Edition) oriental publishing co.

Source: Jaya - An Illustrated Retelling of the Mahabharata

 

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

C Rajagopalachari (2017). Mahabharata (63rdedition), Mumbai: Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan.

 

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1 10 Marks

MSE   30 Marks

CIA 3 10 Marks

End Assesment 50 Marks

BBS191D - CYBER SECURITY FOR THE MILLENNIAL GENERATION (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Any individual can have a real-time video conversation with someone on the other side of the planet, one can send and receive money without even taking out their wallet, and even can post content online that reaches millions of people in a matter minutes. Unfortunately, the same technology that enables all this new freedom and convenience also exposes us to new security threats that we've never encountered. Malware that infects your computer and watches everything you do, phishing scams that steal private information from millions of people - today's digital world is a criminal's playground. It makes the process of stealing money or even stealing someone's entire identity way more efficient. Hence it becomes very important to protect yourself and your private data from cyber intruders. This course outlines a step-by-step roadmap that one can follow to build a tight wall of security around your digital life.

Course Objectives:

This course gives the background needed to understand basic cyber security. Students will be introduced to the world of spyware, phishing, malware, spam, social engineering, hacking and other common internet spying techniques. Students will also learn the intervention methods in securing themselves in cyber space.

Course Outcome

  • To understand how to identify online scams.
  • To develop the right mindset and habits for securing themselves from intruders.
  • To learn how to secure their online browsing.
  • To learn how to create super passwords and how to manage them.
  • To practice cyber security skills in real world scenarios.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:9
Introduction to Cyber security
 

Why security matters – The importance of multi-layer security – the most common security threats – The dark side of Internet – The world of malware – phishing – social engineering – scams – hacking –cyber warfare.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:9
Mindset and Habits
 

Developing the right mindset and habits for security – the importance of skepticism – avoiding malicious sites and applications – Tools needed to browse the Internet securely - why software updates matter – knowing (and limiting yourself).

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:9
Smartphone security
 

Why mobile security matters – setting up a passcode lock –importance of password security – best practices – using password manager- managing third-party app permissions – locating a lost or stolen smartphone.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:9
Multi-factor authentication and Connected apps
 

Framework – types of mobile two-factor authentication – Two-Factor authentication: Google, Facebook, Twitter and other services - danger of rogue connected apps – managing connected apps on Google and Facebook – managing browser extensions/add-ons – staying secure with connected apps and extensions.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:9
Encryption
 

Encryption definition – How SSL (HTTPS) protects your passwords and private data - encrypting your web traffic with a virtual private network (VPN) – encrypting computer's hard drive – encrypting smartphone – firewalls – antivirus.

Text Books And Reference Books:

·     Graham,James., Howard,Richard., & Olson,Ryan. (2011). Cyber Security Essentials. USA: CRC Press.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

·         Lalit,Gulab Chandra. (2014). Cyber security threats: An emerging challenge. New Delhi: Mohit Publications.

·        Arora, A. (2014). Information Warfare and Cyber Security. Jaipur: Book Enclave.

·       Santanam, R., Sethumadhavan, M., & Virendra, M. (2011). Cyber security, cybercrime and cyber forensics: Applications and perspectives. Hershey, PA: Information Science Reference.

·         Ahamad, F. (2013). Cyber Law and Information Security. New Delhi: Dreamtech Press.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I - 20 marks

CIA II - 25 marks

CIA III - 20 marks

End Semester - 30 marks

Attendance - 05 marks

BBS191E - TOURISM, CULTURE, AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

The Course presents several of the operational projects implemented by, or with the support of UNESCO, to illustrate how cultural tourism policies developed in the spirit of the principles and values contained in the texts, standard-setting instruments, declarations and recommendations adopted by UNESCO, are put into practice.

To open a debate on the complex questions that surround the relations between culture and tourism, tourism and development, and tourism and dialogue among cultures.

Course Outcome

  • To use Tourism as an instrument to bring individuals and human communities into contact
  • To understand the role of cultures and civilizations in facilitating dialogue among cultures
  • To recognise the capacity of Tourism in assisting the world’s inhabitants to live better together and thereby contribute to the construction of peace in the minds of men and women

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
Introduction, Key Themes and Issues in Tourism, Culture and Development
 

Finding Meaning through Tourism, Tourism as a World of Paradoxes, The Centrality of Experiences, Changing Contexts and Emerging Challenges in the Context of Development

Culture, Heritage and Diversity as Tourism Resources, Understanding Culture and Cultural Resources in Tourism, Cultural Tourism as a Means of Economic Development, Developing the Cultural Supply Chain, Exploitation of Culture

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:5
Tourism as a Vehicle for Inter-Cultural Dialogue
 

Tourist – Host Encounters, The Role of Routers / Intermediaries / Media, Tourism – Tourist Education, Cross Cultural Understanding

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:5
Tourism and Environmental Protection
 

Introduction to the Natural Environment, Tourism and the Spirit of Nature, Fragile and Vulnerable Ecosystems, Cultural Implications of Mobilizing Natural Resources for Tourism, From Ecotourism to Integrated Tourism

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:10
Issues of Governance in Tourism, Culture and Development
 

Developing Structures to Develop and Manage Tourism and Culture, Complexities and Challenges of Policy Making in Tourism and Culture, Responsibilities / Tensions and Actions, The Gender Dimension, Stakeholders and Collaborations

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:12
Preservation and Mobilization of Cultural Resources
 

Cultural Tourism Itinerary, Raising Awareness about the Fragility of Heritage Sites, Education for Lasting Tourism

Case Studies from The Palestinian Territories, Central America, Western Africa, Mauritania and Angkor

Economic Empowerment and poverty Alleviation, Sustainable Tourism Development Strategy, Forging Innovative and Inter-Disciplinary Approaches, Indigenous Resource Management Systems, Empowering Communities through Tourism

Case Studies from The Aral Sea Basin, Local Effort in Asia and Pacific (LEAP), Mountainous Regions of Central and South Asia

Dissemination of Knowledge and Reconciliation with the Past, Local and Indigenous Knowledge Systems in a Global Society (LINKS), UNESCO’s Actions in the field of Tourism, Culture and Development

Case Studies on UNESCO’s Conventions, Seminars and Universal Declarations

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:5
Mobilizing Nature for Sustainable Tourism
 

Capacity Building and Youth Poverty Alleviation through Tourism and Heritage (PATH)

Case Studies on Sao Paulo’s Green Belt Biosphere Reserve

Text Books And Reference Books:

Appadurai A. (2002) Cultural Diversity: A Conceptual Platform. In K. Stenou (ed.) UNESCO Universal Declaration on Cultural Diversity. UNESCO Publishing, Paris, pp. 9-16.

Appadurai A. (2003) Modernity at Large. Cultural Dimensions of Globalization. Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press.

Boumedine R. S. and Veirier L. (2003) Towards a Strategy for the Sustainable Development of Tourism in the Sahara in the Context of Poverty Eradication. UNESCO Publishing, Paris.

Cohen E. (2004) Contemporary Tourism. Diversity and Change. Elsevier, London.

Hemmati, M. ed. (1999) Women’s Employment and Participation in Tourism, Report for UN Commission on Sustainable Development 7th Session. UNED.

Intergovernmental Conference on Cultural Policies for Development (1998) Final Report. (Also referred to as Stockholm Action Plan). UNESCO Publishing, Paris.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

International Labour Organisation (2001) Human resources development, employment and globalization in the hotel, catering and tourism sector (Report for discussion at the Tripartite Meeting on Human Resources Development, Employment and Globalization in the Hotel, Catering and Tourism Sector, Geneva, ILO).

Komla E.E. and Veirier L. (2004) Tourism, Culture and Development in West-Africa: For a Cultural Tourism Consistent with Sustainable Development. UNESCO Publishing, Paris.

Posey D.A. (Ed) (1999) Cultural and Spiritual Values of Biodiversity. A Complementary Contribution to the Global Biodiversity Assessment. Intermediate Technology Publications, London (on behalf of United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP), Nairobi).

Robertson, R. (1990) Mapping the Global Conditions: Globalization as the Central Concept. In M. Featherstone (ed.) Global Culture: Nationalism, Globalization and Modernity. Sage, London, pp. 15-30.

Steck B., Strasdas W., and Gustedt, E. (1999) Tourism in Technical Co-operation. A guide to the conception, planning and implementation of project-accompanying measures in regional rural development and nature conservation. GTZ, Eschborn.

Tour Operators’ Initiative for Sustainable Tourism Development (2004) Supply Chain Engagement for Tour Operators: Three Steps towards Sustainability. UNEP-Sustainable Tourism, Paris.

Winkin Y. (2002) Cultural Diversity: A Pool of Ideas for Implementation. In K. Stenou (ed.)

UNESCO Universal Declaration on Cultural Diversity. UNESCO Publishing, Paris, pp. 17-60.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1 - Group Activity and Written Submission on “Culture and Cultural Resources in Tourism – From an Inter-Disciplinary Perspective” (20 Marks)

CIA 2 - Mid Semester Examination (25 Marks)

CIA 3 - Group Activity and Written Submission on “Integrated Tourism by Mobilizing Natural Resources” (20 Marks)

Final Submission - An Individual Activity supported by Written Submission on “Designing a Structured Plan to Develop and Manage Sustainability through Tourism and Culture; An Inter-Disciplinary Perspective” (30 Marks)

BBS191F - DIGITAL TRANSFORMATION AND ITS IMPACT ON SOCIETY (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course deals with interaction between technology, its transformation and the impact it has in today's society. an interdisciplinary course giving overview about the various business models, platforms companies use for creating values among the people and initiatives taken by government related to technology for nation building. This course engage the students to confront the realities brought by disruptive technologies and the change in lifestyle of society.

COURSE OBJECTIVE

 This course attempts to be more effective in dealing with digital transformation and its impact on society.

Course Outcome

  • Understand the evolving technologies and platforms used by business
  • Analyze the impact of technology on day-day life
  • Aware about initiatives by government for nation building

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:9
Introduction & Platform Trends
 

Digital Transformation in the global enterprise, Digital business ecosystem, Multi-sided platform Business- Two sided platform Mediated Networks, Management challenges for Networked Business, Difference between platform and merchant models-Digital Business Models, Value co-creation, Data Business, Data Security.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:9
Managing Disruptive Technologies
 

Disruptive innovation-Transformation enabled by business analytics, Machine learning management, Internet of Things-AI& Human Intelligence, Cloud computing, Social media and social content strategies, Digital transformation in selected industry sectors.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:9
Operational Excellence and Customer Intimacy
 

Enterprise system-business achieving operational excellence, business achieving customer intimacy, challenges faced by enterprise application, next generation enterprise applications.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:9
Technology & Nation Building
 

Indian government DST Agenda, Major development programs in technology in India, Contribution of technology in leveraging nation development.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:9
IT & Society
 

Information technology and society- an introduction, Social shaping of Technology, Globalization and domestication, Social implications of online data, IT intervention and changes in lifestyle-Baby boomers, GenX, GenY, GenZ.

Text Books And Reference Books:
  1. Baron, Naomi S. Always On: Language in an Online and Mobile World. 2008. New York: Oxford University Press.
  2. Gutmann, Michael (2001), Information Technology and Society, https://www.zurich.ibm.com/pdf/news/Gutmann.pdf
Essential Reading / Recommended Reading
  1. Winning the Race with Ever Smarter Machines, Andrew McAfee and Erik Brynjolfsson,
  2. Sloan Management Review, Winter 2012, pp. 53-60. (HBS)
  3. Alibaba and the Future of Business (HBR, Zeng, Sept-Oct. 2018)
  4. Nintendo Game On!Ivey 2016: W16600
  5. Voice War: Hey Google vs. Alexa vs. Siri (HBS 2018: 718519)
  6. Hatsune Miku: Japanese virtual idol ignites global value co-creation (Ivey, 2015: W14631)
  7. Carolina Healthcare System: Consumer Analytics (HBS 2015: 9-515-060)
  8. Digitalization at Siemens (HBS 2017: 9-717-428)
Evaluation Pattern

CIA I - 20 marks

CIA II - 25 marks

CIA III - 20 marks

End Semester - 30 marks

Attendance - 05 marks

BBS191G - TECHNOLOGY AND LIFE (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Technological development has contributed many innovations and ease of life for the human beings. However it has also generated problems .This course is offered to provide the basic knowledge of technology and the uses of technology in different areas of life basically hospitals and banks. The course focuses on identifying the technological benefits and finding solutions to the challenges generated by the technology in daily life. The course will be offered with an intention of enabling the students to visit the different institutions and to identify the technological needs and develops .Finally the course creates awareness about the dangerous of continuous usage of technology.

Course Objectives:

·         To know the history of technological developments in the daily life.

·         To Understand the impact of technology in different areas  of society

·         To identify the technological progress in the health care centre of Bangalore City.

·         To identify the technological progress in the Financial Institutions functioning in   Bangalore.

·         To find the solutions to the tech based problems of day to day life.

Course Outcome

·         Clear understanding of technology and its impact on daily life.

·         Practical knowledge of technological developments in the health and banking sector

·         Solution to the problems originated by the tech addiction.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
Introduction to Technology and Life
 

Meaning- Definitions- evolution of technology-growth in the use of technology in daily life. Disruptive technologies transforming life, business and global economy- Disruptive technology trends in recent years. live reports and cases

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
Impact of technology on daily life
 

Overview of Impact of technology on- Business-Society-Education-Agriculture-Banking-Health Care –Positive and negative impacts

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
Technology and Health Care
 

Instruments requited in the field of Hospitals-Identify the different technologies used in the different hospitals –Need for new technology and the Plans of the Institutions to acquire-Identifying the affordable health services from the perspective of individuals.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:10
Technology and Financial Services
 

Introduction to the different digital services offered by the banks and financial institution- Identify the different technologies used in the city- most demanded services-scope for introduction of new technical support by the banks and financial institutions

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:7
Future of Well-Being in a Tech-Saturated World
 

Themes about the future of well-being and digital life-The benefits of digital life

Concerns over harms-Effects on technology on the youths of today-Tech Experts big predications-Solutions to the technology driven daily life problems

Text Books And Reference Books:

The People Vs Tech: How the internet is killing democracy (and how we save it) v By by Jamie Bartlett

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

New Thinking: From Einstein to Artificial Intelligence, the Science and Technology at Transformed Our World by by Dagogo Altraide

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1, 2, 3 and End sem - 100 Marks

BECH191A - INSTITUTIONS AND INFORMAL ECONOMY (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

The primary aim of this course is to introduce students to the concept of institutions and the informal economy in a global context. The discourse examines the informal economy through the lens of institutional economics. The aim is to acquaint students to significant discourses and issues in policy design and intervention.  

 

Course Objectives

This course will:

 

  • introduce students to the institutions and institutional change through major concepts in institutional economics;

  • discuss the informal economy through concepts, theory and measurement;

  • examine the linkages of formal and informal economy;

  • train students to hone their writing and presentation skills to effectively discuss these complex ideas.

Course Outcome

By the end of the course, students will be able to:

  • understand the concepts and some of the theoretical discourses in the study of institutional change and informal economy;

  • examine how the formal and informal economies are no longer separate watertight compartments but function together as an interactive system;

  • effectively communicate these complex ideas through written and oral presentation.

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
Institutions and Institutional Change
 

Institutions, Economic Theory and Economic Performance; Informal Constraints; Formal Constraints; The Path of Institutional Change

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:12
Elements of Institutional Economics
 

Contracts and Property Rights: the Concepts of Exchange and Property, Critique of the Utilitarian Calculus; Transaction Costs, Bargaining Power; Markets as Institutions; Firms and Markets

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
Informality: Concepts, Theory and Measurement
 

Bureaucratic Form and the Informal Economy; Formal and Informal Enterprises: Concepts, Definition, and Measurement Issues; Linking the Formal and Informal Economy.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:13
Empirical Studies in Institutional Change and Informality
 

CASE STUDIES: The Impact of Regulation on Growth and Informality: Cross-Country Evidence; Blocking Human Potential: How Formal Policies Block the Economy in the Maputo Corridor; Enforcement and Compliance in Lima’s Street Markets: The Origins and Consequences of Policy Incoherence towards Informal Traders

Text Books And Reference Books:

Essential Readings

Alston, L. J., Eggertsson, T., & North, D. C. (Eds.). (1996). Empirical Studies in Institutional Change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Guha-Khasnobis, B., Kanbur, R., & Ostrom, E. (Eds.). (2006). Linking the Formal and Informal Economy: Concepts and Policies. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Misztal, B. (2002). Informality: Social theory and Contemporary Practice. Routledge.

North, D. (1990). Institutions, Economic Theory and Economic PerformanceInstitutions, Institutional Change and Economic Performance. New York: Cambridge University Press.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Recommended Readings

Arias, O., Fajnzylber, P., Maloney, W., Mason, A., Perry, G., & Saavedra-Chanduvi, J. (2007). Informality: Exit and Exclusion. Washington: The World Bank.

Harris, J. (2006). Power Matters: Essays on Institutions, Politics, and Society in India. New York: Oxford University Press.

Mehta, P. B., & Kapur, D. (2005). Public Institutions in India: Performance and Design. New Delhi: Oxford University Press.

Nayyar, D. (Ed.). (2002). Governing Globalization: Issues and Institutions. Oxford University Press.

Oviedo, A. M. (2009). Economic Informality: Causes, Costs, and Policies: A Literature Survey of International Experience. Country Economic Memorandum (CEM).

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern

Course title

MSE (Weight)

ESE (Weight)

Attendance

Institutions and Informal Economy

45%

50%

5%

 

Mid Semester Examination

Group/Individual Assignment

45 Marks

 

End Semester Examination

Group/Individual Assignment

50 Marks

 

BECH191B - ECONOMICS OF CORRUPTION (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course is aimed at undergraduate students to introduce to them the prominent debates in the economics of corruption. The course discusses how corruption acts as a constraint on economic growth using the theoretical constructs in Political Economy. It allows students to delve into the causes and consequences of corruption. In particular, the course will examine how corruption affects the emerging economies.

This course will:

  • consider some of the seminal papers on the economics of corruption
  • acquaint students to significant debates about transparency, competition and privatization and its relevance to corruption
  • analyse corruption in emerging economies through various case studies
  • discuss issues from various perspectives, such as, viewing corruption as erosion of trust and abuse of power
  • train students to hone their writing and presentation skills to effectively discuss complex ideas.

Course Outcome

By the end of the course, students will be able to:

  • appreciate that nuances in the way corruption is defined and understood in different economies
  • analyse the cause and  consequences of corruption
  • examine some of the policies reforms aimed at tackling corruption
  • investigate some impacts of corruption on emerging economies
  • effectively communicate complex ideas through written and oral presentation.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:15
Corruption, Poor Governance and Institutional Structure
 

Causes and Consequences of Corruption: What do we know from a cross-section of countries?, Democratic Institutions and Corruption: Incentives and Constraints in Politics, Bargaining for Bribes: the Role of Institutions

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:15
Corruption and the Private Sector
 

The Privatization of Rent-Generating Industries and Corruption; Corruption in Private Sector, Why the private sector is likely to lead the next stage in the global fight against corruption.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:15
Tackling Corruption
 

Corruption and Policy Reform; Anti-Corruption Authorities: An Effective Tool to Curb Corruption?  Corruption and Competition: Fair Markets as an Anticorruption Device

Text Books And Reference Books:

Auriol, E., & Straub, S. (2011). Privatization of Rent-generating Industries and Corruption. In S. Rose-Ackerman & T. Søreide, (Eds.). International Handbook on the Economics of Corruption, (Vol. 2). Cheltenham: Edward Elgar Pub.

Burger, E. S., & Holland, M. S. (2006). Why the private sector is likely to lead the next stage in the global fight against corruption. Fordham International Law Journal, 30, 45.

Cartier-Bresson, J. (2000). Economics of corruption. Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development. The OECD Observer, (220), 25.

Jain, A. K. (2001). Corruption: A Review. Journal of Economic Surveys, 15(1), 71-121.

Jain, A. K. (Ed.). (2012). Economics of Corruption (Vol. 65). Springer Science & Business Media.

Meschi, P. X. (2009). Government Corruption and Foreign Stakes in International Joint Ventures in Emerging Economies. Asia Pacific Journal of Management, 26(2), 241-261.

Meyer, K. E., Estrin, S., Bhaumik, S. K., & Peng, M. W. (2009). Institutions, Resources, and Entry Strategies in Emerging Economies. Strategic Management Journal, 30(1), 61-80.

Nowakowski, K. (2010). Corruption in Private Sector.Economics and Law, 6(1), 345-360.

Rose-Ackerman, S. (1975). The Economics of Corruption. Journal of Public Economics, 4(2), 187-203.

Uhlenbruck, K., Rodriguez, P., Doh, J., & Eden, L. (2006). The Impact of Corruption on Entry Strategy: Evidence from Telecommunication Projects in Emerging Economies. Organization Science, 17(3), 402-414.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

The readings mentioned as essential are to be followed.

Evaluation Pattern

Course title

MSE (Weight)

ESE (Weight)

Attendance

The Economics of Corruption

45%

50%

5%

Mid Semester Examination

Group/Individual Assignment

45 Marks

End Semester Examination

Group/Individual Assignment

50 Marks

 

BEN121 - LANGUAGE IN CONTEXT-I (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course is an attempt by the English Studies, School of Business Studies and Social Sciences, Christ University to recognise and bring together English language in context i.e.,  in a natural way through the contents that are important not only to self but also to society.

The course titled Language in Context aims to familiarise the first year students of Business Studies (Honours & Tourism) with literatures in varieties of forms, thereby, enabling them to learn more about culture, ethos contemporary societies through writings from different regions. We have tried in our little way to represent the world through sensible expressions in the form of short stories, poems, essays, videos and blogs. This course is designed to impart the linguistic skills of the student as well. The course consists of four units such as Society and Self, Democracy and Dissent, Equity and Equality, and Ecological Care and Concerns. Each unit is composed of an essay, poem, short story, blog posts, graphic essay and comics related to identified areas. It is aimed at improving student’s linguistic skills that can help them to take leap from textbooks to news paper or full length novels. The contents of the course carry the message of ethical concerns that the future business entrepreneurs are supposed to equip themselves with for a progressive and equitable society.

The various texts across the two semesters deal with various social, economic and political issues that are relevant to modern day world and it helps us to negotiate with everyday situations in a more proactive way. The various short stories and poems touch upon questions of self and identity, human interactions and social relationships sometimes in a straightforward manner, sometimes in an abstract way. But all of them, be it in the manner of their writing or the themes they deal with or the ideologies that govern them are quintessentially contemporary in ethos, sense and sensibility, whether written by Indians or authors from other parts of the world. 

Pedagogy:

The teachers in charge of taking this course to the class are not only expected to elaborate, discuss and deliberate upon the topics given as a part of this course but are also expected to incorporate passive grammar and vocabulary development instructions as deemed fit according to the needs of the learners.

Course Objectives: The course aims to inculcate in students:

 

                         An understanding of English language through contexts.

                         An ability to discern different challenges that our society is facing now.

                         Facilitate acquisition of vocabulary, grammar, and discourse.

                         Integrate grammar and vocabulary skills to facilitate contextual understanding.

 

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes: After the completion of the course, the students will be able to:

                         Read and appreciate simple as well as complex essays or poems in English.

                         Creatively write about the concerns and care they have for society and self.

                         Speak on the topics that address the common people’s concerns.

                         Apply reading and critical thinking skills in contextual meaning comprehension

                         Apply reading, writing, listening and speaking skills within the context of the topics studied

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
Society and Self
 

Introducing the idea of individual as self and his/her inextricable link with the society. The problems one encounters as part of his/her societal interaction. Moreover, the texts also look at the ‘becoming’ process within the individual which comes as result of such interactions and interventions.

       Subroto Bagchi (2006): Go Kiss the World (IIM B, Inaugural Speech)

       Sushrut Jadhav et. al. (2015): Mental Health in India: Ecologies of Suffering‘New’ Caste https://psmag.com/news/how-english-creates-a-new-caste-system-in-india

       Linda Pastan: Girl Leaving Home (Cycle: Slam poetry at UnErase Poetry)

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
Democracy and Dissent
 

Looking at the societal set up based on the discourse of consent and dissent. The texts selected, creates a platform for the students to ponder on practices which they found intelligently or contradictorily placed within the democratic fabric they follow.

       Amartya Sen: Democracy as Public Reason (Essay)

       Naomi Shihab Nye: To Any Would-Be Terrorists (Letter)

       Thangjam Ibopishak: I want to be Killed by an Indian Bullet (Poetry)

       Santosh Desai: The Death Penalty as a sign of the times? (Essay)

       O. Henry: The Cop and the Anthem (Short Story)

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
Equity and Equality
 

Throwing more light on dissent and the nature of its evolution. The texts deliberate more specifically on the sections within the democratic set up, who still are designated as beings belonging to the periphery.

       Manjushree Thapa: Women Have No Nationality (Essay)

       Noam Chomsky (2015): One Day in the Life of a Reader of the New York Times

https://chomsky.info/20150406/

Or

       Noam Chomsky (2015): We Are All … Fill in the Blank

https://chomsky.info/20150110/

       Can ‘Castelessness’ fix caste? EPW Engage Infographic based on Satish Deshpande’s Caste and Caste and Castelessness: Towards a biography of ‘General Category’

       Hansda Sowvendra Shekhar (2017) November is the Month of Migrations (Story)

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:15
Ecological Care and Concerns
 

This unit deals with environmental issues and its place in contemporary deliberations. The texts selected envisages a serious and thought provoking debates on ecological issues from different precepts ranging from social, political, economical and individual.

       In Harmony with mother Nature: Narendra Modi

       https://www.thehindu.com/opinion/op-ed/in-harmony-with-mother-nature/article25115350.ece

       Poem: Susan Briante (2018) 13 Questions for the Next Economy

https://www.poets.org/poetsorg/poem/13-questions-next-economy

       Kanishk Tharoor (2016) Swimmer Under the Stars (Story)

Text Books And Reference Books:

Compilation

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Compilation

Evaluation Pattern

CIA - Evaluation Pattern

Individual Assignment

Group Assessment

Mid Semester

20

20

25

Mid Semester Examination

Section A

Section B

Section C

Total

2X10=20

1X15=15

1X15=15

50

End Semester Examination

Section A

Section B

Section C

Total

2X10=20

1X15=15

1X15=15

50

BENG191 B - GLOBAL ETHICS FOR CONTEMPORARY SOCIETIES (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description:  

This course will introduce students to the major theoretical and applied debates as well as major moral puzzles and challenges in the field of global ethics. Ethics is gaining ground as an important humanities intervention in a fast-changing world. A course one thics is often an added advantage for students as it helps them shape a socially awre perspective of the social reality. Drawing on interdisciplinary perspectives and thematic issues in the fields of international politics, business, communications and law, the course will challenge students to reflect on major ethical theories and traditions as well as core problems such as corporate governance, global distributive justice, the ethics of making and sustaining peace, media ethics and legal dimensions of ethics. By combining the works of both classic and contemporary philosophers with contemporary applied global issues, students will be able to critically reflect on fundamental normative questions from an interdisciplinary perspective and reflect on the rights, responsibilities and challenges of ‘good global citizenship’.  

Learning Objectives: On completing the course, students will be able to:  

● Open-mindedly consider different viewpoints in moral controversies. ● Identify the strengths and weaknesses of different philosophical and popular arguments on the various topics. ● Demonstrate understanding of the major moral philosophical approaches and techniques in moral reasoning. ● Formulate and critically assess personal positions/convictions.  

Course Outcome

At the completion of this course, the students would be able to:

  • Analyse various ethical dilemmas present in the society and efficiently present it in form of classroom debates and discussions.
  • Demonstrate a clear understanding of various school of thoughts in the domain of ethics through their assignments.
  • Appraise their views on various aspects of ethics and present it with clarity through multiple engagements in the classroom.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:5
Introduction
 

Global Ethics: Conceptual Definitions, Historical Origins & Present Challenges Introduction to the course Ethics, Morals and Values Cultural Relativism vs Universalism (case study) 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
Ethical Theories
 

Rationalist Ethical Theories Contractualist ethics Deontological Ethics Utilitarian Ethics Discourse ethics, Alternatives to Ethical Rationalism Virtue Ethics Feminist & Care Ethics Postmodernist Ethics 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
Applying Ethical Theories
 

Ethics of International Aid and Development: Humanitarian Aid in Conflict Zones Global Distributive Justice and Global Poverty: Models for International Economic Justice Ethics of War: Torture in Abu Ghraib (Case Study)  

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:10
Ethics of Making and Sustaining Peace
 

Rohingya Issues: Are humanitarian interventions justified? The case study of Myanmar/Burma Global Environmental and Climate Ethics: Trade Agreements and Global Environmental Ethics Global Business Ethics and Arms Trade: The Ethics of Capitalism (Film Inside Job) 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:10
Ethics of International Law
 

Natural Resources Extraction from the Kimberley process towards universal legislation (Movie: Blood Diamond),  Global Journalism Ethics, Digital Media Ethics and Whistleblowing Practices: Snowden and Whistleblowing Ethical Implications of Emerging Technologies: Genetics, stem cell and embryo research: Embryo research and women’s rights 

Text Books And Reference Books:

Hutchings, K. (2010) Global Ethics. An Introduction, Polity: Cambridge  

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Copp, D. (ed.) The Oxford Handbook of Ethical Theory, Oxford: OUP 

Graham, G. (2008) Ethics and International Relations, 2nd Edition. Malden, MA: Blackwell.

LaFollette, H. (ed.) (2003) The Oxford Handbook of Ethical Practice, Oxford: OUP 

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern

Total

CIA (Weight)

ESE (Weight)

Attendance

100

45%

50%

5%

 

Mid Semester Examination

Group/Individual Assignment

45 Marks

 

End Semester Examination

Group/Individual Assignment

50 Marks

 

BENG191A - READING TECHNOLOGY IN/AND SCIENCE FICTION (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This common core course aims to provide a basic introduction to understanding the discourses of science and technology as represented in select science fiction. The course will help students understand some of the basic questions about the human condition that are raised, debated, and negotiated in and through representative fiction. Keeping the contemporaneity of issues today, the course will also emphasize how there is a crucial intersection of various ideas that cut across several disciplines with regard to technology and life, thereby making it crucially relevant to engage with it in the contemporary context. Anyone interested in questions of science, fiction, and human condition may choose this course.

Objectives:

  • To introduce students to the field of science fiction
  • To help students identify and raise questions through these works of fiction some relevant questions in the contemporary context
  • To direct students towards realising the intersection of various issues raised across different disciplines.

Course Outcome

At the completion of this course, the students would be able to:

  • Read and appreciate the literary aspects of science fiction.
  • Reflect on the implication of science fiction in contemporary times and show in in their writings.
  • Debate about various issues related to the portrayal of humanity in science fictions.
  • Provide an inter-disciplinary perspective towards analysing science fiction.

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:5
Introduction
 

This unit will provide students a basic overview of science fiction through some critical and conceptual lens. The New Critical Idiom Series, Science Fiction, would be used here to introduce aspects of SF to students. Locating the interdisciplinarity of the domain would be central in this module. Reference material would be handed out by the course instructor.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
Negotiating ?Reason?
 

This unit will raise crucial debates in and around questions of ‘science’ and ‘reason’. The unit will also help students recognize the importance of raising these questions from various disciplinary points of view, an important one being philosophy.

·         Isaac Asimov short story “Reason”

·         Select Episodes of the series Stranger Things

·         The Matrix

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:15
SF and technology
 

This unit will engage with how technology becomes a crucial part of negotiating SF. What are the fundamental concerns that Sf raises regarding technology and the human condition? How does technology come to be framed within SF? How is gender and sexuality framed within discourses of SF? How does SF address the anxieties of technology and future would be some of the questions engaged with here. Any one of the following novels may be taken up for discussion along with the viewing suggestion given below.

·         Aldous Huxley Brave New World

·         William Gibson, Neuromancer

·         Margaret Atwood, Oryx and Crake

·         “Hated in the Nation” from Black Mirror Season 3

 

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:15
Indian Science Fiction
 

This unit will engage with the science fiction in the Indian context. One of the main points of discussion would be to understand how Indian SF writers have engaged with tropes of SF that we are familiar with and what kind of an ‘India’ is imagined thereof which has implications socially, politically and culturally.

·         Vandana Singh “Delhi”

Sumit Basu Turbulence

Text Books And Reference Books:

Compilation

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Hollinger, Veronica. “Contemporary Trends in Science Fiction.” Science Fiction Studies.No. 78, Vol. 26, 1999.

Bell, David and Barbara M. Kennedy. Eds. The Cybercultures Reader. Routledge, 2000. (Excerpts)

Carey, Peter. What is Post-humanism? Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 2010.

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern

Total

MSE (Weight)

ESE (Weight)

Attendance

100

45%

50%

5%

 

Mid Semester Examination

Group/Individual Assignment

45 Marks

 

End Semester Examination

Group/Individual Assignment

50 Marks

BHIS191A - ENCOUNTERING HISTORIES: THE FUTURE OF THE PAST (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description:

The influence and presence of the past is felt everywhere and every day in our lives. Movies, newspapers or the internet bombard us and expose us to the past – both familiar and unfamiliar. However, the barrage of information and the forces of globalisation have led to increasing questions on the relevance and the value of the past – indeed a denial even. This course will engage the students with the myriad ways in which the past, though no longer present – is a presence in our lives today. It will introduce the students to think historically, relate to their memories of their own past and make them aware of the multiple perspectives which will enable them to read, write and reflect on the past; or in other words, make history. 

This course will introduce students to the methodological and theoretical questions that animate and inform the practice of history. How do professional historians work? What is their goal? How do they locate and analyze source materials? What kinds of arguments do historians try to make? How, ultimately, is history produced? This course will ask how (or whether) historians’ particular sources – and their location in the archives – can give voice to the ordinary and of things ‘past’. Moreover, the course will address how the advent of the information age impact upon the historians’ profession by exploring how modern technology – whether film, photography, or the internet – changed the way historians work and address their audience.

Course Objectives:

  • To familiarize the students with foundational concepts in history and historical enquiry such as fact, fiction, truth, narrative, memory, conservationism and counterfactuals.
  • To identify and make students aware of the importance of historical awareness to arrive at independent and informed opinion and contribute meaningfully in local and global affairs and debates.
  • To equip students with an understanding of ‘history’ and the characteristics of ‘the past’ in present day society.
  • To help develop proficiency in research, analysis and writing; and to encourage wide, independent, selective reading on historical subject matter to foster a sustained, reasoned, well focused argument, based on a broad selection of evidence.
  • To identify arguments in historical works in order to be able to critique evidence used in support of the arguments.
  • To interpret varied sources and place them within their proper historical context to integrate secondary sources into their own original narratives and distinguish between different kinds of history.

 

 

 

Course Outcome

 

  • Students will discover how and why historians debate issues of evidence and interpretation and learn to distinguish between various schools or styles of academic history.
  • Students will learn to critically engage with representations of the past in the present to enable them to analyze and use evidence in interrogating historical accounts.
  • Students will be able to critically reflect and engage with the interface between the past and the present, fostering a healthy appreciation for history and its imprint on our present world.
  • Students will understand how historical narratives are shaped by states, organizations, and individuals. 
  • Students will better analyze the interaction between history and politics when following the news and in examining historical cases.
  • Students will appreciate how issues of identity and memory factor into our historical understandings and how this can condition present day policies and decision-making.

 

 

 

 

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
The Many Pasts
 

a)     Doing History - The Place of the Past.

b)    Facts, Fiction and Lies: Interrogating evidence - paintings, films, novels.

 

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:15
The Use and Abuse of History
 

a) Voice and the Subject: Narratives and Counter-narratives – Winston Churchill, Velupillai Prabhakaran, Pirates of the Caribbean, Tom and Jerry

b) Locating the Popular: Historical Fiction or Fictionalised History– Exploring the Fantasy Worlds of Ice Age, Hogwarts, Narnia, Westeros and Middle-earth.

c) The Past Today: The Ayodhya Debate and the Ram Janmbhoomi issue, Dwarka, Kapilavastu.

d) Historical Monuments and their Authorship/Ownership: The Temple Mount and Taj Mahal.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
Locating Sources: The Historian's Voice
 

a)     History and the Visual: Photography, Film and the Image – Gladiator, Schindler’s List, 300, Gone with the Wind, Jodha Akbar and Mohenjo Daro

b)    Historical Re-enactments? Light and Sound Shows at Golconda, Red Fort and Khajuraho.

 

c)     Alternate Histories: Oral Histories, Sports Histories, Graphic Novels, Caricatures and Political Cartoons.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:10
Memory, Commemoration, and Silence
 

a)     Memory and History: Power and the Production of History –Museums and Memorials.

b)    ‘Truth’ and ‘myth’: History as Conspiracy – Insider and Outsider Perspectives – the Aryan Debate, Hindutva Ideology and Neo-Nazis.

c)     Private Lives and Public Affairs: The British Monarchy, the Nehru-Edwina Affair. 

 

d)    Suppressing the Text: State Secrets and Declassification – Wikileaks and the Netaji Files.

Text Books And Reference Books:

·    Davis, Natalie Z. 1981. The Possibilities of the Past, Journal of Interdisciplinary History, Vol. 12, No.2, The New History: The 1980s and beyond II, pp. 267-275.
·    Gaddis, John Lewis. 2002. The Landscape of History: How Historians Map the Past, New York:  Oxford Univ Press.
·    Gathercole, Peter and David Lowenthal (eds.) 1994. The Politics of the Past, New York: Routledge.
·    Hodder, Ian and Scott Hutson. 2003 (Third Edition). Reading the Past, New York: Cambridge Univ. Press.
·    Kumar, Ravinder 1989. The Past and the Present: An Indian Dialogue, Daedalus, Vol. 118, No.4, pp. 27-49.
·    Thompson, Paul. 2000. The Voice of the Past: Oral History, New York: Oxford Univ Press.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

·      Banerjee, Sumanta, 2003. Ayodhya: A future bound by the past, Economic and Political Weekly, Vol. 38, No. 27, pp. 2795-2796.
·      Buchli, Victor and Gavin Lucas 2001. Archaeologies of the Contemporary Past, Routledge.
·      Carr, E.H. 1967. What is History,Vintage.
·      Chalcraft, David et.al. 2008. Max Weber Matters: Interweaving Past and Present, Ashgate.
·      Chapman, James 2005. Past and Present: National Identity and the British Historical Film, I.B.Tauris.
·      Clarke, Katherine 2008. Making Time for the Past: Local History and the Polis, Oxford Univ Press.
·      Damm, Charlotte 2005. Archaeology Ethno-History and Oral Traditions: approaches to the indigenous past, Norwegian Archaeological Review, Vol. 38, No. 2, pp. 73-87.
·      Fowler, Don D. 1987. Uses of the past: Archaeology in the service of the state, American Antiquity, Vol. 52, No. 2, pp. 229-248.
·      Greene, Naomi 1999. Landscapes of Loss: the Nationalist Past in Postwar French Cinema, Princeton Univ Press.
·      Hamilakis et. al. 2001. Art and the Re-presentation of the Past, The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute, Vol. 7, No. 1, pp. 153-156.
·      Muller, Jan-Werner 2004. Memory and Power in Post-War Europe: Studies in the presence of the past, Cambridge Univ. Press.
·      Murray, Williamson and Richard Hart Sinnreich (eds.) 2006. The Past as Prologue: The Importance of History to the Military Profession, Cambridge Univ Press.
·      Piercey, Robert 2009. The Uses of the Past from Heidegger to Rorty:Doing Philosophy Historically, Cambridge Univ. Press.
·      Shrimali, K.M. 1998. A Future for the Past? Social Scientist, Vol. 26, No. 9, pp. 26-51.
·      Stone, Peter G. and Philippe G. Planel 1999. the Constructed Past, Routledge.
·      Walsh, Kevin 1992. The Representation of the Past: Museums and heritage in the post-modern world, Routledge

Evaluation Pattern

CIA - Evaluation Pattern

Assignment 1

Assignment 2

Total

20

20

40

 

Mid Semester Examination

Submission

Presentation

Total

30

20

50

 

End Semester Examination

Submission

Presentation

Total

30

20

50

 

BMED191A - MEDIA LITERACY (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description:

Media literacy is designed to help students develop an informed and critical understanding of the nature of an ever expanding and increasingly dominating mass media –as information sources, as entertainment, and as an industry–as well as to examine, interpret, and evaluate the messages contained within, and their social, cultural and political implications. This course exposes the student to the base complexities of media literacy, develop critical thinking skills, the provides the methods of analysis necessary to interpret media content as well as methods of critical writing appropriate to media analysis.

 

Course Objectives:

 

  • Understand how media messages create meaning
  • Identify who created a particular media message
  • Recognize what the media maker wants us to believe or do
  • Name the "tools of persuasion" used
  • Recognize bias, spin, misinformation and lies
  • Discover the part of the story that's not being told
  • Evaluate media messages based on our own experiences, beliefs and values
  • Create and distribute our own media messages
  • Become advocates for change in our media system Learning Outcome.
  • Will be able to apply the principles of ethics to the subject of study (area of research), while appreciating the context in which the medium functions.

Course Outcome

 

  • To lay the foundation of Public Relations practice
  • To train the students in media relations
  • To introduce the concept of Corporate Communication
  • To familiarize the students with concepts like propaganda, public opinion, advertising, and public relations.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:15
Introduction to Media Literacy
 
  • Understanding what is media literacy?

  • The Power of Media Literacy 

  • Conditions for Media Learning

  • Media Literacy Skills

 

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:15
Approaches to Media Literacy
 

 

  • Key Concepts of Media Literacy

  • The Media Triangle

  • Surveys, Media logs and historical perspectives

  • Understand, analyze and evaluate- finding hidden messages

  • Digital Citizenship

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:15
Media Analysis
 

 

  • Deconstructing Ads

  • Detecting Bias in News

  • Critical Reading of Websites

Text Books And Reference Books:
  • Alexander, A. & Hanson, J. (2007). Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Media and Society. McGraw-Hill Contemporary Learning Series: Dubuque, IA. 384 pp.

  • Hiassen C. (1998). Team Rodent: How Disney Devours the World. Ballantine Books. 96 pp

  • Kilbourne, J. (1999). Can’t Buy My Love: How Advertising Changes the Way We Think and Feel. Simon and Schuster: New York. 366 pp.

  • McLuhan, M. (1998) Understanding Media: The Extensions of Man. Seventh Printing. MIT Press: MA 365 pp. (orig. pub. In 1911).

 

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading
Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1: Submissions for 20 marks

Mid Semester Submission: 25 marks

CIA 3: Submissions 20 marks

End Semester Submission: Submission for 30 marks

 

BMED191B - UNDERSTANDING THE VISUAL LANGUAGE OF CINEMA (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Cinema emerged as a major form of entertainment in the 20th century. Ever since its invention it has striven to captivate people and has evolved as a means for people to engage with themselves as well as the world. Over the years it has also evolved a language of its own.This course would provide students a thorough knowledge of the conceptual and practical aspects of storytelling in films. cinematography through engagement with works of eminent cinematographers from around the world.

  • Appreciate cinematography as a combination of artistic and technological endeavours

  • Understand the basics concepts of cinematography and shot design

  • Harness the power of natural and artificial lighting  to compose powerful shots

  • Explore the creative possibilities of cinematography and understand its importance in effective storytelling.

Course Outcome

  • To appreciate cinematography and understand its technicalities

  • To understand the basic design and concepts of cinematography.

  • To appreciate the importance of cinematography in cinema

  • To familiarize with  concepts of effective storytelling

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
Introduction to the language of cinema
 

Cinematography as an art; Art of visual storytelling; Evolution of cinematography; Eminent cinematographer’s from world cinema; Cinematography and effective storytelling.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:15
The Cinematographer?s medium and Tools
 

Light , Camera, Lenses, Basics of Lighting; Various types of light sources and their practical application;Colour temperature, Lens Choice, Lens filters, Exposure/F‐Stop/Shutter/ISO; Depth of field Camera operating; Hands‐on introduction to camera equipment

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
Visualising and Shot Design
 

Composition & Framing; Types of Shots; Shot design for single camera and multi camera productions

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:10
Camera Placement and Movement
 

 

Camera Placement -how does it affect the meaning; Motivated Camera Movement.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Block, B. (2013). The visual story: Creating the visual structure of film, TV and digital media. Routledge.

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Alton, J. (2013). Painting with light. Univ of California Press.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1: Submissions for 20 marks

Mid Semester Submission: 25 marks

CIA 3: Submissions 20 marks

End Semester Submission: Submission for 30 marks

BPOL191A - PEACE AND CONFLICT MANAGEMENT (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course views conflict as an ever-present component of any decision-making environment, including Planning and Public Administration and International Relations. It offers tools for: understanding the nature of conflict at different levels and of individual and joint decision-making processes; devising individual and group strategies that minimize the destructive consequences of conflict; and, identifying solutions satisfactory to all involved. Some conflict-related concepts and processes are general and context-free, while others are specific to the planning and policy fields. Some simulation games and cases, and the students' reaction to them, will provide the basis for class discussions about the nature of various decision mechanisms and the role of perceptions in managing conflicts. The course introduces students to the key concepts and theoretical approaches employed to explain and understand conflict, and the range of policies and practices that seek to manage, resolve and transform conflicts. Case studies from South Asia and the rest of the world are used to provide empirical illustrations in class. Students will be invited to analyze the successes/failures of different techniques employed by peace activists, policy makers, and peace research scholars. The final weeks of the course, this will be dedicated to examining challenges in contemporary conflict resolution. In addition to regular classes, students are also expected to attend specialized workshops organized for this course on the following themes: nonviolence (by an invited expert, tbc) negotiation and mediation (simulation exercise), and gender and peacebuilding.

Course Objective

● To provide a systematic introduction of concepts, theories and practices, with a focus on equipping students with toolkits of handling conflict and negotiation.

● To make students understand the mechanism of creating values and achieving integrative negotiation outcomes.

● To take an informed stand on the debates over the main ideas that constitutes the fields of conflict management and peace.

Course Outcome

● To understand the importance of and the ability of using communication and information exchange in conflict and negotiation contexts

● To provide a global outlook with comfort and competence in handling conflicts with employers, colleagues, customers, business partners, and clients from different cultural/country backgrounds.

● Students will also critically assess the study of conflict management and peace studies and will analyze how this subject has prompted enormous scholarly debate and disagreement both in history and other fields.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:9
Introduction
 

The Nature and Origins of Conflict: How and Why People Conflict, Differences, diversity and opportunity

Conflict: Meaning, Nature and types and levels of conflict, Violent and Non-Violent Conflicts

Conflict Mapping and Tracking

Conflict Management and Conflict Resolution

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:12
Conflict Management
 

A Holistic Approach to Conflict Management

Conflict Prevention and Preventive Diplomacy

Conflict Prevention and Early Warning

Stages in Conflict Management

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:12
Peace building
 

Understanding Peace Process

Stages in the Peace Process

Peacemaking, Peacekeeping and Peacebuilding

Negotiation and Mediation

Arbitration and Adjudication

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:12
Challenges for conflict management
 

Variation in Contexts: Culture, Religion and Identity

Contemporary Challenges: (1) Terrorism; (2) Environmental Conflicts

Prospects for Conflict Resolution

Text Books And Reference Books:

Baker, D. P. (2010). Conflict management for peacekeepers and peacebuilders: by Cedric de Koning and Ian Henderson

Galtung, Johan (1969), “Violence, Peace, and Peace Research”, Journal of PeaceResearch, 6(3): 167-191.

Bajpai, Kanti (2004), “A Peace Audit on South Asia”, in RanabirSammadar (ed.) Peace Studies: An Introduction to the Concept, Scope, and Themes, New Delhi: Sage.

Pammer, W. J., & Killian, J. (Eds.). (2003). Handbook of conflict management. CRC Press.

Fischer, R., Ury, W., & Patton, B. (1981). Getting to yes. Negotiating Agreement Without Giving in.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Bercovitch, Jacob and Richard Jackson (2009), Conflict Resolution in the Twenty-firstCentury: Principles, Methods and Approaches, Ann Arbor (MI): University of MichiganPress.

Levy, Jack S. (2007), “International Sources of Interstate and Intrastate War”, in Chester

Crocker et al. (eds.) Leashing the Dogs of War, Washington DC: USIP.

Menon, Ritu (2004), “Doing Peace: Women Resist Daily Battle in South Asia”, in

Radhika Coomaraswamy and DilrukshiFonseka (eds.), Peace Work: Women, Armed

Conflict and Negotiation, New Delhi: Women Unlimited.

Zartman, I. William (2001), “Preventing Deadly Conflict”, Security Dialogue, 32(2):

137-154.

Ramsbotham, Oliver et al. (2011), Contemporary Conflict Resolution, 3rd Edition,

Cambridge and Malden (MA): Polity

Evaluation Pattern

CIA - 25

Mid sem - 25

End sem - 50

BPOL191B - GLOBAL POWER POLITICS (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

The global balance of power is changing dramatically. As the world seems to be moving away from American Hegemony, the question of where power lies in global politics is becoming ever more significant. Great powers remain as the critical actors in the international system and the nature of the international order is determined by their interactions in war and peace.

This course focuses on the transformation of the global power politics particularly focusing on the power shifts in the post-cold war international system. The course will also introduce students to the emergence of new powers such as China, India, Brazil and South Africa and the changing dynamics of the international system. The course will examine whether great powers can cooperate in addressing the consequential challenges in the new century; climate change, nuclear proliferation, refugee crisis, international terrorism and other issues. The course will also examine the competition among the great powers in the South and East China Sea, and the West Asian region.

Course Objectives:

The Course introduces the students to some of the key concepts of international relations, theories of international relations and key issues pertaining to great power politics in the twenty first century. It provides the overview of the dynamics of strategic interaction between great powers and focus on great power competition during World Wars, Cold War period and the post Cold War period. The purpose of this course is to develop an understanding of the great power dynamics, the use of power by great powers in international relations.

Course Outcome

The course will help students to develop a good overview of the major contemporary challenges and issues in the Global politics. The course will demonstrate to explain the role of power in international relations. Students will develop an understanding of global power politics in the twenty first century.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:9
Introduction to International Relations
 

 International Relations: Meaning, nature and scope of international relations; Key Concepts of International Relations: Sovereignty, Anarchy, Balance of Power, National Power, Security and Globalization.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:12
Theorization of Great Power in International Relations
 

Theories of International Relations: Realism (Classical Realism and Neo-Realism), Liberalism (Neo-Liberalism), Constructivism.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:12
Great Power Politics in the Cold War era
 

First World War, Second World War: Causes and Consequences, dynamics of strategic interaction between the great powers including the alliances, Inter war period (multipolarity), the Cold War (bipolarity) and the post-Cold War period (unipolarity).

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:12
Globalization and Great Power Politics
 

Power shifts in the post Cold War international system, Emergence of new powers (rise of China and India as a challenge to the west), Great Powers; traditional and non-traditional security threats, Great Power Politics in the 21st century.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Baylis and Smith (eds) (2014), ‘The Globalization of World Politics’. Sixth edition, New York: Oxford University Press.

Ikenberry, G. John, Ed. 2002. America Unrivaled: The Future of the Balance of PowerIthaca, NY: Cornell University Press. 

Barry Buzan and Ole Weaver (2003), ‘Regions and Powers: The structure of International Security’ Cambridge.

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

John J. Mearsheimer, The Tragedy of Great Power Politics, updated ed. (New York: Norton, 2014).

William C. Wohlforth, “The Stability of a Unipolar World,” International Security 24.1 (Summer 1999): 5-41.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA-Evaluation Pattern

Assignment

Presentation

Test

Mid-Semester

20

10

10

25

 

Mid Semester Examination

Section A

Section B

Total

2X15=30

2X10=20

50

 

 

End Semester Examination

Section A

Section B

TOTAL

2X10=20

2X15=30

50

BPOL191C - FUNDAMENTALS OF PUBLIC POLICY (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

According to one definition, the domain of public policy covers everything that the governments decide to do or not do. In present times, though forces of market and globalization are exerting pressure on the state to cede ground, yet the institution of state is increasing its powers, intervening in newer areas giving greater significance to the sub discipline of public policy. The popularization of new research methods and techniques in the area of policy research and evaluation, and the increasing demand for precise, workable policy solutions for the world’s problems is further increasing relevance and legitimacy of policy sciences. This course tries to introduce the students to the world of policy sciences, how public policy emerged, what is its nature, scope, approaches and models. It also tries to make them understand the complex stages and requirements of policy making process and its evaluation. It will also acquaint them with the public policy universe in India, its rules, players, achievements and challenges.

Course Objectives

The objectives of offering this course are:

 To introduce students to the world of public policy

 To make them see its relationships to problem solving, government institutions and the people

 To make students understand the relevant debates, issues, challenges and applications of the domain of public policy

Course Outcome

At the end of the course, a student should be able to:

 Understand the evolution and development of the field of public policy

 Know about its fundamental features, aspects, approaches and their applications

 Understand how policies are designed, implemented and evaluated, with specific focus on India’s policy scene

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:12
Introduction to the World of Public Policy
 

Evolution, Nature, Scope

Approaches and Models on Policymaking

Policy Design, Tools and Decision Making

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:12
Stages, Processes and Institutions of Policy Making
 

The Processes and Stages of Policy Making

Policy Implementation

Institutions and Non- Institutional Players with Special Reference to India

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:11
Policy Analysis and Evaluation
 

Policy Analysis: Tools, Approaches and Models

Policy Evaluation: Methods and Significance

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:12
A Sector wise Analysis of Public Policies in India
 

Environmental Sector

Economy

Education, Health and General Welfare

Text Books And Reference Books:

Chakrabarty, Bidyut and Chand, Prakash, 2016. Public Policy: Concept, Theory and Practice, New Delhi: Sage.

Sapru, Radhakrishnan, 2017. Public Policy: A Contemporary Perspective, New Delhi: Sage.

Chakrabarti, Rajesh and Sanyal, Kaushiki, 2018. Public policy in India, New Delhi: OUP.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Hammersley, Martin, 2013. They Myth of Research Based Policy and Practice, London: Sage.

Goodin, Robert E., Moran, Michael and Rein, Martin (eds.), 2008. The Oxford Handbook of Public Policy, New Delhi: Oxford University Press

Banerjee, Abhijit V. and Duflo, Esther, 2013. Poor Economics, Noida: Penguin.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1 - 20 Marks

Mid sem - 25 Marks

CIA 2 - 20 Marks

End sem - 30 Marks

Attendance - 5 Marks

BPSY191A - SCIENCE OF WELLNESS (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:03

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course heralds the emergence of a new field of science that endeavours to understand how individuals and societies thrive and flourish, and how this new knowledge can be applied to foster happiness, health and fulfillment. Taking a dynamic, cross-disciplinary approach, the course explores the most promising routes to well-being, derived from the latest research in psychology, neuroscience, economics, and the effects of our natural environment. The course provides an overview of the latest insights and strategies for enhancing our individual well-being, or the well-being of the communities in which we live and work,

1. Understand the evolution and development of health and well-being

2.  Develop a holistic approach to living life well.

3.  Create optimal programs for individuals and populations.

Course Outcome

  1. Ability to analyze various perspectives from the latest research in psychology, neuroscience, economics, and the effects of our natural environment on well being
  2. Integration of various aspects to have a holistic perspective on wellbeing
  3. Ability to design interventions to enhance positive mental health in individuals and populations

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:15
Introduction to Well-Being
 

Well being as a concept, happiness, and subjective well-being, Expanding the repertoire of positive emotions: The broaden-and-build theory of positive emotions; Relationship with reality and its role in the well-being of young adults; Increasing happiness in life, Positive mental health in individuals and populations

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:15
Well-being across life-span
 
Living well at every stage of life: Resilience in childhood, positive youth development, life tasks of adulthood and successful aging; Role of meaningful relationships: infant attachment, adult attachment, love and flourishing relationships; Seeing the future through self efficacy and optimism; Role of Self efficacy in life arenas, learned optimism.
Unit-3
Teaching Hours:15
Socio-cultural and Economic Considerations
 

The relevance of subjective well-being to social policies: optimal experience and tailored intervention; The social context of well-being; Does money buy happiness?; A well-being manifesto for a flourishing society.  

Text Books And Reference Books:

Huppert, Baylis, & Keverne (2005). The Science of Well-Being.  Oxford  University Press.

Synder, & Lopez (2007). Positive Psychology. New Delhi: Sage Publishing House

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Coan, R. W. (1977). Hero, artist, sage, or saint? A survey of what is variously called mental health, normality, maturity, self-actualization, and human fulfillment. New York: Columbia University Press.

Boniwell, I. (2012). Positive Psychology In a Nutshell: The Science of Happiness (3rd edition). London: Mc Graw Hill.

Bradburn, N. M. (1969). The structure of psychological well-being. Chicago, IL: Aldine.

Evaluation Pattern

Individual Assignment

Group Assignment

Quiz I

Quiz II

Class participation

Attendance

Total

50

10

15

15

5

5

100

 

BPSY191B - ADVERTISEMENT PSYCHOLOGY (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Advertisement psychology is a branch of psychology which studies the pattern of responses by the human system to advertisement stimuli. Advertising is the art of influencing human behaviors to buy certain products. Recently  advertisers are discovering the need to know the facts which psychology can give about what attracts attention, what sticks in memory, what gives a pleasant impression, what persuades and what leads to the act of purchase. The field helps marketers and copyrighters to prepare effective advertisements.

 

Course Objectives

At the end of the course, students will be able to: 

1.      Understand the historical and scientific origin and development of the field.

2.      Learn the cognitive, affective and behavioural responses to the advertisement stimuli.

3.      Develop the skills to evaluate effectiveness of advertisements from psychological perspectives.

Course Outcome

At the end of the course, students will display: 

1.      To apply the psychological perspectives of advertisements in the real life setting.

2.      To integrate different domains such as cognitive, affective and behavioral responses in the field of advertisement.

3.      To develop the ability to make applications based on understanding of marketing strategies.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:15
Unit I: Introduction to advertisement psychology
 

Introduction to advertisements; its objectives and importance;

Types and forms of advertising;

Effects of advertisements - a psychological perspective;

Classic and contemporary approaches of classifying advertisement effectiveness.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:15
Unit II: Cognitive processing of advertisements
 

Influence of advertisements on buying behaviors;

Dynamics of Attention, Comprehension, Reasoning for advertisements;

Attitudes and attitude changes with the influence of advertisements;

Principles of persuasion and attitude change;

Achieving advertisement compliance without changing attitude.   

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:15
Unit III: International Advertising and Creating Brand
 

Emergence of International Advertising;

Advertising in Multicultural Environment;

Ethics in Advertising;

Integrated marketing communication and marketing mix.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Fennis, B. M., & Stroebe, W. (2015). The Psychology of Advertising. New York: Psychology    

Press.

Andrew,A. Mitchell. (1993).Advertising Exposure, Memory and Choice.Lawrence Erlbaum

Associates. Hillsdale, NJ.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Linda, F. Alwitt& Andrew, A. Mitchell. (1985).Psychological Processes and Advertising

Effects: Theory, Research, and Applications. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates. Hillsdale, NJ. London.

Rolloph, M.E. & Miller, G.R. (Eds) (1980).Persuasion: New Directions in Theory and

Research.Sage. N.Y.

Eddie. M. Clark, Timothy.C. Brock,& David W. Stewart. (1994).Attention, Attitude and

Affect in Response to Advertising. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates. Hillsdale, NJ.

Evaluation Pattern

 

Reflective Assignment

Presentation

Module Development

Attendance

Total

30

30

35

5

100

 

LAN121 - DEVELOPING FLUENCY AND CLARITY IN ENGLISH FOR BUSINESS (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course is designed for students to work with using English to help build business contexts for students business studies. This course introduces students to read and write for Business Studies. Since the discipline of Business uses specific registers and contexts to create content for English. The course is divided across three genres – Cases, Critiques and Essays and draws from the British Council’s course on Writing for Business’. The course instructors will put together a set of cases and contexts at the beginning of the semester drawing from the contemporary business climate and those would be discussed across the course.

 

Course Objectives: The course aims to develop reading, writing and critical thinking practices in students specifically from a business context. The course aims to establish the nuances of reading and writing as central

Course Outcome

At the end of the course, the student should be able to:

1)    Recognise, appraise, evaluate cases

2)    Develop critiques, and write essays

3)    Analyse a case and arrive at structural modes through which problems can be solved in the case

4)    Deploy critical tools to identify object of study, construct arguments after evaluating the object, and provide a point of view to support claims made.

 

Skills to be developed:

1.     Reading Skills

2.     Writing Skills

3.     Argumentation skills

4.     Analytical and Problem Solving Skills

5.     Critical thinking Skills

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:15
Cases (Level of Knowledge: Basic)
 

This unit will introduce students to ‘cases’ as a form of writing that helps locate significant business ideas, problems that require critical thinking and analysis. Students will be introduced to a variety of cases and taught how to read a case, break the various elements of a case down, analyse them and synthesise the ideas.

Skill Focus:

·      Note Taking

·      Summarizing a text

·      Understanding how ideas in a text are linked

·      Locating and positioning speaker emphasis

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:15
Critiques (Level of Knowledge: Intermediate)
 

This unit will introduce students to a range of readings that will help locate critiques through an analytical mode of reading business material. The unit will be geared towards enabling a critical thinking in students through a reading of the central ideas of the text/context chosen.

Skill Focus:

·      Recognising the writer’s stance

·      Locating key information in complex sentences

·      Inferring implicit ideas

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:15
Essays (Level of Knowledge: Advanced)
 

This unit will introduce students to the advanced structures of academic writing by looking closely at essays. The unit will enable students to create essays through reading and writing. Students would be specifically reinforced about the structure of an essay, its components, locating the argument, constructing one, using sources to substantiate claims, reporting research findings etc.

Skills Focus:

·      Paraphrasing

·      Expanding notes into complex sentences

·      Writing effective introductions/conclusions

·      Incorporating quotations

·      Writing Thesis statements

·      Developing research strategies

Text Books And Reference Books:

Required Reading: Readings will be provided as a compilation by the course Instructor at the beginning of the course.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

As per class readings directed by the instructor

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Pattern

CIA 2: Mid-semester written exam for 50 marks

CIAs: Written work that tests on student’s ability to read, analyse and develop cases and essays.

ESE: Written exam for 50 marks.

 

Testing Pattern

CIA - Evaluation Pattern

Individual Assignment

Group Assessment

Mid Semester

20

20

25

Mid Semester Examination

Section A

Section B

Section C

Total

2X10=20

1X15=15

1X15=15

50

End Semester Examination

Section A

Section B

Section C

Total

2X10=20

1X15=15

1X15=15

50

BBA231 - ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

The course focuses on the basic elements that determine human behavior in an organization. It provides the fundamentals of organizational behavior at individual, group and organization level. The course develops understanding organizational effectiveness by effectively managing its people’s behaviours at the workplace.

Course Outcome

On having completed this course student should be able to:

CLO1    Demonstrate understanding of the dynamics of individual and group behavior.

CLO2    Analyses the implication of human behavior in organization functioning.

CLO3    Apply concepts from OB in managing human behaviours at workplace.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
Introduction to Organizational Behavior
 

Meaning, Definition of Organizational Behavior, Contribution from other disciplines, OB Model, Challenges and Opportunities in organizational behavior.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
Personality, Learning &Values
 

Definition, The Big Five Model, Myers-Briggs Type Indicator, Other Personality Traits like Authoritarianism, Locus of Control, Machiavellianism, Self Esteem, Risk Taking, Self-Monitoring and Achievement Oriented.  Meaning of learning; Theories of learning- Classical Conditioning, Operant conditioning, Cognitive theory, Social learning theory, Principles of learning, Schedule of Reinforcement; Importance of values- instrumental and terminal values.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
Attitude
 

Meaning, Formation of attitudes, ABC model, Function of Attitude, Cognitive Dissonance, Changing attitudes; Work Attitudes- Job Satisfaction and Organization Commitment.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Perception
 

Meaning, Factors influencing perception,  Attribution Theory, Common short cuts in judging others,

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:8
Group Dynamics
 

Meaning and Types of groups, Stages of Group Development, Group Properties-Norms, Roles, Status, Cohesiveness, Diversity, Size; Group Decision making - Groupthink, Group Shift, Techniques.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:10
Leadership
 

Concept of Leadership-Trait Theories-Behavioral Theories, Ohio & Michigan Studies - Managerial Grid; -Contingency Theory-Situational Leadership and Path & Goal of leadership, Transformational, Transactional, Charismatic leaders, Ethical Leadership and Servant Leadership.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:10
Organization Culture
 

Definition of organizational culture-Culture as a descriptive term- Strong versus Weak culture-Culture’s Function-Creating and Sustaining culture-How employee learn culture-creating positive organizational culture.

Text Books And Reference Books:

·         Stephen P. Robbins, Timothy A. Judge and Neharika Vohra (2019), 18th Ed. Organizational Behaviour. Pearson Education Asia.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

·         Aswathappa, K. (2016). Organizational Behaviour(Text, Cases and Games), 12th Ed. Bangalore: Himalaya Publication.

·         Fred Luthans (2017). Organizational Behavior: An Evidence - Based Approach, 12th Ed. McGraw Hill Education.

Gupta, C. B. (2014). A textbook of organisational behaviour: With text and cases. New Delhi: S Chand & Company.

Evaluation Pattern
Evaluation Pattern
Component of Final Grade Max Marks per Component Weightage towards Final Grade Total Marks per Component in Final Grade
CIA-I 30 15% 15
CIA-II 50 25% 25
CIA-III 30 15% 15
End – Term 100 40% 40
Attendance 5 5% 5
Total     100

BBA232 - BUSINESS STATISTICS (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Business Statistics helps us to make business decisions under uncertainties. Such decisions must be objective and unbiased and based on quantitative data. This necessitates an analysis of data as well as understanding of statistical tools and models. With the business entities keen on making data-driven decisions it is essential for individuals working in this environment to possess skills to use appropriate statistical tools and techniques in order to make decisions backed by data.

Course Outcome

On having completed this course student should be able to:

CLO 1 To apply the relevant concepts of Statistics to a given context/business scenario 

CLO 2  To articulate a vague business problem by analysing data through Statistical techniques

CLO 3   To comprehend and interpret the results of statistical tests and make statistically relevant conclusions/decisions

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:6
Introduction to Statistics
 

Level of Knowledge: Conceptual

Meaning, Definition, Features, Importance and limitations of statistics. Meaning and difference between primary and secondary data, data collection methods. Classification and tabulation of data (problems)

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
Measures of Central Tendency
 

Level of knowledge: Analytical

Meaning , measures  of Central Tendency- Arithmetic Mean, median, mode, geometric mean and  harmonic mean(only theory) and partition values- quartiles, deciles, percentiles.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
Measures of Dispersion and Skewness
 

Level of Knowledge: Analytical

Meaning, Definitions,  Properties of dispersion -  Range ,Quartile  Deviation ,Mean Deviation from Mean and Median, Standard Deviation and coefficient  of variation. Skewness-meaning, difference between dispersion and skewness, Karl Pearson’s and Bowley’s measures of skewness.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
Correlation and Regression
 

Level of KnowledgeAnalytical               

Meaning, Definition and Use of Correlation, Scatter diagram, Types of correlation ­ Karl Pearson’s correlation coefficient, Spearman’s Rank correlation, Probable Error. Regression- Meaning and utility of Regression analysis, Comparison between Correlation and Regression, regression lines –X on Y, Yon X, Regression Equations and Regression Co­efficients. 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:6
Time Series
 

Level of Knowledge:  Analytical

Meaning, Components of time series, Calculation of Secular Trend-Moving Average method (2, 3, 4 & 5 years) and method of Least Squares.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:6
Sampling distribution and estimation
 

Level of Knowledge: Analytical

Introduction to Probability, Basic Concepts of Probability, Probability Distributions – Binomial, Poisson and Normal distributions, Expected Value.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:14
Introduction to Inferential statistics
 

Level of Knowledge: Conceptual

Introduction to testing of Hypothesis: Procedure for testing hypothesis - Setting of Hypothesis -Null and alternative hypotheses, - Computation of Test statistics, - Types of errors in hypothesis testing - Level of significance, - Critical region and value - Decision making.   Test of significance for Large and small sample tests, Z and t tests for mean and proportion, one way ANOVA,( Excel) Chi-square test for goodness of fit and independence of attributes. Simple problems only. 

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.      Sharma,J.K (2014) Business Statistics 4th edition Delhi: Vikas Publishing House

2.      Pillai &Bagavathi ( 2015) Statistics, S Chand

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.      Levin, R. I., & Rubin, D. S. (2014). Statistics for management. Delhi: Pearson.

Evaluation Pattern
Evaluation Pattern
Component of Final Grade Max Marks per Component Weightage towards Final Grade Total Marks per Component in Final Grade
CIA-I 30 15% 15
CIA-II 50 25% 25
CIA-III 30 15% 15
End – Term 100 40% 40
Attendance 5 5% 5
Total     100

BBA233 - MACRO ECONOMICS (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description:

·         To provide a strong base of macroeconomic principles and concepts relevant in managerial decision making.

·         To enable the students to apply the knowledge in managerial decision making process.

To enable the students to prescribe policies in the light of changing macroeconomic scenario.

Course Objectives:

 

  • To provide a strong base of macroeconomic principles and concepts relevant in managerial decision making.
  • To enable the students to apply the knowledge in managerial decision making process.
  • To enable the students to prescribe policies in the light of changing macroeconomic scenario.

 

Course Outcome

This course intends to provide the basics of macroeconomic theory and polices in order to understand the influence of external environment in doing business. The students are expected to understand the various macroeconomic variables that determine income, output and employment

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
Measuring a Nation?s Income and Cost of Living
 

Economy’s Income and Expenditure-Measurement of GDP- Components of GDP- Real versus Nominal GDP- The GDP Deflator; The Consumer Price Index (CPI)-Calculation of CPI- GDP Deflator versus CPI- Correcting economic variables for the effects of inflation- Real and Nominal Interest Rates-Limitations

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:9
Production and Growth
 

Economic Growth around the world: Productivity: Its Role and Determinants-Economic Growth and Public Policy- Investment-Human Capital

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:9
Goods and Money Market
 

Saving and Investment in the National Income Accounts- The Market for Loanable Funds- Policy Changes and Impact on the Loanable fund Market; Money-  Meaning and Functions-Money Supply;Full Reserve Banking and Fractional Reserve Banking- Central Bank Tools of Monetary Control; Classical Theory of Inflation- Classical Dichotomy and Monetary Neutrality- Velocity and Quantity equation-  Fisher Effect- Costs of Inflation.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:7
Unemployment
 

Identifying Unemployment-Labour Force- Unemployment Rate- Labour Force Participation- Types of Unemploument-Unemployment Insurance- Minimum Wage Laws.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:9
Aggregate Demand, Aggregate Supply and Influence of Monetary and Fiscal Policy on Aggregate Demand
 

Three Key Facts about Economic Fluctuations- Short run Economic Fluctuations-Aggregate Demand Curve, Aggregate Supply Curve, Two Causes of Economic Fluctuations; Monetary Policy Influence on Aggregate Demand- The Theory of Liquidity Preference; Fiscal Policy influence on Aggregate Demand- The Multiplier Effect- Crowding out effect- Stabilisation Policy; Active Versus Automatic Stabilizers

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:8
Short Run Tradeoff between Inflation and Unemployment
 

The Philips Curve-Shifts in Philips Curve and the Role of Expectations-Shifts in Philips Curve and  The Role of Supply Shocks; The Cost of Reducing Inflation Rational Expectations and the Possibility of Costless Disinflation   

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:8
Six Debates over Macroeconomic Policy
 

Economic Stabilization-Monetary vs. Fiscal Policy ; Handling Recession- Higher Spending vs. Tax Cuts; Monetary Policy-Rule vs. Discretion Based;  Central Bank Goal: Zero  vs. Non-zero Inflation; Government Budget- Balanced vs. Unbalanced; Tax Laws for Savings –Reformed vs. Not Reformed

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.      N. Gregory Mankiw (2015), Principles of Macroeconomics, 7th Edition, Cengage Learning India.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.      N. Gregory Mankiw (2019), Principles of Economics, 7th Edition, Cengage Learning India

2.      Ackley, G. (1976) Macroeconomics, Theory and Policy, Macmillan Publishing Company, New York.

  1. Ackley, G. (1976) Macroeconomics, Theory and Policy, Macmillan Publishing Company, New York.
  2. Stanley Fischer and Rudiger Dornbusch (1981) Macro Economics, London: Mac Graw-Hill.
  3. D.N Dwivedi (2010) Macroeconomics:Theory and Policy, Mac Graw-Hill: NewDelhi
  4. C. Rangarajan and B.H Dholakia (1979) Principles of Macroeconomics Tata McGraw-Hill Education

       7. Keynes, J.M. (1936), The General Theory of Employment, Interest and Money, Macmillan, London H. L Ahuja (2019) Principles of Microeconomics, S Chand Publishing, New Delhi

Evaluation Pattern
Evaluation Pattern
Component of Final Grade Max Marks per Component Weightage towards Final Grade Total Marks per Component in Final Grade
CIA-I 30 15% 15
CIA-II 50 25% 25
CIA-III 30 15% 15
End – Term 100 40% 40
Attendance 5 5% 5
Total     100

BBBA211 - EXPRESSIVE SKILLS (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:2
Max Marks:100
Credits:2

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description:

 

The course develops skilful communication practice in everyday life by appropriate verbal and nonverbal usages in oral and written forms. Students will be trained to effectively express their feelings, experiences, imaginations, ideas, and opinions with others in personal and professional spaces without difficulty and with clarity.

Course Objectives:

 

1)      To efficiently communicate ‘abstract’ expression by meaningful and tangible speech and action.

 

2)      To be aware of and use acceptable styles of oral and written communications in different situations faced in real life or in online community.

 

Course Outcome

On having completed this course student should be able to:

 

CLO1 Articulate own or others’ feelings, experiences, imaginations, ideas, and opinions.

  

CLO2 Evaluate and meet social and cultural expectations in oral and written communications pertaining to 

           different contexts.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:17
Oral Expression
 

Level of Knowledge: Conceptual

Oral Expression – receptive vs. expressive language, thinking vs. acting skills, ideation vs. innovation, visualisation, experience sharing and storytelling, opinion and debate, negotiation and conflict resolution.

 

 

EVALUATION–I                                                                                                       3 Hrs

Individual Activity

Joy of Expression – Think of a ‘happiest moment’ in your life! Trace the history of events or surprising circumstance/s that made you feel immense joy. Note down the background details and your reactions to happiness for a short or long time. Create a visualisation chart (using creative aids) on your happiest moment. Feel the happiness again by sharing the moment and its impact upon you with your classmates.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:13
Art in Writing
 

Level of Knowledge: Conceptual

Written Expression – formal and informal letter writing; email and text message writing; essay, report and case-study writing; creative, narrative and persuasive writing; blog and social media writing.

 

EVALUATION–II                                                                                                         3 Hrs

Group Activity (3 member team)

Art in Writing – A team of 3 students will be given a picture of modern art. Together they have to interpret the art and identify relationships and fine distinctions apparent or hidden. Team has to collaborate and develop a well written communication on the original meaning of the art for public dissemination. Present your team art and its meaning to the class and get feedback.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Sakyong Mipham. The Lost Art of Good Conversation: A Mindful Way to Connect with Others and Enrich Everyday Life. USA: Harmony Books, 2017 (editions in Hardcover, Kindle, Audiobook)

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.       Kathleen Adams, Expressive Writing: Classroom and Community. Rowman & Littlefield Publishers, 2014 (editions in Hardcover, Paperback, Kindle).

Evaluation Pattern

EVALUATION–I                                                                                                       3 Hrs

Individual Activity

Joy of Expression – Think of a ‘happiest moment’ in your life! Trace the history of events or surprising circumstance/s that made you feel immense joy. Note down the background details and your reactions to happiness for a short or long time. Create a visualisation chart (using creative aids) on your happiest moment. Feel the happiness again by sharing the moment and its impact upon you with your classmates.

EVALUATION–II                                                                                                         3 Hrs

Group Activity (3 member team)

Art in Writing – A team of 3 students will be given a picture of modern art. Together they have to interpret the art and identify relationships and fine distinctions apparent or hidden. Team has to collaborate and develop a well written communication on the original meaning of the art for public dissemination. Present your team art and its meaning to the class and get feedback.

 

BBBA281 - SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY PROJECT (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:0
No of Lecture Hours/Week:0
Max Marks:50
Credits:2

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This project will sensitize students on social issues.

Course Outcome

This project will sensitize students on social issues.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:25
Guidelines for report writing
 

Guidelines for SRP Report

·         Students are required to report on the work done with an NGO for 25 hours (mandatory)

·         Submit report – rough draft to Class Co-Ordinators

·         After approval- Two Final Copy to be Submit in Spiral Bound (one for student and one for University).

·         Font : Times New Roman, Text Size 12; Tiles Font 14

·         No signature in Acknowledgement

·         Normal A4 Size Sheets to be used; Glazing Sheets and Thick Sheets not allowed

·         No Header and Footer except for page numbers

·         Borders only to be in Initial Certificates and Cover Pages

·         No Logo expect Christ University, NGO Logo on regular pages  only on Certificate

Text Books And Reference Books:

NA

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

NA

Evaluation Pattern

PROJECT:25 MARKS

VIVA:25 MARKS

BBBH234 - CORPORATE ACCOUNTING (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Accounting is one of the most important aspects of the finance function which is, in fact, one of the very vital areas of functions of management. In today’s globalised economy, a joint-stock form of business organizations (JSCs) contributes and occupy in a large manner in any economy. Thus the knowledge of accounting practices of such joint-stock companies becomes very much essential for the undergraduates in business. By keeping these points in mind, this course titled ‘Corporate Accounting’ is designed as a basic course on corporate accounting. This course focuses on the basics of company and preparation of financial statements of Joint Stock Companies as per the Companies Act 2013. This course also focuses on various methods of Valuation of goodwill and shares. It also deals with accounting practice and procedure for amalgamation, absorption, internal and external reconstruction of joint-stock companies.

Course Outcome

On having completed this course student should be able to:

·         Read, understand and prepare financial statements of companies.

·         Find out Profit or loss prior to incorporation of a company.

·         Value goodwill and shares of a company by applying appropriate methods.

·         Properly account the corporate merger and acquisitions and 

.      Carry out accounting procedures with respect to the reconstruction of companies.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
Introduction to Company Accounts
 

Meaning - Features Importance –Types – Capital Structure of Joint Stock Companies - Forms of Capital Structure Issue of Share capital - Different Methods of Issue of Shares – Accounting for issue of shares and debentures.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:12
Final Accounts of Joint Stock Companies
 

Meaning, Statutory Provisions regarding preparation and Components of Financial Statements of Joint Stock Companies – Various items in Statement of Profit and Loss and Balance Sheet – Treatment of various special items and adjustments in preparation of final accounts of Joint Stock Companies - Preparation of Statement of Profit and Loss and Balance Sheet of Joint Stock Companies in accordance with Schedule III of Companies Act 2013

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:6
Profit or Loss Prior to Incorporation
 

Meaning and importance of pre and post incorporation period - Basis of apportionment of expenses and income - Ascertainment of profit or loss prior and post incorporation

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:7
Valuation of Goodwill
 

Meaning, Definition, Features and Types of goodwill – Factors determining the value of goodwill – Circumstances for valuation of goodwill - Methods of valuation of goodwill – Ascertainment of goodwill under Average profit method, Capitalization method, Super profit method and Annuity method.        

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:7
Valuation of shares
 

Meaning of valuation and valuation shares – Circumstances necessitating valuation of shares – Factors to be considered while valuing shares – Methods of valuation of shares – Calculation of value of shares under Intrinsic value method, Yield method, Earning capacity method and Fair value of shares.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:12
Mergers and Acquisitions
 

Meaning of Amalgamation and Acquisition – Types of Amalgamation – Amalgamation in the nature of Merger – Amalgamation in the nature of Purchase - Purchase Consideration - Methods of Calculating Purchase Consideration –Calculation of Purchase Consideration- Net asset Method - Net Payment Method - Accounting for Amalgamation on both the methods (Pooling of Interest Method and business purchase method)  - Journal entries and Ledger accounts in the Books of Transferor and Transferee Company – Preparation of new Balance sheet

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:8
Capital Restructuring
 

Meaning- Purpose- Process -Bonus Issue, Rights Issue and Buy-back of shares – Legal Provisions and Accounting Entries - Preparation of Restructured Balance Sheet.

Text Books And Reference Books:
  1. Jain, S.P., & Narang, K.L. (2012). Advanced Accounting, 2, New Delhi: Kalyani Publishers.
Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.      Dr. M. A. Arulanandam andDr. K. S. Raman(2019). 7th Edition, Advanced Accounting Vol – II, Himalaya Publishing House Pvt Ltd, Mumbai

  1. S.  Anil Kumar, V Rajesh Kumar and B Mariappa. (2014) Corporate Accounting. New Delhi: Himalaya Publishing House
  2. Gupta, R. L., &Radhaswamy, M. (2010).  Advanced Accountancy, 2, New Delhi:Sultan Chand & Sons.
  3. Gupta, R.L., &Radhaswamy, M. (2012). Corporate Accounting. New Delhi:Sultan Chand and Sons.
  4. Kaur, J. (nd). IFRS: A Practical approach. New Dehli:McGraw Hill.
  5. Monga, J.R. (2011). Fundamentals of Corporate Accounting, New Delhi :K.L Malik and Sons Pvt. Ltd,
  6. Shukla, M.C., Grewal, T.S., & Gupta, S.C. (2011). Advanced Accounts (revised edi) New Delhi:Jain Book Agency.
  7. Sehgal, A., & Sehgal, D. (2011). Advanced Accounting, 2, New Delhi: Taxmann.
Evaluation Pattern

Component of Final Grade

Max Marks per Component

Weightage towards Final Grade

Total Marks per Component in Final Grade

CIA-I(15 + 5)

20

20%

20

CIA-II

25

25 %

25

CIA-III

20

20%

20

End Semester

30

30 %

30

Attendance

5

5 %

5

Total

100

 

100

BBS291A - APPLIED ETHICS-A MULTICULTURAL APPROACH (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Ethics or moral philosophy is a branch of philosophy that involves systematizing, defending, and recommending concepts of right and wrong conduct. While it is easy to argue that what is right and wrong should be the same across all cultures, surprisingly it is not. This course is an attempt to enable students understand that moral principles though expected to be universal, have deep rooted connotations that make them unique in each culture.

 

Learning Objectives: On completing the course, students will be able to:

·         Appreciate multicultural perspectives of ethics

·         Make informed decisions on issues which involve ethical dilemma    

Course Outcome

On the completion of the course, students will be equipped with:

·         Ethical decision making

·         Global mindedness

·         Critical thinking

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:9
Human Rights
 

United nations universal declaration of human rights, articles of the declaration, women’s rights as human rights, political implications, practical approaches, women’s rights as political and civil rights, democracy as a universal value, the Indian experience, democracy and economic development, functions of democracy, universality of values.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:9
Racial and Ethnic Discrimination
 

Philosophical and social implications of Race, scientific literacy about race, race and social construction, social justice implications, collective responsibility and multiple racial, the over lapping characteristics approach defining a community, two general norms to assess collective responsibility ethnic and cultural identities, the color blind principle, color blind and color conscious policies, the responsibility criterion.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:9
Gender roles and morality
 

Introduction, kinds of social construction, construction of ides, concepts and objects, Gender and social construction, intrinsic inclinations, explaining gender and sexual diversity, domestic violence against women and autonomy.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:9
Abortion
 

Moral and legal status, defining human, moral community, right to life, the problem of coerced abortion in China and the morality of abortion in Japan (case studies)

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:9
Euthanasia
 

Active and passive euthanasia, intentional termination of life, risks and objections to the institutionalization of euthanasia, conceptualizing euthanasia in the context of the US, Netherlands and Germany, a critique on such practices.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Lawrence and Weber, (2015). Business and Society, Tata McGraw-Hill.

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Prakash Pillappa, (2015). Civic Sense, Excel Books.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1: Group discussion for 20 marks

Mid Semester exam: Exhibition for 50 marks

CIA 3: Group presentations 20 marks

End Semester exam: Written exam and Movie review for 50 marks

ESE: Section A: 5X5 =25 marks

          Movie review (Group work) =25 marks

BBS291B - GLOBAL LEADERSHIP AND CULTURE (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Leadership and the ability to lead is an important concept within our world of work. Though It has been studied and analysed for centuries there is no doubt that it is a complex subject. This challenge is amplified when we look at multi-cultural environments and global leadership. In recent years there has been an increasing amount of research into the role of cross-cultural leadership. However, the operationalization of global leadership differs widely from culture to culture. In Indonesia describing your past successes is an important part of motivating your team. In Japan this would be seen as bragging and be strictly frowned upon. It is evident that successful global leadership behaviours vary widely. This course is an attempt in helping students understand such diversities and help them cultivate global leadership skills.

 

 

Learning Objectives: On completing the course, students will be able to:

·         Understand the complications involved in leadership across cultures

·         Appreciate the need to lead people differently in different cultures

·         Inculcate decision making 

Course Outcome

On the completion of the course, students will be equipped with:

·         Global leadership skills

·         Empathy towards critical issues that bother leaders at global level

·         Decision making skills in cross cultural contexts 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:9
Introduction
 

Culture, systems approach to culture, key cultural terminology, cultural understanding and sensitivity, global transformation.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:9
Global leaders and intercultural communication
 

Introduction, intercultural communication process, models, non verbal communication, guidelines.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:9
Global leaders learning in response to change
 

Introduction, aspects of organizational learning, management mindsets and learning, individual learning

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:9
Women leaders in global business
 

Current status of women global leaders, cultural stereotypes, balancing work and family, glass ceiling, company initiatives to break glass ceiling, women and overseas assignments

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:9
Leadership skills to make globalization work
 

Lessons from CEOs, description of competencies, framework.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Kaitholil,GeorgeMake leadership your target, Bombay Better Yourself Books 
Sethi & Rajiv, Tips for effective leadership, Beacon books

Marshal & Tom, Understanding leadership, Sovereign World Ltd

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Abramson N R & Moran R T (2016) Managing cultural differences-Global leadership for 21st century: Routledge

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1: Class Test for 25 marks

Mid Semester exam: Written exam for 50 marks

CIA 3:Presentation/Group discussion 25 marks

End-of Semester exam: Written exam for 50 marks

BBS291C - COURTESY AND ETIQUETTES (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description: This course examines the relationship between language use, enormous variety of language experiences, belief systems, and behavioral patterns. On the other hand Etiquette helps smooth the path of our daily activities, whether it's meeting others in our daily interactions talking to someone on the phone, offering condolences properly or understanding how to talk to colleagues at a business conference. Being aware of the beliefs attitudes and etiquettes of individuals will help one to become more tolerant from one individual to the next and from one group to the next.

 

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes: Students will practice critical thoughts in comprehending the notion of culture, its relationship with language, Etiquettes and the key concepts of cross –cultural Communication. It also describes ways to apply proper courtesy in different situations. It will also help to better understand the change that constantly undergoes in personal and social use.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
Introduction: Greetings and Courtesy
 

Greeting a person, - the different ways of greeting, saying good bye to another person, Thank You, Excuse me, Introduction to oneself, Yawning, Coughing, Interrupting, Offering assistance/ help, refusing help, requesting privacy, speaking in a low voice,(speaking etiquette) waiting for help, accepting or declining an invitation, expressing admiration, The key principles of common courtesy, professional manners and the Golden Rule as they are practiced in the workplace environment,Classroom Etiquette and Student Behavior Guidelines, The guidelines for maintaining a civil classroom environment:

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
Manners and civility
 

Introduction to adjusting to a new culture, Theories on second language and culture acquisition, communication, National Standards, Culture acquisition through family and Homestays, Distinguish among the three main forms of communication in the workplace: verbal, nonverbal, and virtual. Proper and improper uses of workplace communication, the potential repercussions of poor listening in the workplace, the proper and improper use of technology in the workplace

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
Etiquette
 

Why Etiquette Matters, Identify common cultural differences, taboos, and customs that may be practiced in the workplace, Discuss ways to navigate and honor cultural differences in the workplace, Describe how to express an appropriate awareness of international and other customs. The Common Courtesies of Life, Polite Conversation, Telephone Etiquette, Correspondence, Basic Table Manners, Overnight Guests, Wedding Etiquette, Moments of Sorrow, Appropriate Behavior for Children, Gift Giving Guidelines.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
Business Etiquette
 

Introduction to Modern Etiquette, The Rules of the Workplace, Meetings and Introductions, Conversation and Listening Skills, Telephone/Cell Phone, Texting, Emailing and Internet Etiquette, Etiquette in Public Places, Employment/Volunteer Etiquette, Dining Etiquette, Social Gathering Etiquette (Guest and Host/Hostess), School Etiquette, Confidence Without Arrogance

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:7
Personal and professional Presentation
 

Restaurant Etiquette, Cellphone Etiquette, Voice Mail Etiquette, Air Travel Etiquette, Cocktail Party Etiquette, Office Gossip Etiquette, Business Dress Etiquette, Email Etiquette, Social Media Etiquette, Job Interview Etiquette, International Etiquette

Text Books And Reference Books:

Books on Common etiquettes

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Etiquette books

Evaluation Pattern

Students are evaluated on the basis of class performance and they have to do CIAs and exclusive Class presentations and workshops to create awarness on the etiquettes they have learned in the class

BBS291D - MAHATMA AND MANAGEMENT (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description:

Business leaders across the globe have heralded Mahatma Gandhi, the Father of the Indian Nation as a Management Guru. The Mahatma is now being rediscovered as more than just a political leader who gained independence for the country but is being looked upon as a master strategist and an exemplary leader whose ideas and strategies have great meaning for the corporate world. His high moral standards are what leaders today should strive to achieve. The syllabus is devised to enable students to understand the Gandhian principles and its relevance in the field of modern management.

 

Course Objectives:

  • To have an overview on the life and message of Mahatma Gandhi.
  • To understand the Gandhian ways of management and leadership.
  • To practice the Gandhian model of conflict resolution.
  • To inculcate high ethical and moral standards for the betterment of the society at large.

 

Course Outcome

 

Course Learning Outcome:

 

  • Enable students to understand Mahatma and his way of life. 
  • Facilitate in assimilating and practicing the Gandhian ways of management and principle centered leadership.
  • Enable students to be better citizens upholding Mahatma’s high ethical and moral standards.

 

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:9
Introduction to Mahatma
 

Level of knowledge: Basic

Understanding Gandhi: Childhood to adulthood transformation, influence of Books, Individuals, Religion, Family, and Social factors. Gandhi as rebel, as lawyer, as a political leader and reformer.

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:9
Management
 

Level of knowledge: Basic

Concept of Modern Management, Gandhian Concept of Management - Self Management, Emotional Intelligence, Social Inclusion, Communication; Different facets of Gandhiji - as a planner, organizer and administrator.

 

 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:9
Principle Centered Leadership
 

Level of knowledge: Basic

Characteristics of Principle-Centered Leaders - Understanding the seven deadly sins - Importance of building human relations - Pursuance of truth and nonviolence, openness, transparency, love and kindness in handling relationship.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:9
Conflict Resolution
 

Level of knowledge: Conceptual and Analytical

Gandhi as a Conflict Resolver and Problem Solver- Gandhian concept of Development and Conflict Management - Conflict resolution practices, art of forgiveness and reconciliation and Shanti Sena.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:9
Trusteeship Management
 

Level of knowledge: Conceptual and Analytical

Salient features of Trusteeship Management - Personnel Management in Trusteeship, Examples of Trusteeship Management - Experiments of Sarvodaya Sanghs, Sarva Seva Sangh, ASSEFA and other Gandhian/Sarvodaya Organizations.  

Text Books And Reference Books:

M.K. Gandhi, (2012) An Autobiography or The Story of My Experiments with Truth, Navajivan Publishing House, Ahmedabad.                                                                                                                                    

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

B.R. Nanda. (2011) Mahatma Gandhi: A Biography, Allied Publishers Private Ltd., New Delhi.                                                                                                                               

Louis Fisher (2010) Gandhi: His Life and Message                                                                                                                                                                                                             

Bose, Nirmal Kumar, (1948), Gandhiji’s Concept of Trusteeship, Bhangiya Pradeshik Chatra Samshid, Calcutta.                                                                                                 

Bose, D. C. (2012). Principles of management and administration. PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.                                                                                                                         

Covey, S. R. (1992). Principle centered leadership. Simon and Schuster.                                                                                                                                            

Films: 

Richard Attenborough, Gandhi.                                                                                                                                                               

Syam Benegal, The Making of Mahatma.                                                                                                                                       

Anupam P. Kher, Mine Gandhi Ko Nahin Mara.                                         

Peter Ackerman and Jack Duvall, A Force More Powerful.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA1  10 Marks

MSE   30 Marks

CIA3  10 Marks

End Assessment 50 Marks

BBS291E - SACRED GAMES AND THE RULE OF LAW (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:2
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description:

 

Mankind has always improved its mental and physical potential under the garb of sporting activities. Hence, Sports and Games has evolved with the society and has became a major part of our every day lives. With increasingly commercialisation of sports today, its challenges have become multifaceted. This course is trying to analyse and assess this relationship of Sports and society through multiple lenses of Law and its systems. 

 

* Disclaimer: This course is not associated with any piece of entertainment/ work of art with similar title.    

 

Course Objectives:

 

This course intends to familiarise the role of sports in society beyond entertainment. It tries to locate Sports and gaming’s position in contemporary legal system in India and the world. 

 

 

Course Outcome

  • To provide an exposure of evolution of Sports and Law along with their relationships. 
  • To familiarize the students with the rising ethical and moral questions in sports. 
  • To orient the students with the knowledge and skills required to take up challenges and exploit opportunities in the Business of sports. 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:7
Introduction to Sports and Law
 

History of Sports and its relationship with the law, Sports Law and the Rise of International Autonomous Sports Law bodies, EU law and Sport, Indian Law and Sport, US Law and Sport. Sports Laws in India, National Sports Policy, 1984/2001, Sports governing bodies in India, Recommendations by several committee.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
Sports Governance and Discipline
 

Global Governance of Sports Law, Sporting bodies, Organisational structure; setting up a club, Taxation of sports organisations, Funding and grant applications; lottery licences, Player and management liability.

Disciplinary codes: Internal disciplinary procedures, On-field offences, Dispute resolution bodies, Role of courts in the governance of sport and how courts gain jurisdiction to get involved in the affairs of sports governing bodies, Arbitration in sport (ADR), Court of Arbitration for Sport, Suspensions and appeals, Challenging decisions.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
Sports and Business
 

Sponsorship agreements, Ambush marketing, Broadcasting, Ticketing, Merchandising. Sports Marketing: Trends and strategies. Sports communication: Social media, Crisis communication, Celebrity handling.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:10
Ethics and Sports.
 

What is Doping?, World Anti-Doping Code, Purpose and scope of World Anti-Doping Agency, Responsibilities of Sportsperson, Identify the various violations under the World Anti-Doping Code (WADA), Therapeutic use:exemptions to anti-doping regulation, sanctions for anti-doping rule violations. Match-Fixing, Betting and Gambling. The treatment of gambling laws in various jurisdictions. The applicable Indian law on Match-Fixing and Spot-Fixing, Indian Criminal Law and Spot-Fixing. International Cricket Council's Anti-Corruption Code and compare it with football's response. Protection of players. Club policies and procedures. Social media policies. Data protection. Equality and discrimination, Gender Discrimination. Sexual Harassment Issues in Sports. Corruption in sport, Violence in sport, Concussion; second impact syndrome, Gambling and manipulation of sports, Sport and technology, Application of the WADA Code, Therapeutic use exemption, Testing and exemptions, Sanctions.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:8
Sports and Intellectual Property
 

Concept of Intellectual Property. IP and media rights, Image and player rights, Player contracts and rights protection, The role of Trade Mark law, The role of Intellectual Property Rights, Competition Law and Sports, Team Owners and IP, Olympic Games and Intellectual Property, Case Studies: English Premier League, Indian Premier League, Pro Kabaddi, etc.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Dasgupta and Shameek Sen, Sports Law in India: Policy, Regulation and Commercialisation, SAGE Publications Pvt. Ltd; First edition (15 June 2018)

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Gardiner, John O'Leary, Roger Welch Simon Boyes, Urvasi Naidoo, Sports Law, Routledge; 4 edition (7 December 2011)

 

Mudgal and Vidushpat Singhania, Law & Sports In India- Developments, Issues And Challenges, Lexis Nexis; Fifth edition (24 December 2015)

 

Katarina Pijetlovic, EU Sports Law and Breakaway Leagues in Football (ASSER International Sports Law Series), Springer Nature; 2015 edition (25 February 2015)

 

Andre M. Louw, Ambush Marketing & the Mega-Event Monopoly: How Laws are Abused to Protect Commercial Rights to Major Sporting Events (ASSER International Sports Law Series), T.M.C. Asser Press; 2012 edition (18 July 2014)

 

Frans de Weger, The Jurisprudence of the FIFA Dispute Resolution Chamber: 0 (ASSER International Sports Law Series), Asser Press; 1st edition (19 June 2008)

 

Russell Hoye, Aaron C.T. Smith, Matthew Nicholson and Bob Stewart. Sport Management: Principles and Applications (Sport Management Series), Routledge; 5 edition (12 January 2018)

 

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1- MCQs and Written assignments (Topics covered in the class) 30 Marks

 

CIA 2- Presentations (Sporting events) 40 Marks

 

CIA 3- Presentations (Ethics and Sports) 30 Marks

BBS291F - CONSUMPTION AND CULTURE IN INDIA (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

 

This course provides an opportunity for the students to engage with theories of culture through the context of consumption and contemporary consumer society. It focuses on the role of commodities and consumer practices in everyday life and in the culture at large. The emphasis is given particular attention to consumption's role in the construction of social and cultural identities. Students will consider critical responses to consumer culture, including the resistance and refusal of consumption as well as the attempted mobilization of consumption toward social change. 

 

Course Outcome

 

·       Define consumption as it relates to culture and individual/group/national identity

 

·       Summarize key debates on the economic, political and spatial effects of consumer culture

 

·       Classify consumption with regard to lifestyle, consumer subjectivity, meaning-making and resistance, keeping in mind that identity (race, class, gender, intersectionality, etc.) play a role in determining the former.

 

·       Analyze refusal, ethical consumption, and anti-consumption practices and how counteract mainstream media and cultural tendency to consume.  

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:9
Introduction to Consumption, Culture and Identity
 

Consumption and its relationship to Culture and Identity. Material culture and Consumer culture. Making sense of the Commodity. 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:9
The Economics, Politics and Spaces for Consumer Culture
 

 

Exchanging Things: The Economy and Culture, Capital, Class, and Consumer Culture. Taste & Life style and Consumer Culture. Making Sense of Shopping, Conspicuous consumption.

 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:9
: Branding, Gender and Consumer Subjectivity
 

 

Brands: Markets, Media and Movement. Circuit of Culture and Economy: Gender, Race and Reflexivity. 

 

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:9
Nation, Religion and Politics
 

 

Identities as a multimedia spectacle, Consume culture identity and politics. Consumer Culture on the border

 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:9
Consumption Ethics
 

Consuming Ethics: What goes around and comes around. Articulating the subject and Spaces of Ethical Consumption and anti-consumption practices.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Celia Lury, Consumer Culture, Second Edition (Routledge, 2011)

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

 

Elizabeth Chin, My Life with Things: The Consumer Diaries (Duke University Press, 2016)

 

Evaluation Pattern

Continuous Internal Assessment -1 : 20 marks

Continuous Internal Assessment -2 : 25 marks

Continuous Internal Assessment -3 : 20 marks

End-semester Exam: 30 marks

Attendance: 5 marks

 

BECH291A - ECONOMICS AND LITERATURE (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This course is aimed at undergraduate students to introduce to them the idea literature and economics are closely intertwined. The course discusses how literature is not just a reflection of the society; it is also a powerful tool for furthering the public debate on socio-economic issues. In that, literature is both influenced by economics and influences economics. The course will examine selected works of literature to analyse the characters and plots from the point of view of economics.

 Course Objectives

This course will:

  • acquaint students to significant discourses in literature that deal with the portrayal of  economic issues
  • help them understand how ideology, interests and power influence economic narratives in society
  • through class discussions help students analyse fictional events and themes such as the Arbitristas´ campaign against idleness, the idle and those unproductively employed, or the debate on individual versus regulatory ethics
  • train students to hone their writing and presentation skills to effectively discuss complex ideas.

Course Outcome

By the end of the course, students will be able to:

  • appreciate that fictional literature captures and discusses some of the most pressing socio-economic issues in our society.
  • understand the interplay between economics and literature and how that has in the past influenced the decisions of the state/monarchy;
  • read and discuss selected works in literature from an economics perspective;
  • effectively communicate complex ideas through written and oral presentation.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:15
Shelley's Radicalism: The Poet as Economist
 

Reading works such as ‘The Mask of Anarchy‘ and ‘The Revolt of Islam‘, where the poet Percy Bysshe Shelley explicitly satirises the government and calls for a radical transformation of society. In ‘An Address to the Irish People‘, which opposed the huge divide between rich and poor in society. His writings have had a huge impact on the society then inspiring working class to organise mass movements against the oppression and hypocrisy of the ruling order.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:15
The Invisible Man and the Invisible Hand: H.G. Wells' Critique of Capitalism
 

First published in 1897, H.G. Wells' The Invisible Man has given birth to innumerable literary imitations, film adaptations, and even a couple of television series, thus becoming a kind of modern myth. But as often happens in Wells' work, the science-fiction situation in The Invisible Man provides a vehicle for exploring a larger set of economic and political problems that preoccupied him throughout his career. In particular, although Griffin's invisibility has scientific causes, it largely has economic effects, above all, on the movement and transfer of money.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:15
The Capitalist Road: The Riddle of the Market from Karl Marx to Ben Okri
 

In spite of the refutation of Marxism in practice (and Marxism, remember, claimed to be above all a practical philosophy), and its repudiation by all who had any experience of the consequences of its grip on material life, it continues to exercise a significant influence among the denizens of one corner of the academy: in literary criticism. To be sure, not all are unreconstructed Marxists (indeed, some have been deconstructed and then constructed anew); and not all are Marxists of the same stripe. Yet they remain Marxists nonetheless.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Cantor, P., & Cox, S. (2009). Literature and the Economics of Liberty: Spontaneous Order in Culture. Ludwig von Mises Institute.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

The main course text is to be followed.

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern

The evaluation of the course is by submission as per the following suggested pattern

Course title

MSE (Weight)

ESE (Weight)

Attendance

Economics and Literature

45%

50%

5%

 Mid Semester Examination

Individual Assignment

45 Marks

 End Semester Examination

Group/Individual Assignment

50 Marks

BECH291B - DESIGNING POLICIES FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This course is aimed at undergraduate students to introduce to them the idea of sustainable development andsocial/public policies within that context. The course discusses the challenges of sustainable development, and of designing policies for it, in a global setting. It examines the interplay of politics and economics, with emphasis on modes and instruments of producing public policy.

 Course Objectives

This course will:

  •  acquaint students to significant discourses and issues in policy design and intervention with regards to sustainable development.
  • help them understand how political ideology, interests and power influence economic actions, processes and planning at the macro level
  • through class discussions acquaint students to ideas agenda setting and policy dynamics in the context of sustainable development goals (SDGs)
  • train students to hone their writing and presentation skills to effectively discuss complex ideas.

Course Outcome

By the end of the course, students will be able to:

  • appreciate the concept of development goals and the emergence of SDGs.

  • understand the interplay between politics and economics and how that influences the decisions at the state level;

  • identify and examine some of the major themes in public policy intervention and measurement of SDGs;

  • effectively communicate complex ideas through written and oral presentation.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:12
Institutional and Historical Background
 

The Historical Roots of the Field; Emergence of Schools of Public Policy; Sustainable Development Goals – the Concept

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:15
Modes of Policy Analysis
 

Policy Analysis as Puzzle Solving; Policy Analysis as Critique; The Tools of Government in the Information Age;

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:18
Producing Public Policy: Process, Challenges and Constraints
 

Agenda Setting; Arguing, Bargaining and Getting Agreement; Reframing Problematic Policies; Challenges of achieving the SDGs in the context of Economic Constraints on Public Policy; Political Feasibility: Interests and Power; and Institutional Constraints on Policy

 

Text Books And Reference Books:

Moran, M., Rein, M., &Goodin, R. E. (2006). The Oxford Handbook of Public Policy. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Addison, T., Harper, C., Prowse, M., Shepherd, A., Armando Barrientos, with, Braunholtz-Speight, T., … Zohir, S. (2009). The Chronic Poverty Report 2008–09. Retrieved from https://www.odi.org/sites/odi.org.uk/files/odi-assets/publications-opinion-files/2566.pdf

Bellinger, W. K. (2007). The Economic Analysis of Public Policy. Routledge.

Griggs, D., Stafford-Smith, M., Gaffney, O., Rockström, J., Öhman, M. C., Shyamsundar, P., ... & Noble, I. (2013). Policy: Sustainable Development Goals for People and Planet. Nature, 495(7441), 305-307.

Hausman, D. M., & McPherson, M. S. (2006). Economic Analysis, Moral Philosophy, and Public Policy. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Kates, R. W., Parris, T. M., &Leiserowitz, A. A. (2005). What is Sustainable Development? Goals, Indicators, Values, and Practice. Environment(Washington DC), 47(3), 8-21.

Mehta, A. K. (2002). Chronic Poverty in India: Overview Study. CPRC Working Paper 7. Retrieved from http://www.chronicpoverty.org/uploads/publication_files/CRPC-IIPA_2.pdf

 Sachs, J. D. (2012). From Millennium Development Goals to Sustainable Development Goals. The Lancet, 379(9832), 2206-2211.

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern

Course title

MSE (Weight)

ESE (Weight)

Attendance

Designing Policies for Sustainable Development

45%

50%

5%

 

Mid Semester Examination

Group/Individual Assignment

45 Marks

 

End Semester Examination

Group/Individual Assignment

50 Marks

BEN221 - LANGUAGE IN CONTEXT-II (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course is designed to impart the language skills in a natural way through the contents that are important not only to self but also to society. The course consists of four units, i.e. Technology and Self, Society and Sports, Popular Culture and Social Issues, and Life and Choices.  The course aims at improving the learners’ language skills that can help them to take a leap from textbooks to news paper or full length novels. The contents of the course carry the message of ethical concerns that the future business entrepreneurs are supposed to equip themselves with for a progressive and equitable society. 

 

In addition to the multiple forms of readings i.e. essays, poems, short stories, blog posts, graphic essays and comics, Language in Context II also focuses on contemporary forms of expressions like rap songs, slam poetry, memes, short speeches etc. which are not only highly popular but very effective modes of expression. Building upon the language skills developed over the course of Language in Context I, Language in Context II further initiates the development of analytical and critical thinking skills by exposing the learners to a range of issues which are highly contemporary and relatable in nature.

 

Pedagogy:

The teachers in charge of taking this course to the class are not only expected to elaborate, discuss and deliberate upon the topics given as a part of this course but are also expected to incorporate passive grammar and vocabulary development instructions as deemed fit according to the needs of the learners. The compulsory readings for the course would be decided by the team of instructors and so, not all readings here are compulsory, but are recommended.

 

Course Objectives: The course would:

       Familiarise the students to multiple modes of narrative.

       Make students aware of the ethical concerns that are relevant to contemporary society.

       Help the students improve their Listening, Speaking, Reading, and, Writing Skills.

       Help the students critically engage with multiple modes of expressions.

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes: After the completion of the course, the students will be able to:

•                    Read and appreciate simple as well as complex essays or poems in English.

•                     Creatively write about the concerns and care they have for society and self.

•                     Speak on the topics that address the common people’s concerns.

•                     Apply reading and critical thinking skills in contextual meaning comprehension

•                     Apply reading, writing, listening and speaking skills within the context of the topics studied

 

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
Unit 1. Technology and Self
 

This unit deals with write-ups about the various technological interventions one come across each day in life. From selfies to likes, it incorporates all themes which not only influence the youth but effect and shape them. The main objective of this unit is to place oneself in the digital era and analyze one's predicaments.

       Becca Klaver (2018) “Manifesto of the Lyric Selfie” (Poem)

https://www.poets.org/poetsorg/poem/manifesto-lyric-selfie

       Kim Z Dale (2014) “Licensed to kill time” (Poem)

http://www.chicagonow.com/listing-beyond-forty/2014/03/licensed-to-kill-time/#image/1

       Sarah Shun-lien Bynum (2017) “Likes” (Story)

https://www.newyorker.com/magazine/2017/10/09/likes

       Leandra Cole “Flor Mirror Exercise” (Photo Essay)

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
Unit 2. Society and Sports
 

Moving from the idea of self and its construction through various technological interventions in the previous unit, this unit takes sports as the central theme, and explores how the ideas of nation and nationalism are constructed by means of active participation/viewership in various sports events. Sports has been taken as the central theme for its relevance and importance in the life of the learners.

       Essay: “Watching the World Cup Through Sociological Lenses”

https://thesocietypages.org/engagingsports/2018/06/20/watching-the-world-cup-through-sociological-lenses/

       Speech: “Rahul Dravid’s Don Bradman Speech”

https://www.sportskeeda.com/cricket/transcript-of-rahul-dravids-speech-at-the-sir-donald bradman-oration

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7m9j4FZWtUY

       Comment: “Unity for What? The Togetherness Created by Sports”

https://thesocietypages.org/engagingsports/2017/01/23/unity-for-what-the-togetherness-created-by-sports/

       Poem: “Yogi” by Rodger Kamenetz

https://www.poets.org/poetsorg/poem/yogi

       Visual Texts: Invictus or Chak De India

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:15
Unit 3. Popular Culture and Social Issues
 

 

This unit incorporates multiple forms of expressions i.e. Graphic narrative, Rap Song, Tribal/folk Song, Slam Poetry, and Short Video which actively express dissent against the dominant and stable voices in the society. While the last two units had global representation of texts from across the world, this unit and the unit after this explores various issues and problems and expressions especially focussed on India. Dominant social issues related to caste, class and gender have been taken for discussions and deliberations in this unit.

       Sofia Thenmozhi Ashraf (2015), “Kodaikanal Won’t” by  from the album ‘Unilever’s Racist Fever’. (Category: Rap Song) https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nSal-ms0vcI

       “Gaon Chorab nahin”. (Category: Tribal/Folk Song) https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8M5aeMpzOLU

       “A Brown Girl’s Guide to Beauty” (2017), Aryana Johar (Category: Slam Poetry) https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ZX5soNoPiII

       Appupen (2016), Rashtraman (Category:  Graphic Novel) https://appupen.wordpress.com/2016/02/22/rashtraman/

       “Boys don’t cry” (2014), Vogue India (Category: Short Video) https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0Nj99epLFqg

       “Memetics and the Science of Going Viral” (2016), The Conversation (Category: Article)

https://theconversation.com/memetics-and-the-science-of-going-viral-64416

Memes on any contemporary topics can be taken along with the primary reading about meme.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:10
Unit 4. Life and Choices
 

This unit aims at developing an understanding on the issue of life and its choices. Food and displacement have been selected to throw light on this concept. It takes the area of food and tries to analyse the contemporary politics associated with the same. The area of displacement has been taken to understand how the right to live in one's birthplace gets compromised due to political interventions.

       “Vegetarians Only” (short story) https://www.downtoearth.org.in/blog/food/food-and-dissent-57869

       “Dalit Identity and Food: The memoirs of trauma on a plate” (article) https://homegrown.co.in/article/803216/dalit-identity-and-food-memories-of-trauma-on-a-plate?fbclid=IwAR1zmyvjaMoRLSo3_DhM5GC7h_tPLKzFYhXcTKDCGg-IIzvG__hioe_ygRw

       “A homeless Sindhi Woman”, Popati Hiranandani (poem) https://www.poetryinternationalweb.net/pi/site/poem/item/18457/auto/0/28794/A-HOMELESS-SINDHI-WOMAN

       “Exclusionary State” (Editorial, The Hindu)https://www.thehindu.com/opinion/op-ed/exclusionary-state/article24671602.ece

       Begum Jaan: Bollywood movie on partition, 2017 (visual text)

 

Optional reading:

       “Food and dissent” (blog post)

https://www.cseindia.org/food-and-dissent-6948

Text Books And Reference Books:

Compilation

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Reading List

 

The course-content is based on cloud-sourcing and is already provided under the respective units. The same will also be compiled by the course-coordinator and will be given to all the faculties concerned.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Pattern

CIA 2: Mid-semester written exam for 50 marks

CIAs: Collage, tableaus, skits, talk shows, documentaries, Quizzes or any proactive creative assignments that might help students engage with world as an interactive space. This is to be done keeping in mind the objectives and learning outcomes of the course.

ESE: Written exam for 50 marks.

 

Testing Pattern

CIA - Evaluation Pattern

Individual Assignment

Group Assessment

Mid Semester

20

20

25

Mid Semester Examination

Section A

Section B

Section C

Total

2X10=20

1X15=15

1X15=15

50

End Semester Examination

Section A

Section B

Section C

Total

2X10=20

1X15=15

1X15=15

50

 

BENG291A - READING CITYSCAPES: BANGALORE HISTORIES (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

The urban spaces of India have transformed immensely with increased global influences. This course attempts to explore various of aspects of cultural identity and compare those identities formed, represented and reproduced in the metropolitan context of Bangalore. The course enables students to think of the concept of 'the city' as a dynamic entity and analyse how our understanding of, and interaction with, the city produces knowledge of space, subjectivity and the “Other”. The city will be examined as a physical and socio-political structure.

 

Objectives:

  • To introduce students to the idea of the city.
  • To introduce students to narratives as told by monumental and representational cultures of cities.
  • To make students reflect on how cosmopolitanism and diversity are expressed in urban environments.
  • How Urban space mediate transnational and global links.
  • Help students identify and raise questions through these debates and ask some relevant questions in the contemporary context.

 

Course Outcome

 

At the completion of this course, the students would be able to:

  • Recognize the various politics that constitute the notion of city.
  • Reconstruct the idea of city spaces and reflect upon it in forms of various classroom engagements.
  • Critically appreciate the plurality of contemporary cosmopolitan spaces through various classroom engagements.
  • Appraise and evaluate the city of Bangalore in lines of their learnings.

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:20
This Unit attempts to look at the histories of Bangalore from cultural, literary and socio-political aspects. The discussions in classrooms may begin with a city walk from fresh lens. This exercise will make students aware of the lived experience tha
 

·         City Walk

·         “Majestic: The Place of Constant Return” Zac O’Yeah

·         From “Multiple City: Writings on Bangalore” Aditi De

·         From “The Promise of the Metropolis: Bangalore's Twentieth Century” Janaki Nair

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:20
This Unit looks at the sense of the city in the Digital Age and how the city is formed of politically aware people making it a public space of contestations and demonstrations.
 

·         “Reading the City in a Global Digital Age: The Limits of Topographic Representation” Saskia Sassen

·         “The Problem” Michael Goldman, Vinay Gidwani, Carol Upadhya

·         “The City as Dichotomy” Sharadini Rath

·         “Contestations Over Public Spaces” Lekha Adavi, Darshana Mitra And Vinay Sreenivasa

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:5
This unit tries to look at how the city has come to be from its time of conception. Karnad toasts to 'Bendakalooru', the place of boiled beans.
 

·         “Boiled Beans on Toast: A Play” Girish Karnad

Text Books And Reference Books:

Compilation

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Doreen Massey at al (eds.) (1999). City Worlds.

Fran Tonkiss (2006). Space, the City and Social Theory.

Diarmit Mac Giolla Chriost (2007). Language and the City.

Deborah Stevenson (2003). Cities and Urban Cultures.

Michael Peter Smith (2001). Transnational Urbanism Locating Globalization.

Gary Bridge and Sophie Watson (2010). The Blackwell City Reader

Evaluation Pattern

Activities

Group work & presentation

City Walk - could be accompanied by a public history scholar, a photographer, etc.

 Evaluation Pattern

Total

CIA(Weight)

ESE (Weight)

Attendance

100

45%

50%

5%

 

CIA

Group/Individual Assignment

45 Marks

 

End Semester Examination

Group/Individual Assignment

50 Marks

 

BENG291B - READING THE CYBERSPACE: PUBLIC AND THE PRIVATE (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

We become savvy about the world on a daily basis. Cyberspace aided by the internet is one agency that enables our knowledge and entertainment production, dissemination and consumption. We interact with the virtual space much more than we often interact with the real to the extent that the simulacra we live in have become more real/hyperreal than the real itself. In this scenario, it is important to read, understand, critique and reorient our relationship with the cyberworld we live in and breathe through. The course will also deal with aspects of the public as personal and the personal as public. This course is an attempt to engage with these aspects by negotiating with the virtually real.  

Objectives

  • To read and comprehend the cyberspace
  • To critically engage with the virtual and the real
  • To examine our own production, dissemination and consumption of realities in this virtual world we negotiate
  • To understand the nuances of the private space and public space
  • To understand internet and its potential

Course Outcome

At the completion of this course, the students would be able to:

  • Assess the notion of cyberscape and its contemporary implication and present in through classroom debates and discussions.
  • Clearly distinguish between the virtual and the real and present it in their writings and discussions.
  • Raise awareness about the contemporary problems pertaining to this field through multiple engagements.
  • Learn the use of social media for promoting various social and ecological issues.

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
Introduction to Cyberculture and the Cyberspace
 

           

To enable students to understand what we understand by the terms cyberspace and cyberculture. Will discuss key terms and modes of understanding the concepts and the manner in which this course will progress along with its aims and objectives.

  • Steven G Jones: “The Internet and its Social Landscape”
  • Ananda Mitra: “Virtual Commonality: Looking for Indian on the Internet”
  • David Thorburn: “Web of Paradox”
Unit-2
Teaching Hours:15
Cyberliteratures
 

 

This unit will attempt to enable students to deal with new forms of literature enabled by the cyberspace. It will look at how the internet and the cyberworld has reconfigured language, grammar, meaning, form and content for the digital native cyborg who seamlessly traverse the real and the virtual, the banal and the political. This section will deal with genres and the student and faculty can mutually decide on select examples from each genre.

  • Terribly Tiny Tales
  • Fan fiction
  • Hypertext Poetry
  • Slam Poetry
  • Twitterature
Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
Social Networking and Online Shopping
 

                

This unit will discuss aspects of freedom and the empowerment of communities through the cyberspace be it through social networking sites, online shopping, youtubing, Netflix, vlogging and blogging. It will look at how choices are mediated in the name of empowering the common public and how a certain hegemony gets constructed through manipulated consent.

  • Lloyd Morrisset: “Technologies of Freedom”
  • Film: The Social Network
  • Drama: An episode from Black Mirror
  • Andrei Gornyk: “From Youtube to Ru Tube, or How I Learnt to Love All Tubes”
  • Youtube
  • Netflix
  • Vlogging and Blogging
Unit-4
Teaching Hours:10
Surveillance and Knowledge Systems
 

 

This unit will attempt to look at the various aspects of surveillance that the digital and cybertechnology has equipped us with. It will examine how this constructs discourses of the body, gender and selfhood. This unit will also look at the manner in which knowledge and information has also been reconfigured and appropriated through digital and cybertechnology.

  • Pramod K Nayar: Biometric Surveillance
  • Swati Chaturvedi: I am a Troll: Inside the Secret World of the BJP’s Digital Army.
Text Books And Reference Books:

All prescribed texts

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Thorburn, David and Henry Jenkins eds. Rethinking Media Change: The Aesthetics of Transition. MIT Press, 2003. Print.

Jenkins, Henry and David Thorburn, eds. Democracy and New Media. MIT Press, 2003.

Snickars, Pelle and Patrick Vonderau, eds. The Youtube Reader. National Library of Sweeden, 2009.

Jones, Steve G. ed. Virtual Culture: Identity and Communication in Cybersociety. Sage Publications, 2002.

Evaluation Pattern

 Evaluation Pattern

Total

CIA(Weight)

ESE (Weight)

Attendance

100

45%

50%

5%

 

CIA

Group/Individual Assignment

45 Marks

 

End Semester Examination

Group/Individual Assignment

50 Marks

BHIS291A - THE POLITICS OF MEMORY: THE MAKINGS OF GENOCIDE (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description:

The course will look at Genocide – trace its ideological foundations and historical evolution from antiquity to the late 20thcentury. Genocide is a topic of enormous contemporary relevance, with implications for the construction of national identity and the responsibilities of the international community. While the focus will be on the Shoah (or Holocaust) due to its centrality within Genocide Studies, the course will also look at American, Asian and African cases. The analysis will be focused on the historical, cultural and social contexts along with the spatial, cultural and political memories they engender. The course will look at the phenomena of genocide through history. It will explore the causes and course of various episodes of genocide throughout world history, using a comparative approach. 

The core case studies are Armenia, the Jewish Holocaust, Cambodia and Rwanda, as well as pre-1900 genocides (particularly Native Americans and Africans). The students will analyze how the memory of genocide has been used and abused for political and other ends. This course is designed to challenge and enhance students pre-existing historiographical skills and encourage interdisciplinary awareness. The course concludes by asking students whether historical understanding can help us to prevent genocide in the future.

Course Objectives:

  • To investigate the ideological, cultural, social, and economic causes of persecution, including but not limited to genocide according to strict legalistic definitions.
  •  It will examine the strategies that victims and perpetrators have used to cope at the time and afterwards with the moral issues involved. 
  • To consider the moral and ethical choices made by the individuals/institutions involved in planning, perpetrating, witnessing, ignoring, or being victimized during genocides and mass atrocities.
  • To prod students to consider the uses and abuses of genocide history, such as genocide memorials and Holocaust denial.
  • It will study the influence of political memory and the role it plays in making of and deciding genocide.
  • Students will also critically assess the study of genocide and how this subject has prompted enormous scholarly debate and disagreement both in history and other fields. 

Course Outcome

  • This course is designed to teach students both the importance and limitations of history as an academic discipline, and the dangers of history when misused in the construction of national and other group identities. 
  •  This course will enable the students to identify the nature of ethnic cleansing and genocide and to discover the common historical, political and sociological threads that unite these tragedies.
  • The discussion and analysis of a series of case studies including, among others: the near extermination of First Nations people by colonizers of the New World, the Armenian genocide, the man-made famines, the Holocaust, the displacement of peoples in the aftermath of the Second World War in Europe and Africa, and the case of ethnic cleansing and genocide during the wars – will expose the students to the multiple narratives and memories of what constitutes Genocide.
  • Students are forced to confront core disciplinary issues related to the construction of political memory through their study of the makings of Genocide vis-à-vis the attempt to annihilate people because of their membership of a real or perceived group.
  • The students will be made aware of the adequacies and shortcomings in the historians’ tools to address this phenomenon, compare episodes of genocide, relate to the disagreements over the fundamental definition of genocide, how societies have constructed ‘us and them’ dichotomies of difference and how these been mobilized in genocidal projects.
  • It is unlikely that students will enjoy studying the history of genocide. On the other hand, it is almost certain that each student will finish the course with a different perspective on world history and human society.

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:9
Theory of Genocide and Mass Killing
 

a)    Origins of Genocide: Why study genocide and other mass atrocities?

b)   Approaches to Genocide – From definition to process.

 

c)    Antiquity of Genocide – Carthage, General Ran Min, Albigensian Crusade, Genghis Khan and the Mongol hordes – Were these episodes of Genocide?

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:12
Empires, Race and Genocide
 

a)     Empire building and the roots of mass murder – Native Americans and French conquest of Algeria

b)    Ordinary murderers and a genocidal mind- Nazism, Stalinism and Maoism

 

c)     The economics of mass atrocities –Colonization of Australia and Tasmania

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:12
Patterns of Mass Violence
 

a)    Genocide and morality – Great Irish famine and famines in British India

 

b)   The logistics of annihilation – Rwanda and Cambodia

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:12
Genocide in Collective Memory
 

a)    The strategic logic of mass killing – Bangladesh and Sri Lanka

 

b)   History, politics, memory and representation of genocide - Perpetrators and collaborators

Text Books And Reference Books:

·     Adam Jones, Genocide:  A Comprehensive Introduction, Routledge, 2006.
·       Donald Bloxham and A. Dirk Moses (ed.), The Oxford Handbook of Genocide Studies, Oxford University Press, 2010.
·       Edward S. Herman and David Peterson, The Politics of Genocide, Monthly Review Press, 2011.
·       Graham C. Kinloch and Raj P. Mohan (eds) Genocide: Approaches, Case Studies, and Responses, Algora Publishing, 2005.
·       John Docker, The Origins of Violence: Religion, History and Genocide, Pluto Press 2008.
 ·       Robert Gellately and Ben Kiernan (eds.), The Specter of Genocide: Mass Murder in Historical Perspective, Cambridge University Press, 2003.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

·     Adam LeBor, “Complicity with Evil”: The United Nations in the Age of Modern Genocide, Yale University Press, 2006.
·       Alan S. Rosenbaum (ed) Is the Holocaust Unique? Perspectives on Comparative Genocide (Third Edition), Westview, 2008.
·       Dinah L. Shelton (ed) Encyclopedia of Genocide and Crimes Against Humanity, Vol. 1-3, MacMillan Library Reference, 2004.
·       Donald Bloxham, Genocide on Trial: War Crimes Trials and the Formation of Holocaust History and Memory, Oxford University Press, 2001.
·       Donald Bloxham, The Great Game of Genocide: Imperialism, Natinalism, and the Destruction of the Ottoman Armenians, Oxford University Press, 2005.
·       Donald G. Dutton, The Psychology of Genocide, Massacres, and Extreme Violence: Why “Normal” People Come to Commit Atrocities, Praeger Security International, 2007.
·       Helmut Dubiel and Gabriel Motzkin (ed.), The Lesser Evil: Moral Approaches to Genocide Practices, Routledge, 2004.
·       Howard ball, Genocide: A Reference Handbook, ABC-Clio, 2011.
·       Jay Winter (ed), America and the Armenian Genocide of 1915, Cambridge University Press, 2003.
·       John Laband (ed.), Daily Lives of Civilians in Wartime Africa: From Slavery Days to Rwandan Genocide, Greenwood Press, 2007.
·       The Great Irish Famine Reader, Prepared by the Irish Famine Curriculum Committee, 1998.
·       Tom Fawthrop and Helen Jarvis, Getting Away with Genocide: Elusive Justice and the Khmer Rouge Tribunal, Pluto Press, 2004.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA - Evaluation Pattern

Assignment 1

Assignment 2

Total

20

20

40

 

Mid Semester Examination

Submission

Presentation

Total

30

20

50

 

End Semester Examination

Submission

Presentation

Total

30

20

50

 

 

 

BMED291A - INTER-CULTURAL COMMUNICATION (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

The aim of the course is to offer students the opportunity to understand, explore and appreciate the nature of human diversity and globalization by providing a direct international experience in a virtual collaborative learning environment with students.

Course Outcome

·         Identify and explain basic theories of human interaction within multi-cultural environments.

·         Apply basic principles of communication within various cultural settings.

·         Identify and explain the specific culturally oriented communication needs of a variety of marginal or sub-cultural groups

·         Apply principles of human communication in cross-cultural settings.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:15
Introduction
 

Definitions and a basic understanding of the cross-culture communication, Differences between cross culture and intercultural communication. Dimensions & Models for Cultural Analysis- Popular models of cross cultural communication.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:15
Context, Culture and Identity
 

Context, Situation & Action Chains- Culture, Technology, workforce and environment, Countering oppression through inclusion. Culture & Identity - Educational attainment, Geographical locations, ethnicity.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:15
Global Identity
 

Intercultural Relations & Globalization (Case Study Work).Global Identity: Communicating with a Cross-Cultural Audience.Reading: Cross-cultural conflict by Kevin Avruch (UNESCO EOLSS (Encyclopedia of life support systems) - Sample Chapter

Text Books And Reference Books:

William B. Gudykunst and Carmen M. Lee. 2003,  “Introduction to Cross-Cultural Communication”- Sage Pubications.

Patel, F  et all. (2011). Intercultural Communication: Building a global community. Sage, India

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Cross-Cultural Communication Theories-Gerry Philipsen

Adorno, Theodor W. and Horkheimer, Max. 1972. “The Culture Industry: Enlightenment as Mass Deception”. Dialectic of Enlightenment (trans. John Cumming). New York: Herder and Herder, 120-167

Evaluation Pattern

Testing Pattern:

CIA 1: Submission 20 marks

Mid Semester exam:  Submission 25 marks

CIA 3: Submission 20 marks

 

 

BMED291B - AUDIO CONSUMPTION IN EVERYDAY LIFE (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:03

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Acoustic Phonetics is a study of understanding sound and its importance in mass media. This course is audio‐visual friendly, and requires an active engagement with listening and viewing materials. Each session will feature analyzing and listening and understating sounds and its importance.

 

 

Course Objectives:

  • How sound & listening can serve as foundational elements for studying society

  • How sound & listening habits are present in our daily (urban) lives, and what are the implications of this fact

  • How we can use everyday sounds to reflect on the present and conceive alternative futures

Course Outcome

  • To understand the importance of sound

  • To examine different aspects of sounds and emotions.

  • To analyze the importance of sounds in mass media.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:15
Introduction to Sound
 
  • Importance of sound, introduction to studying sound

  • Understand the concept of sound

  • Importance of using sound as an effective medium

  • Sound and its impact.  

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:15
Importance of Sound in Mass Media
 
  • Usage of sounds in mass media

  • Radio (music, silence, BGM, signature tunes etc)

  • Television, Films (BGM/BGS, Soundtracks, music etc.)

  • How to use sounds to aid visuals

  • Techniques of using sound to get the audience’s attention .

  • Folk Media and Theater (Puppetry, Street plays, Dance, Mime etc.)

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:15
Understanding Sound (Practical Component)
 
  • Recording Sounds, analyzing sounds, creating visuals with usage of sounds (Silent Films)

  • Podcasts

  • Radio Jingles

  • Promos

Text Books And Reference Books:
  • Adorno, Theodor W. and Horkheimer, Max. 1972. “The Culture Industry: Enlightenment as Mass Deception”. Dialectic of Enlightenment (trans. John Cumming). New York: Herder and Herder, 120-167

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading
  • Theodor W. Adorno.2002. “On Popular Music”. Essays on Music (transl. Susan H. Gillespie) Berkeley, Los Angeles, London: California University Press, 437-468

  • The Auditory Culture Reader (eds. Michael Bull and Les Back). 2006. Oxford and New York: Berg. Sterne, Jonathan. 2003. The Audible Past: Cultural Origins of Sound Reproduction. Durham and London: Duke University Press.

Evaluation Pattern

Testing Pattern:

CIA 1: Submissions for 20 marks

Mid Semester Submission: 25 marks

CIA 3: Submissions 20 marks

End Semester Submission: Submission for 30 marks

BPOL291A - POLITICS IN INDIA (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

India is the largest democracy of the world and its diverse society, vast geographical expanse and different cultural-social values make it an extremely complex political system. How does politics in a country like this operate? What are the historical influences and their impact on the modern democratic institutions of India? How has modern India managed to accommodate or shed off its centuries old traditional values in the clash between tradition and modernity? How have modern democratic institutions in India evolved, what are the pressures working upon them and how have these institutions performed till now? How does developmental state in India device and run welfare policies, maintain legitimacy and respond to crisis? The present course will give the students a basic understanding of all these aspects so that they can make sense of the ways in which democracy and political system operates in the country.

Course Objectives

The objectives of offering this course are:

 To introduce students to the political processes, fault lines and institutions in India

 To make them understand the relationships between these processes and institutions

 To acquaint them with the dominant debates and pressing issues lying before Indian political system

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes

At the end of the course, a student should be able to:

 Understand the fundamental aspects of Indian Political System

 Enrich the understanding of politics in India through study of its strengths and fault lines

 Understand how democracy and democratic institutions function and are challenged in India

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:6
Introduction and Background
 

Colonial State and Economy

Development of India’s Constitution

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:15
Institutions and Structures
 

The Indian Parliament

The Judicial System of India

Union and State Executive, Office of the Governor and Bureaucracy

Federalism

Party System in India

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:15
The Processes and Fault lines
 

Elections in India

Movements in India

Communalism and Secularism

Caste and Reservations

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:9
Policies and Problems
 

Public Policy

Foreign Policy

Regionalism and Terrorism

Text Books And Reference Books:

Chatterjee, Partha (ed.), 1997. State and Politics in India, New Delhi: Oxford University Press.

Jayal, Niraja Gopal and Mehta, Pratap Bhanu (eds.), 2019. Politics in India, New Delhi: OUP.

Roy, Himanshu and Singh, Mahendra Prasad (eds.), 2018. Indian Political System, New Delhi: Pearson.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Bhargava, Ashutosh and Acharya, Ashok (eds.), 2017. Poltical Theory: An Introduction, New Delhi: Pearson

Austin, Granville, 2014. The Indian Constitution: Cornerstone of a Nation, New Delhi: Oxford University Press.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1 - 20 marks

Mid sem - 25 marks

CIA 2 - 20 marks

End sem - 30 marks

Attendance - 5 marks

BPOL291B - STATE AND TERRORISM (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This course covers conceptual understanding of evolution, kinds, roots and causes of terrorism.  The course will also acquaint the student about the human rights related issues on counter terrorism activities carried out by the state. The students will be asked prepare and debate on pertinent issues regarding the role of state in terrorism. In addition to that the course will also acquaint the student about the issues in modern terrorism. Upon completion, the student will have a basic understanding of terrorism.

 

Course Objectives

To introduce students to

a)      Define the term of terrorism.

b)      Understand the causes of terrorism.

c)      Define the term counterterrorism and its various strategies.

d)     Acquaint with the debates on terrorism.

e)      Explain the issues in Modern Terrorism

Course Outcome

At the completion of this course, the student will be able to know the

a)      the different perspective of terrorism
b)      roots and kinds of terrorism
c)      role of the state in countering terrorism
d)     current debates and trends in terrorism

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
Introduction
 

What Is Terrorism—Debates on Definition

Evolution of Terrorism

Kinds of terrorism

Root causes of terrorism

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
State and Terrorism
 

Counter Terrorism

Various strategies to counter terrorism,

Human Rights and Counter-Terrorism

Role of state in creating and countering terrorism

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:12
Debates on Terrorism
 

Is one person's terrorist another person's freedom fighter?

What causes terrorism and terrorists?

Prevention and preparedness

The legal framework governing counter-terrorism efforts

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:13
Issues in Modern Terrorism
 

(1)               Terrorism and the Media

(2)                Responding to the Tragedy of  13 Dec 2001- the attack on Indian Parliament

Text Books And Reference Books:

·         Wilkinson, P. (1977). Terrorism and the liberal state. Halsted.

·         Wilkinson, P. (2006). Terrorism versus democracy: The liberal state response. Routledge.

·         Griset, P. L., Mahan, S., & Griset, P. L. (2003). Terrorism in perspective. Thousand Oaks: Sage Publications.

·         Crenshaw, M. (1981). The causes of terrorism. Comparative politics13(4), 379-399.

·         Primoratz, I. (2004). State terrorism and counter-terrorism. In Terrorism (pp. 113-127). Palgrave Macmillan, London.

·         Bjørgo, T. (Ed.). (2004). Root Causes of Terrorism: Myths, reality and ways forward. Routledge.

·        

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

 Laqueur, W. (1986). Reflections on terrorism. Foreign Aff.65, 86.

·         Miller, A. H. (Ed.). (1982). Terrorism, the Media and the Law(p. 58). Dobbs Ferry, NY: Transnational Publishers.

Evaluation Pattern

 

CIA - Evaluation Pattern

Assignment

Presentation

Test

Mid Semester

20

10

10

25

 

Mid SemesterExamination

Section A

Section B

Total

2X15=30

2X10=20

50

 

End Semester Examination

Section A

Section B

Total

2X10=20

2X15=30

50

BPSY291A - APPRECIATING AESTHETICS (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course aims at exploring the phenomenon of aesthetics from a multidisciplinary perspective. Further, it helps the students to get exposed to the multidisciplinary approach of understanding realities. At the end of the course, students will be able to:

1.      Understand the philosophy behind aesthetics

2.      Understand the human perception of aesthetics

3.      Appreciate morality and aesthetic judgements

4.      Take cognizance of the influence of technology on aesthetics

 

Course Outcome

At the end of the course, students will display:

1.      Knowledge about the philosophy behind human aesthetics

2.      Appreciation for aesthetics from multiple perspectives

3.      Ability to create aesthetically appealing products

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:15
Aesthetica
 

Origin of modern aesthetics; philosophy behind Aesthetics

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:20
Aesthetic Mind
 

Psychology of Aesthetics; morality; aesthetic judgements; appreciation of environment

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
Functional Aesthetics
 

Globalization and Technological influence on Aesthetics; digital interface; military; fashion; culture; art and architecture

Text Books And Reference Books:

Carlson, A. (2002). Aesthetics and the environment: The appreciation of nature, art and architecture. Psychology Press.

Schellekens, E., & Goldie, P. (Eds.). (2011). The aesthetic mind: Philosophy and psychology.

           Oxford University Press.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Kivy, P. (Ed.). (2009). The Blackwell guide to aesthetics. John Wiley & Sons.        

Hughes, F. (2009). Kant's' Critique of Aesthetic Judgement': A Reader's Guide. Bloomsbury Publishing.

Evaluation Pattern

Reflective Assignment

Creative Design

Mid semester

25

25

50

 

Mid Semester Test (Written)

Section A

(Short Note)

Section B

(Essay)

Total

4 x 5 = 20

2 x 15 = 30

50

BPSY291B - HUMAN ENGINEERING AND ERGONOMICS (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This course will cover topics related to human engineering and ergonomics more from a psychological perspective. Students will get to learn cognitive, social, organizational and safety aspects of the result of man-machine interaction. This course provides an overview of the systems design and strategies for effective understanding of man-machine interface.

 

Course Objectives 

 

  1. To understand resultant factors of man-machine interaction
  2. Cognize with pertinent factors related to increasing the efficiency of people in their working environment 
  3. Develop the competency of theoretical understanding for human engineering and ergonomics

Course Outcome

After the completion of the course, students will be able to:

 

  1. Have an understanding of how man-machine interaction is an important aspect to work upon for increasing the efficiency of the people
  2. Develop the understanding of the factors which are important for making an optimum working space and conditions
  3. Have a proper theoretical knowledge of human engineering and ergonomics as a field

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:15
Introduction to Human Engineering and Ergonomics
 

Introduction to human engineering and ergonomics; Human factors engineering and systems design; Sensation and perception;

Cross-cultural design; Mental workload and situation awareness.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:15
Job, Equipment, Workplace and Environmental Design
 

Task design and motivation; Job and team design; Workplace design;

Sound and noise; Illumination.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:15
Design for Health, Safety and Comfort
 

Health and safety management: Organization and public spaces; Warnings and hazard communications;

Design for people with functional limitations; Design for aging.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Salvendy, G. (Ed.). (2012). Handbook of Human Factors and Ergonomics(4th ed.). New Jersey, USA: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

 

Helander, M. (2006). A Guide to Human Factors and Ergonomics. USA: Taylor & Francis.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Hancock, Peter. A. (Ed.). (1999). Human Performance and Ergonomics (2nded.). San Diego, California: Academic Press.

 

Lee, J. D., Wickens, C. D., Liu, Y. & Boyle, L. N. (2017).Designing for People:An Introduction to Human Factors Engineering.Charleston, South California: CreateSpace.

 

Guastello, S. J. (2014). Human Factors Engineering and Ergonomics. Boca Raton, Florida: CRC Press.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Pattern

CIA (Weight)

100 %

 

CIA Evaluation pattern

Theory Based Assignment

Mid Semester Test

Case Study/Exhibition/ Activity/Field work

Total

30

40

30

100

 

Mid Semester Test (Written)

Section A

(Definition)

Section B

(Short note)

Section C

(Essay)

Total

5×2=10

4×5=20

1×10=10

40

EVS221 - ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:0
No of Lecture Hours/Week:0
Max Marks:100
Credits:2

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

To sensitize students on environmental issues

Course Outcome

To sensitize students on environmental issues

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:0
TO SENSITIVE STUDENTS ON ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUE
 

TO SENSITIVE STUDENTS ON ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUE

Text Books And Reference Books:

na

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

na

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1

CIA 2

CIA3

LAN221 - THOUGHT WRITING AND VISUALITY (2020 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description: As a continuation of the course on writing, this course will specifically aim towards developing a nuanced sense of the visuality we have come to inhabit today. The course is specifically designed to help students read, interpret and deploy visuals effectively for their business requirements.

Course Outcome

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will  be able to:

1.     Analyse and Interpret visual data

2.     Create meaningful and relevant visual data for business contexts

3.     Develop an awareness about the social, cultural, and political contexts of the creation and reception of visuals.

 

Skill Focus

1.     Critical and evaluative skills

2.     Writing skills

3.     Creative skills

4.     Analytical skills

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:15
Reading Images (Level of Knowledge: Basic)
 

This unit will introduce the visual field as an important field of inquiry in business contexts. The unit will provide a detailed understanding of the elements of visuality.

Skill Focus

·      Understanding how ideas in a visual text are linked

·      Locating and positioning speaker emphasis

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:15
Interpreting and Analysing Visual Content (Level of Knowledge: Conceptual)
 

This unit will facilitate students to be able to read, analyse and interpret visual fields. A wide range of data from the visual context including infographics, advertisements, films, documentaries, social media, fashion, among others will be used to train students to develop modes of critical, analytical and written skills to analyse and interpret the data. Social, political and cultural factors that determine the creation, dissemination and interpretation of visuals in our contemporary context.

 

Skill Focus:

·      Recognising the writer’s stance

·      Inferring implicit ideas

·      Analysing and critiquing images

·      Evaluation of visuality in images

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:15
Creating effective visual content (Level of Knowledge: Creative)
 

This unit will facilitate students to create meaningful, critically informed and culturally sensitive visual content that will aid in their business contexts. Mind mapping techniques, Advertisements, photo essays, documentaries, and other forms of visual infographics and vlogs will be facilitated as newer modes of engaging with business today.

Skill Focus

·      Creating effective visual content

·      Familiarity with a wide range of visual genres for content creation

·      Recognising the purpose of visual content creation

·      Determining the right visuality to represent given data

·      Use visuals to effectively interpret, analyse and generate data

Text Books And Reference Books:

Compilation given by instructor

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Compilation by instructor

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Pattern

CIA 2: Mid-semester submission for 50 marks

CIAs: Continuous assessment through the ideation and creation of visual content. MSE must be a continuation of CIA 1 and must lead to CIA 3

ESE: 50 Marks

 

 

BBBH311 - RESEARCH METHODOLOGY (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course deepens the understanding of different research approaches and methodologies in order to prepare students for their own research projects in their business discipline. This course will assist students in identifying, discussing and formulating a research problem, in selecting and applying appropriate research approaches and methods of inquiry (both quantitative or qualitative), and in presenting their results. Successful completion of this course should be sufficient for students to undertake a research project.

Course Objectives:

  • To develop a research orientation among the learners
  • To acquaint the learners with fundamentals of research methods
  • To aim at introducing the learners to the basic concepts used in research and to scientific social research methods and their approach
  • To discuss on sampling techniques, research designs and techniques of analysis
  • To understand the basic framework of research process, various research designs and techniques
  • To identify various sources of information for literature review and data collection
  • To understand the ethical dimensions of conducting applied research

Course Outcome

On having completed this course student should be able to:

CLO1 - Demonstrate the ability to understand different research terminologies and concepts.

CLO2 - Identify research problems and questions

CLO3 - Develop methodology for research problems  

CLO4 - Analyze data and interpret results required for business decision-making in proper format 

CLO5 - Propose ethical suggestions based on the findings of the research

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
Unit 1
 

Definition, Objectives of research, Characteristics of research - Scientific Method, Types of research, Criteria for Good research, Business research in organizations - Decision Support, Ethics in research.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
Unit 2
 

Research Process - Steps in research, Research designs for Experimental, Explorative and Explanatory. Concepts - Methodology and Methods, Theory, concepts, constructs variables, Deductive and inductive logic

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
Unit 3
 

Identifying and formulating research problem, Diagnosis of symptoms and problem, Setting research objectives, Doing review of literature, purpose methods, Hypothesis - Meaning, Purpose, Sources, characteristics of hypotheses, types of hypothesis, testing of hypothesis.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
Unit 4
 

Measurement Types of Scales, Scaling techniques, characteristics of good instrument, and errors in measurement, Reliability and validity of research instruments, Sampling - Significance of sampling, Concepts, Steps in sampling, Criteria for good sample

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:8
Unit 5
 

Data sources - primary and secondary data, Data Collection methods- Survey, observation, Interview, focus group technique, Data collection instruments, Questionnaire, schedule

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:8
Unit 6
 

Data processing Editing, coding, tabulation, pictorial and graphical presentation of Data, problems in processing, transcribing, Selection of statistical methods based on objectives, type of scale. Overview of types of statistical analysis descriptive, validation and inferential   tools. Overview of Non-parametric and Qualitative data analysis tools.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:8
Unit 7
 

Statistical Testing: Parametric vs. Non parametric, Logic, Confidence, Intervals, Power of the test, Normal            Curve, Normality Test, Homogeneity of variance, Bootstrapping, T-Test:    One Sample, Independent Sample,           Paired Sample. Analysis of variance: General

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:4
Unit 8
 

Classification and tabulation, Graphical representation, Research presentation, Types of report - Research proposal, research report. Format of a report- Layout, Standards (Introduction to APA formatting), Precautions.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Kothari, C. R. (2013). Research methodology: Methods and techniques. New Age International.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1. Cooper, D. R., & Schindler, P. S. (2013). Business Research Methods (11th editio). New Delhi: TATA McGraw- Hill.

2. Nargundkar, Rajendra. (2011). Marketing Research (3rd edition). New Delhi: TATA McGraw- Hill.

3. Field, A. (2013). Discovering statistics using SPSS(4th edition). Sage publication

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1A - 10 Marks

CIA 1B - 10 Marks

CIA 2 - 25 Marks

CIA 3 - 20 Marks

End sem - 30 Marks

Attendance - 5 Marks

BBBH312 - ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Entrepreneurship plays a significant role in stimulating economic growth and employment opportunities. In the developing world, entrepreneurial energy and effort are the primary engines of job creation, and income growth. This course intends to introduce the students to the challenges and opportunities before aspiring entrepreneurs in the emerging domestic and international arenas of possibilities. This course attempts to present various aspects of entrepreneurship in its theoretical and practical dimensions to enable a prospective entrepreneurial to move forward with visionary confidence.

·      To gain an introduction to the concepts and theories related to entrepreneurship practice

·      To give exposure to creativity tools and techniques in the context of entrepreneurial practice

·      To get familiarized with the family business ecosystem and its contribution to economic development to provide knowledge and information about the source of help, incentives and subsidies available from government to set up the project and other sources of funding

  • To gain insights on developing a business Plan

Course Outcome

  • To gain an introduction to the concepts and theories related to entrepreneurship practice
  • To give exposure to creativity tools and techniques in the context of entrepreneurial practice
  • To get familiarized with the family business ecosystem and its contribution to economic development to provide knowledge and information about the source of help, incentives and subsidies available from government to set up the project and other sources of funding
  • To gain insights on developing a business Plan

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
INTRODUCTION TO ENTREPRENEURSHIP
 

                               

The concept of Entrepreneurship, Entrepreneurship-theories, Differences between Entrepreneurship, Entrepreneur & Enterprise Entrepreneurial competencies, functions of an Entrepreneur, types of Entrepreneurs. Differences between Manager and Entrepreneur, The role of Entrepreneurship in economic development, Intrapreneurship

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
CREATIVITY AND INNOVATION
 

Creativity, The creative process, Ideation, sources for Business ideas, Creative Problem Solving:, Brainstorming, Heuristics ,Synectics, , Creative exercises, Innovation - Need identification, Selection of Product/Service, New Product Development, Services Industries-Human side of an enterprise

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
ESTABLISHING AN ENTERPRISE
 

The start-up process, Project identification, Selection of the product, Project formulation, Project Appraisal - Market Feasibility, Technical Feasibility, Financial feasibility and Economic feasibility, Assessment of project feasibility, Market survey, Risk Analysis, Break-Even Analysis

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
INTRODUCTION TO FAMILY BUSINESS
 

History of family business in India, Types, Importance, Structure/ownership patterns, Succession planning, Pitfalls and strategies to improve family business in an era of globalization.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:10
INSTITUTIONAL SUPPORT TO ENTREPRENEURS
 

Entrepreneurship development in India, Need for institutional support – National Small Industries Corporation (NSIC), Small Industries Development Organization (SIDO), Small Scale Industries Board (SSIB), Small Industries Service  Institutes (SISI), and District Industries Centers (DIC).Venture capital, Industrial Estates and IIE.

 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:14
PROJECT REPORT
 

Project Report – Meaning and importance. Contents of a Project Report, Format of a Report (As per requirements of financial institutions) Preparation of project report. Technical Consultancy Organization (TCO). Basic start up problems. Preparing a project report on commercialization of an idea.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Desai, V. (2014).The Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development and Management (6ed.)   Himalaya Publishing House.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.     David, H. (2013). Entrepreneurial Development (5ed.), Prentice Hall
2.     Gupta, C.B., & Srinivasan, N.D. (2012) Entrepreneurship Development, New Delhi:Sultan Chand & Sons.
3.     Khanka, S.S. (2006). Entrepreneurship Development,        Sultan Chand & Sons.
4.     Kurakto, D.F. (2007). Entrepreneurship-Principles and practices (7ed).Thomson publication.
5.     Lall, M., &Sahai, S. (2006). Entrepreneurship (4ed), Excel Books
6.     Manimala, M.J. (2007).  Entrepreneurship Theory at Crossroads, Biztantra
7.     Hisrich,R.D., Manimala,M.J., Peter M., ShepherdD.A. (2013). Entrepreneurship (8ed). Tata McGraw Hill

Evaluation Pattern
 

Assessment Component

Description

Weightage

CIA I

Part A Moodle-based quiz. (MCQs)

Part B Identify travel components based on travel motivations

05%

15%

CIA II

Mid Semester written examination conducted for 2 hours duration. Unit 1,2,3 (Topic covered up to car rental companies)

25%

CIA III

Poster submission and Presentation

20%

End Semester Examination

Written examination conducted for 2 hours duration. 

30%

Attendance

 

5%

Total

 

100%

BBBH331 - COST ACCOUNTING (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

As a basic course on Cost Accounting, the course discusses the fundamental concepts and various aspects in and of cost accounting. This course also covers different methods and techniques used in the ascertainment of cost including preparation of cost sheet, material coast, labour coast, overhead cost, process costing, contract costing and cost audit. And thus this course as a part of business administration programme (Honours) provides cutting edge on the fundamental knowledge and basic understanding methods and techniques of ascertainment of cost required for a budding professional in the domain of accounting and finance.

Course Objectives:

•           To familiarize the learners with the basic concepts and elements of costs

•           To provide the concepts of cost accounting to the students for preparing cost sheets.

•           To enrich the knowledge of the learners in ascertaining material and labour cost along with allocation and apportionment of overheads

•           To enable the learners to prepare contract account independently

•           To augment the knowledge of the students in preparing the process account

•           To enhance knowledge of the learners with the concept of cost audit

Course Outcome

On having completed this course student should be able to:

CLO1   Demonstrate the basic cost concepts and the elements of cost

CLO2   Apply the concepts of cost accounting to prepare cost sheet

CLO3   Analyse the methods of ascertaining cost in terms of Material, Labour and Overheads

CLO4   Evaluate the specific cost accounting methods to prepare the process accounts.

CLO5   Elaborate the concepts of cost accounting to apply it to cost audit

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:4
Introduction to Cost Accounting
 

Cost accounting- meaning and scope- objective- advantage of cost accounting- cost concept- cost centre- cost unit- classification and element of cost- costing method and technique- activity based costing- target costing 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
Preparation of cost sheet
 

Preparation of cost sheet, Tender and Quotations

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
Material Control
 

Materials- meaning of material control- steps in material control-need-objective of material control- issue of material- methods of pricing material issues[FIFO- LIFO- Simple and weighted average methods only]. Minimum level- maximum level- re-order level-EOQ-,ABCanalysis,VEDanalysis

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
Labour
 

Labour-Meaning of labour cost- methods of remunerating labour- Time rate and Piece rate systems- Halsey & Rowan premium systems             

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:10
Overheads
 

Overheads- Meaning and classification of overhead costs- allocation of overhead expenses- appointment of overhead expenses- basis of appointment- primary and secondary distributions [Repeated & simultaneous equation method only] Absorption of Overheads – Machine Hour rate only                                                                       

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:8
Contract Costing
 

Contract Costing- types of contracts- recording of cost of contract- recording of value and profit on contact- cost plus contract- target costing- escalation clause and practical problems on contact account with balance sheet.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:8
Process Costing
 

Process Costing- Features of process costing- application of process costing- comparison between Job costing and  Process Costing- advantages of process costing- disadvantages of process costing- fundamental principles of process costing- element of process cost- process losses- normal process loss- abnormal process loss

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:2
Cost Audit
 

Cost Audit- meaning of Audit, definition of Cost Audit, type of cost audit. Objective of cost audit, advantage of cost audit Auditing techniques, cost audit programme; functions of cost auditors: difference between cost audit and financial audit.                     

Text Books And Reference Books:

Jain, S.P., & Narang, K.L. (2015). Cost Accounting. New Delhi: Kalyani Publishers.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1)   Kishor, R.M. (2014). Cost Accounting. New Delhi: Taxman Allied Services.

Pillai, R.N.S. (2014). Cost Accounting. New Delhi: Sultan Chand.

Arora, M.N. (2014). Cost Accounting. New Delhi: Himalaya Publishers.

Lal, J. (2013). Cost Accounting. New Delhi: Tata Mcgraw Hill Education.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I - 20 Marks

CIA II - 25 Marks

CIA III - 20 Marks

Attendance - 5 Marks

End sem - 30 Marks

BBBH332 - MARKETING MANAGEMENT (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

Marketing a particularly stimulating subject for learners, since its practical application is visible every day. Old rules of marketing are no longer useful to those who want to influence these new consumer’s choices. This course will lead the exploration of the leading edge of this paradigm shift that is now underway. This course introduces students to the concepts and processes of marketing and takes them deeper into the world of marketing.

Course Objectives:

1. To understand the application of Marketing concepts and techniques 

 

·     2. To investigate marketing from a managerial perspective, including the       critical analysis of functions of marketing opportunity assessment

 

·         3. To enhance team decision making skills and communication skills from a Marketing perspective

4. To examine the environmental factors that shape an organisation’s activities

Course Outcome

Demonstrate an ability to understand the situation facing a company and perform tasks in segmentation, targeting, and positioning, and developing a marketing mix.

Construct a detailed marketing plan and implementation schedule for a company, or critically evaluate existing marketing strategies and tactics.

Take part in effective communication among team members to build marketing projects

Determine methods to make persuasive, effective presentation of their projects

Discuss secondary company/product data in elaborating the current market position of a product and new opportunities

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
DEFINING MARKETING AND THE MARKETING PROCESS
 

Meaning Definition marketing, scope of marketing, core marketing concepts, Company Orientation toward the Marketplace; Developing Marketing Strategies and Plans, Marketing and Customer Value, Corporate and Division Strategic Planning, Business Unit Strategic Planning, Ansoff’s Matrix, BCG Matrix, Marketing Plan Criteria; Capturing market insight.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
CONNECTING WITH CUSTOMERS
 

Model Consumer Behavior, characteristics Affecting consumer Behavior, Types of Buying Decision Behavior, The Buyer Decision Process, The Buyer Decision Process for New Products; Business Buyer Behavior, The Business Buyer Decision Process, Institutional and Government Market segmentation, targeting and positioning for competitive advantage and Band Equity.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
SETTING PRODUCT & DESIGNING AND MANAGING SERVICES
 

Product Levels, Product Characteristics and Classifications, New product development stages, categories of new product, reasons for launching new products and its failure. Product life cycle strategies and its extension, meaning of services, unique characteristics of services, 7Ps of service marketing, Service delivery process, service encounters and Moments of Truth

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
PRICING
 

 

Types of pricing, consideration and approaches, competitive strategies - attracting, attacking, retailing and growing customer

 

 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:8
DISTRIBUTION CHANNELS
 

Marketing channels, structure, types and criteria of selecting a channel, wholesaling, retailing, and physical distribution.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:10
PROMOTION
 

An overview. Advertising, sales promotion, personal selling and sales management.  Public and customer relations, direct and online marketing, multilevel marketing-the new marketing model

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:8
SUSTAINABLE MARKETING: SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY
 

Sustainable Marketing, Social Criticisms of Marketing Marketing’s Impact on Individual Consumers Marketing’s Impact on Society as a Whole Marketing’s Impact on Other Businesses, Consumer Actions to Promote Sustainable Marketing Business Actions Toward Sustainable Marketing Principles and Marketing Ethics

Text Books And Reference Books:

Kotler.P, & Keller.K.L. (2016) Marketing Management, 17th edition, Pearson.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading
  1. 1.   Marshall & Johnston, Marketing Management, McGraw Hill
  2. 2. Kotler &Armstrong, 15th ed., Principles of Marketing Management, Pearson publication
  3. 3.  Chernev& Kotler, 5th ed., Strategic Marketing Management, Brightstar Media
Evaluation Pattern

CIA1-20 MARKS

CIA2-25 MARKS

CIA3-20 MARKS

END SEM EXAM-30 MARKS

ATTENDANCE-05 MARKS

BBBH333 - INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This as a basic course on Indian Financial System discusses the fundamental concepts and various aspects in and about financial system in general and Indian financial system in particular. This course also covers various components or organization of Indian financial system namely financial markets, financial instruments, financial intermediaries/institutions, financial services and financial regulators and the linkages between them along with the recent development and changes in Indian Financial System. Thus this course as a part of Honors programme in business administration (BBAH) provides cutting edge fundamental knowledge in the frontiers of financial system required for a budding professional in the banking, financial services sector and financial institutions. 

Course Objectives:

To provide with the basic understanding on financial system and its various components

To develop the knowledge of the learners on how the financial system of India is organized

To enrich the understanding of the learners in money market and capital market instruments and their operations

To equip the students in understanding the  functions of various financial institutions

To develop the learners with overall understanding of basics of different financial services

To be aware of the various regulatory bodies in the Indian financial system.

To develop the base for research in the areas of financial system

Course Outcome

On having completed this course student should be able to:

CLO1 Understand the fundamentals of  financial system and its various components 

CLO2  Understand the operations of money market and capital market.

CLO3  Choose the appropriate financial service.

CLO4  Analyze the impact of changes in the Indian financial system

CLO5  Explain the structure of Indian financial system.

CLO6  Evaluate the functions of various financial institutions

CLO7  Discuss the role of regulatory bodies in the Indian financial system

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
Introduction to Financial systems
 

Meaning-Structure- Functions-Components of financial system-Financial system and economic development- Reforms in Financial Sector in India

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
Capital Markets - Primary
 

Capital Market: Meaning-Functions –Constituents –classification.

Primary Market: Meaning - Functions- Constituents- Issue of securities- IPO, Private Placement-Right Issue-Bonus Issue-Qualified Institutions Placement (QIP) –IPO process-Book Building- Merchant Bankers-Lead Managers-  Prospectus –Types –Red Hiring Prospectus- Price band- Determination of Price – Allotment of Shares- Application Supported Blocked Amount (ASBA)-Anchor Investor-Green Shoe Option - Listing of Shares-Capital Market Instruments.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
Capital Markets - Secondary
 

Functions of secondary market – Regulation of Stock exchange- Demutualization of stock exchange – Listing of securities – Risk management – Trading arrangements – Stock market index (Calculation of index, global indices) - Derivatives Market- Government Securities market- Capital market scams-SEBI-Reforms in capital markets.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:10
Money market
 

Meaning-Significance-Structure-Features of money market—Money market instruments-Reforms in money market-RBI-Functions-Monetary policy-Credit Policy

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:10
Financial Institutions
 

Meaning- Functions-Banking institutions-Scheduled commercial banks and scheduled cooperative banks-Non Banking Institutions-NBFCs

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:10
Financial services
 

Meaning-Types-Leasing- Hire purchase- Mutual funds( MF concepts- organization of MF – Equity funds – Debt funds- Other funds – Practical problems in NAV )- Factoring -Credit rating- Venture Capital-Recent developments in financial services industry.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Pathak, B. (2011 ). Indian Financial System . New Delhi: Pearson education.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Desai, V. (2010).Indian Financial System. Mumbai: Himalaya publishers.

Gordon, N. (2014). Indian Financial System. Mumbai: Himalaya publishers.

Khan, M.Y. (2009). Indian Financial System . New Delhi: McGraw-Hill.

Sharma, G. (2014). Indian Financial System. Ludhiana: Kalyani publishers.

Singh, P. (2010). Dynamics of Indian Financial System: Markets, Institutions and Services, ANE Books

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I - 20 marks

CIA II - 25 marks

CIA III - 20 marks

End semester - 30 marks

Attendance - 5 marks

BBBH334 - PRINCIPLES OF MACRO ECONOMICS (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

It aims at providing a systematic introduction to mainstream approaches to the study of macroeconomics in the current century. It has been designed in such a way that it stimulates awareness on macroeconomic challenges and policy management in progressive nations. It also aims at developing the ability for objective reasoning about macroeconomic issues.

Course Objectives

  • To enhance the understanding of closed and open macro-economy modeling.
  • To critically reflect on the dynamics of macroeconomic policies in the present economic conditions.

Course Outcome

  • It provides the student a strong foundation in macroeconomics and helps in understanding the policy implications in emerging economies.
  • It helps in understanding the contribution of various macroeconomic schools and in evaluating their policy prescriptions.
  • It enables the student to evaluate the pros and cons of different macroeconomic policies in real situations.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
Measuring a Nations Income and Cost of Living
 

Economy’s income and expenditure: measurement of GDP, components of GDP, real versus nominal GDP; Measurements of cost of living: the GDP deflator, the Consumer Price Index (CPI), calculation of CPI, GDP deflator versus the CPI, correcting economic variables for the effects of inflation, real and nominal interest rates.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:20
Goods and Money Market
 

Production and growth: saving and investment and the financial system, financial markets, savings and investment in the national income accounts; the market for loanable funds: policy changes and impact on the market for loanable funds, aggregate demand curve, aggregate supply curve, two causes of economic fluctuations, monetary policy influence on aggregate demand; the monetary system: meaning and functions of money, banks and money supply, money creation with 100 percent reserve banking and fractional reserve banking, central bank tools of monetary control, classical theory of inflation, classical dichotomy and monetary neutrality, velocity and quantity equation, Fisher effect, costs of inflation.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
The Macroeconomics of Open Economies
 

The international flows of goods and capital; the prices for international transactions: real and nominal exchange rates; theory of exchange rate determination: purchasing power parity; three key facts about economic fluctuations, short run economic fluctuations; the theory of liquidity preference: fiscal policy influence on aggregate demand, the multiplier effect, crowding-out effect; stabilisation policy: active versus automatic stabilizers.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:10
Short Run Trade ? off between Inflation and Unemployment
 

The Philips curve, shifts in Philips curve: the role of expectations, the role of supply shocks; the cost of reducing inflation: rational expectations and the possibility of costless disinflation.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:10
Six Debates over Macroeconomic Policy
 

Monetary and fiscal policy: pros and cons; handling recession: higher spending vs. tax cuts; monetary policy: rule vs. discretion; central bank: zero inflation, balanced budget debate; tax law reformation for savings: debate.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Dornbusch, R., Fischer, S., & Startz, R. (2015). Macroeconomics (11th ed.). McGraw Hill Education.

Froyen, R. (2014). Macroeconomics: Theories and Policies (10th ed.). Pearson Education.

Mankiw, G.N. (2015). Macroeconomics (9th ed.). Worth Publishers.

Mankiw, G. N. (2012). Principles of Macroeconomics, (6th ed.). Cengage Learning India.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Abel, A. B. & Bernanke, B. S. (2011). Macroeconomics (7th ed.). Pearson Education.

Blanchard, O. (2009). Macroeconomics (5th ed.). Pearson Education.

Mishkin, F. S. (2016). Macroeconomics: Policy & Practice (2nd ed.). Pearson Education.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1: 20 marks

MSE: 25 marks

CIA 3: 20 marks

Attendance: 05 marks

ESE: 30 marks

BBBH335 - FUNDAMENTALS OF BUSINESS ANALYTICS (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

Business Analytics is a crucial area of study for students looking to enhance their employment prospects. The tools of business analytics can aid decision making by creating insights from data, by improving our ability to more accurately forecast for planning. This course is a must for professionals looking to learn data analytics, as well as students who are looking to pursue data science as a career.

 

Learning Objectives

·       To give an insight into data and its characteristics.

·       To understand the descriptive and predictive models of data analytics.

·       To apply the analytical techniques and find solutions to realistic business problems.

Course Outcome

·       To be able to collect and analyse data to gain a better understanding of characteristics of data.

·       To be able to process the data and make viable business decisions.

·       To be able to apply knowledge and develop solutions across a range of functional areas like Marketing Finance, HR and Operations.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
Introduction to Analytics
 

 

Level of knowledge : Conceptual

Data – information – intelligence – knowledge approach, types of analytics, organization and source of data, importance of data quality, dealing with missing or incomplete data, popular tools used for analytics, Role of Data Scientist in Business & Society, Analytics Methodology

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
Overview of Using Data
 

 

Level of knowledge : Application

Data Selection, Data classification, Data Reduction, Data Exploration, Data Preparation, Data Partition, Types of data, 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
Data Visualisation
 

 

Level of knowledge : Application

Modifying data using Excel, creating distribution from data, measures of location, measures of variability, analysing distribution, measures of association

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
Business Analytics Process
 

 

Level of knowledge : Application

Data visualisation, Tables, Charts, Advanced data visualisation, data dashboards

 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:8
Predictive Modeling Techniques
 

 

Level of knowledge : Application

The simple linear regression model, least square method, assessing the fit of simple regression model, multiple regression model.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:10
Time Series Analytics and Forecasting
 

 

Level of knowledge : Application

Time Series Pattern, forecast, accuracy, moving averages, seasonality.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:8
Application Fields
 

 

Level of knowledge : Application

Marketing Analytics, Finance Analytics, HR Analytics, Operation Analytics

Text Books And Reference Books:

·       Camm, J., Cochran, J., Fry, M., Ohlmann, J., & Anderson, D. (2014). Essentials of Business Analytics (Book Only). Nelson Education.

 

 

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Text Books and Reference Books:

·       The Data Warehouse Toolkit: The Complete Guide to Dimensional Modeling   Kimball, R. and Ross, M. Second Edition.John Wiley & Sons, 2006.

·       The Data Warehouse ETL Toolkit: Practical Techniques for Extracting, Cleaning, Conforming, and Delivering Data. Kimball, R., and Caserta, J. John Wiley & Sons, 2004

·       Turban E, Armson, JE, Liang, TP & Sharda, Decision support and Business Intelligence Systems, 8th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2007

 

·       Michael J. A. Berry and Gordon S. Linoff, Data Mining Techniques for marketing, Sales and CRM, John Wiley & Sons, 2004

 

·       Kimball, R., Ross, M (2006). The Data Warehouse Toolkit: The Complete Guide to Dimensional Modeling  , Second Edition. John Wiley & Sons.

·       Kimball, R., and Caserta, J (2004). The Data Warehouse ETL Toolkit: Practical Techniques for Extracting, Cleaning, Conforming, and Delivering Data. John Wiley & Sons.

·       Turban E, Armson, JE, Liang, TP & Sharda (2007). Decision support and Business Intelligence Systems, 8th Edition, John Wiley & Sons.

·       Michael J. A. Berry and Gordon S. Linoff (2004). Data Mining Techniques for marketing, Sales and CRM, John Wiley & Sons.

Evaluation Pattern

Lab assignments

BSDBS312 - KNOWLEDGE ACQUISITION SKILLS (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:2
Max Marks:50
Credits:1

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Knowledge acquisition is the process used to define the rules and ontologies required for a knowledge-based system. Spreadsheet software is one of the most ubiquitous pieces of software used in workplaces across the world. Learning to confidently operate this software means adding a highly valuable asset to your employability portfolio. At a time when digital skills jobs are growing much faster than non-digital jobs, make sure to position yourself ahead of the rest by adding Excel skills to your employment portfolio.

Course Outcome

  • Students will learn basics of excel
  • Students will be able to will be able to expertly navigate the Excel user interface.
  • Students will be able to perform basic calculations with formulas and functions
  • Students will be able to  professionally format spreadsheets
  • Students will be able to  create visualizations of data through charts and graphs.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:15
Excel for Business: Essential
 

Key foundational features of Excel: The Excel user interface, basic Excel terminology, how to operate essential navigational controls in Excel and how to perform basic data entry with Excel spreadsheets. Introduced to formulas and functions - learn how to write them, use them to perform calculations and understand the different cell references. This module covers several formatting tools like font formatting, borders, alignment, number formatting, as well as the Excel styles and themes. Manage your spreadsheets – find data with Filter and Sort, retrieve and change data using Find and Replace, and use Conditional Formatting to highlight specific data. Learn how you can optimise your spreadsheet for printing by managing margins, orientation, headers & footers, and more. This module walks you through creating and modifying charts in Excel.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:15
Excel for Business: Intermediate
 

Combine data, manage datasets and perform calculations across multiple sources, Date and Text functions,  manage and apply Named Ranges to enhance your calculations, COUNTIFS to extract information from data, as well as generate graphical representations of it. Formatting and managing tables and then move on to sorting and filtering tables, create and modify them to solve a variety of business problems.  Create interactive dashboards with pivot charts and slicers.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Chapra, S. C. (2003). Power programming with VBA/excel. Prentice Hall.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

David, M. (2017). Statistics for managers, using Microsoft excel. Pearson Education India.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment after each module

BBBH411 - BUSINESS ETHICS AND SUSTAINABILITY (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Today’s corporations are under tremendous pressure to follow ethical practices, better governance and look at sustainability through a triple bottom line perspective. As management students, they will be expected to have formal education on the aforementioned areas. This paper aims to provide an overview on international development on ethics, governance and sustainability.

  • To explain the fundamentals of business ethics
  • To analyse the role of business ethics among various stakeholders 
  • To develop sustainability initiatives and good governance practices
  • To outline the role of international conventions and treaties on environmental and social aspects 

Course Outcome

  • Demonstrate an understanding on the fundamentals of business ethics 
  • Examine the role of business ethics among various stakeholders 
  • Apply sustainability initiatives and good governance practices
  • Explain the role of international conventions and treaties on environmental and social aspects 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:6
Introduction to Business Ethics
 

Level of Knowledge: Basic

Meaning of ethics, business ethics, relation between ethics and business ethics, evolution of business ethics, nature of business ethics, scope, need and purpose, importance, approaches to business ethics, ethical decision making, some unethical issues, benefits from managing ethics at workplace, ethical organizations.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
The Study of Business, Government and Society (BGS)
 

Level of Knowledge: Basic

Importance of BGS to Managers, Models of BGS relationships: Market Capitalism Model, Dominance Model Countervailing Forces Model, Stakeholder Model, Global perspective, Historic perspective.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:9
Making decisions in business ethics
 

Level of Knowledge: Basic

Models of ethical decision making, individual influences on ethical decision making, situational influences on ethical decision making                                                                                                     

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:5
Managing business ethics
 

Level of Knowledge: Conceptual

Business ethics management, setting standards of ethical behaviour, managing stakeholder relations, assessing ethical performance,organizing for business ethics management.       

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:5
Employees and business ethics
 

Level of Knowledge: Conceptual

Employees as stakeholders, ethical issues related to employee relation, employing people worldwide: The ethical challenges of globalization, the corporate citizen and employee relations, towards sustainable employment.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:5
Suppliers, competitors and business ethics
 

Level of Knowledge: Conceptual

Suppliers and competitors as stakeholders, ethical issues and suppliers, competitors, Conflict of interest, Ethical sourcing and fair trade.  

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:5
Consumers and business ethics
 

Level of Knowledge: Conceptual

Consumers as stakeholders, ethical issues-marketing and the consumer, globalization and consumers: the ethical challenge of the market place, consumers and corporate citizenship: consumer sovereignty and the politics of purchasing,  sustainable consumption.

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:9
Sustainability and Corporate Sustainability Reporting Framework
 

Level of Knowledge: Conceptual

Meaning and Scope, Corporate Social Responsibility, Sustainability, Sustainability Terminologies and Meanings,why is sustainability an imperative, Global Reporting Initiative Guidelines, National Voluntary Guidelines on Social,Environmental and Economic Responsibilities of Business, International Standards, Sustainability Indices, Principles of Responsible Investment, Challenges in Mainstreaming Sustainability Reporting, Sustainability Reporting Case Studies.    

Unit-9
Teaching Hours:4
Shareholders and Business Ethics
 

Level of Knowledge: Analytical

Corporate Governance: a principal agent relationship, different frameworks of corporate governance globally, The role of financial markets and insider trading, shareholders as citizens of the corporation.

Unit-10
Teaching Hours:6
Legal framework, conventions, treaties on environmental and social aspects
 

Level of Knowledge: Analytical

United Nations Conference on Human Environment, United Nations Environment Programme Brundtland Commission, United Nations Conference on Environment and Development Agenda 21,Rio Declaration on Environment and Development, Statement of Forest Principles United Nations Framework Convention on climate change, Convention on Biological Diversity, Kyoto Protocol, Bali Roadmap,United Nations Conference on Sustainable Development, Rio+20, Millennium Development Goals to Sustainable Development Goals.

Text Books And Reference Books:
  1. Andrew Crane & Dirk Matten (2010). Business ethics, Oxford.
Essential Reading / Recommended Reading
  1. Bajaj P. S & Raj Agarwal, (2012). Business Ethics, Biztantra.
  2. Balachandran V, & Chandrashekharan V, (2011). Corporate Governance, Ethics and social responsibility, PHI.

 

 

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1

20 Marks (10)

CIA 2

50 Marks (25)

CIA 3

20 Marks (10)

ESE

50 Marks

Attendance

  5 Marks

Total

100 Marks

BBBH431 - BUSINESS FINANCE (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description: This course of Business Finance is a sophisticated package including all aspects covered under the scope of finance functions in a business enterprise consisting of concepts related to sourcing of funds and optimum allocation of the funds.

Course Objectives:

To provide an in-depth knowledge of concepts covered under the finance related aspects of a business organization.

To equip the students with the skills required to make the optimum financial decision and select the best financial alternatives.

To impart the knowledge required to solve financial challenges and issues in a business enterprise.

1

Course Outcome

CLO1 :Students should be able to have conceptual knowledge on different aspects, processes and terms covered under the finance function in a business enterprise

CLO2: Students should be equipped with the knowledge skills required to take the optimum financial decisions  

CLO3: Students should be able to analyse and suggest ways to solve financial issues and challenges of a business enterprise. 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS FINANCE
 

Meaning of finance and financial management, Types of finance – public and private finance, classification of private finance – personal finance, business finance and finance of non-profit organization Importance and Scope of financial management, Approaches to finance function Relationship of finance with other business functions, Objectives of financial management – profit maximization and wealth maximization - merits and criticisms Financial decisions, Internal relation of financial decisions, Factors influencing financial decisions Functions areas of financial management, Functions of a finance manager

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
SOURCES OF FINANCE
 

Ownership securities – Equity shares , Preference shares, Deferred shares, No par stock/shares, Shares with differential rights, Sweat Equity Creditor ship securities – Debentures – Zero coupon bonds, Zero interest bonds, Callable bonds, Deep discount bonds Internal financing or ploughing back of profit – factors affecting ploughing back of profits – merits and demerits Loan financing – short term and long term sources.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:5
CAPITALIZATION
 

Meaning of capitalization – Theories of capitalization – cost theory and earnings theory. Over capitalization and under capitalization – causes – effects and remedies, Watered stock, Over trading and under trading.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
CAPITAL STRUCTURE
 

Meaning of capital structure and financial structure, principles of capital structure, optimum capital structure, determinants of capital structure, capital structure and EPS – practical problems. Point of indifference, Capital gearing, Theories of capital structure- concepts.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:6
COST OF CAPITAL
 

Meaning of cost of capital, significance of cost of capital, components of cost of capital – computation of cost of capital – practical problems.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:7
LEVERAGES
 

Meaning of leverage, types of leverages – operating, financial and combined leverage, risk and leverage – practical problems.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:6
CAPITAL BUDGETING
 

Meaning of capital budgeting, Importance , Need, Time value of money, capital budgeting process, project appraisal by using traditional methods and modern methods, Practical problems on payback period , rate of return , NPV method , Profitability index, IRR methods.

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:8
DIVIDEND POLICY DECISIONS
 

Dividend Policy and Decisions- Irrelevance concept – Residual Approach and Modigliani and Miller Approach. Relevant Concept- Walter’s Approach and Gordon’s Approach, Determinants of Dividend Policy, Types of Dividend Policy, Forms of Dividend, bonus issue, stock split.

Unit-9
Teaching Hours:8
MANAGEMENT OF WORKING CAPITAL
 

Meaning of working capital, types of working capital, working capital cycle, adequate working capital, determinants of working capital, estimation of working capital. Management of cash – cash budget – practical problems. Management of inventory and debtors – theory only.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Gupta,S,K.,Sharma,R.K.,& Gupta ,N(2010).Financial Management. Kalyani Publishers

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1. Khan, M.Y. & Jain, P.K.(2011). Financial Management. New Delhi, India. Tata McGraw Hill.

2.  Chandra, P.(2008).Financial Management. New Delhi, India. Tata McGraw Hill Book Co.

 

3. Pandey,I.M.(2009). Financial Management. New Delhi, India. Vikas Publishing House.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Component

Weightage in %

CIA I

20%

CIA II

25%

CIA III

20%

End Semester Examination

30%

Attendance

05%

 Total

100%

BBBH432 - SERVICES MARKETING (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:50
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description:The curriculum is designed for students with careers in services and goods industries with high service components. The course improves students’ understanding of distinctive aspects of services marketing and enhances their ability to apply marketing strategies to create, communicate, and deliver customer value in the service economy.

Course Objectives:The objective of this course is to supplement basic marketing and marketing strategy courses by focusing on problems and strategies specific to marketing of services.

Course Outcome

Course Learning Outcomes: On having completed this course student should be able to:

CLO1 Demonstrate an extended understanding of the similarities and differences in service-based and physical product based marketing activities.

CLO2 Develop and justify marketing planning and control systems appropriate to service-based activities.

CLO3 Demonstrate integrative knowledge of marketing issues associated with service productivity, perceived quality, customer satisfaction and loyalty.

CLO4   Prepare, communicate and justify marketing mixes and information systems for service-based organizations.  

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:7
Introduction to services
 

Level of Knowledge: Basic 

Concepts, contribution and reasons for the growth of services sector, difference in goods and service in marketing, characteristics of services, concept of service marketing triangle, service marketing mix, GAP models of service quality.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
Consumer behaviour in services
 

 Level of Knowledge: Basic

Search, Experience and Credence property, consumer expectation of services, two levels of expectation, Zone of tolerance, Factors influencing customer expectation of services.Customer perception of services, Factors that influence customer perception of service, Service encounters, Customer satisfaction, Strategies for influencing customer perception.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
Service Development and Quality Improvement
 

Level of Knowledge: Conceptual

Introduction, Types of New Service Development and its Stages, Types of new services, Stages in new service development, Service Costs Incurred by the Service Provider, service Blue Printing, service Development – Need, Importance and as a Measure of Competitive Advantage, service Quality Dimensions, Service Quality Measurement and Service Mapping, Improving Service Quality and Service Delivery, Service Failure and Recovery.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
Marketing of Services
 

 Level of Knowledge: Conceptual

Introduction, Overview of Different Service Sectors, Marketing of Banking Services, Marketing in Insurance Sector, Marketing of Education Services, Marketing of Tourism and Airlines, Tourism marketing, Airlines marketing, marketing of Hospitality Services, Healthcare Marketing, Social Service by NGOs, Marketing of Online Services, Marketing of Professional Services.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:9
Emerging Issues in Service Marketing
 

Level of Knowledge: Conceptual

 Introduction, Strategic approach in Services Marketing, Service Marketing in e-Commerce and e-Marketing, and Telemarketing Services, Service Marketing Research for Global Markets and Rural Markets, Innovations in Services Marketing, Ethical Aspects in Service Marketing.

 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:10
Customer Relationship Management
 

Level of Knowledge: Conceptual

Introduction, Importance of CRM, Concept and Growth of Relationship Marketing, Scope of Relationship Marketing, Customer Life Time Value, types of Relationship Management,technological Applications in CRM, types of Technological Applications in CRM, Customer Databases and Information Systems, Database Marketing Strategies, Customer Loyalty and Profitability through Technology.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:10
e-CRM - Emerging Trends in CRM
 

Level of Knowledge: Conceptual

Introduction,  Importance of e-CRM in Service Marketing, Challenges involved in formulating and implementing e-CRM strategies, e-CRM architecture and its components, Five engines of e-CRM, Evolution of e-customer and e-marketing, e-CRM for personalized services.

Text Books And Reference Books:

 1.  Valarie A Zeithaml(2017), 6th Edition,  Services Marketing: Integrating Customer Focus Across the Firm, McGraw Hill Education

2.    Wirtz Jochen, Lovelock Christopher (2017). 8th Edition, Services Marketing : People Technology Strategy, Pearson Education.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading
  1. Thomas J.Delong & Asish Nanda: Managing Professional Servies-Text and Cases, McGraw-Hil International, 2002.
  2. Mark Davis, Managing Services People and Technology, McGraw-Hill International, 2002
  3. Adrian Payne, The Essence of Services Marketing, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2002.
Evaluation Pattern

CIA – 1

CIA – 2

CIA – 3

Attendance

MSE

1

2

3

1

2

3

Marks – 50 (25)*

Marks – 10 (5)*

Marks – 10 (5)*

Marks – 10 (5)*

Marks – 10 (5)*

Marks – 10 (5)*

Marks – 10 (5)*

Marks – (5)*

 

Written Assignment

Quiz / Test

Case Analysis/Case Simulation

Presentation / Role Play / Case presentation / Mini Project / Discussion

Class Participation / Quiz / Test

Research Based Activities: Article Review / Book review / Mastery  Project

 

BBBH433 - COMPANY LAW AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

 

Course Description: The course is structured to introduce the framework of Company law and Corporate Governance practices in India. It covers the provisions of Companies Act, 2013 in respect with Formation of a Company to its winding up. In addition, it also conceptualizes the various theories and practices of Corporate Governance based on various Committees recommendations. 


Course Objectives: 

  • To Educate the students by imparting the knowledge of rules and regulations relating to the Company management.

  • Provide a fair idea about updated provisions of the Companies Act, 2013. 

  • Familiarize the evolution and need for corporate governance with the help of relevant cases.

  • Expose the students about various theories and practices of Corporate Governance in India based on Committee recommendations.

 

Course Outcome

Course Learning Outcomes: On having completed this course student should be able to:

 

CLO1   Identify the role and importance of Company Law and Company Formation.

CLO2   Demonstrate provisions of Company Management.

CLO3   Interpret the role and nature of Company Meetings.

CLO4   Examine the procedure of Winding Up of Company.

CLO5   Assess the relevance of Corporate Governance.

CLO6   Explore the role of Internal Control Systems.

CLO7   Delve into disclosure norms for Companies under the Companies Act, 2013. 

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
Introduction to Company Law and Formation of Company
 

Development of Company Law in India- Objects of the Act. Meaning and definition of Company, Definition of Subsidiary and Joint Venture Company. Special features, - Kinds of Companies – Features of various types of companies – Differences between Private and Public companies, Producer Company Punishment for improper use of “Limited” or “Private Limited”, Associate company- Small Company. Promotion – Role of Promoters –Position of Promoters-Incorporation of a Company – Memorandum of Association – Its contents and alteration – Doctrine of Ultra vires; Articles of Association – Its contents – Distinction between Memorandum of Association and Articles of Association – Doctrine of Constructive Notice – Doctrine of Indoor Management & It’s Exceptions– Certificate of Incorporation and Commencement of Business.Prospectus – Its contents – Statement in lieu of Prospectus.

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
Formation of a Company
 

Promotion of a company, Role and Position of Promoters, Incorporation of a Company, Memorandum of Association, Contents and alteration of MoA, Doctrine of Ultra vires, Articles of Association and its contents, Distinction between MA and AA, Doctrine of Constructive Notice Doctrine of Indoor Management & It’s Exceptions, Certificate of Incorporation and Commencement of Business, Prospectus and Its contents Statement in lieu of Prospectus.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
Company Management
 

Definition, Appointment of key managerial personnel, Position, Powers and duties of directors, Types of Committees, Liability of directors, Types of directors, Removal, disqualification, control, (Meaning, Definition, Rights and duties of managerial personnel, Managerial Remuneration, Concept of Interest of Director, Role of Auditor(Reporting on Fraud), Appointment & Rotation, Additional Responsibility of Independent Director.

 

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Company Meetings
 

Meetings of Board of Directors– Meetings of shareholders – Statutory meeting – Annual General Meeting – Extraordinary General Meeting – Resolutions - Quorum – Principle of Majority rule – Protection of minority interest – Investigation –Company Secretary- Qualifications – Appointment – Duties.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:6
Winding Up of a Company
 

Types of winding up, winding up by the Court, Voluntary winding up (members’ voluntary winding up and creditors’ voluntary winding up), Company Liquidator (Meaning & Definition), Winding up subject to the supervision of the Court, Appointment, duties, powers and liabilities of Liquidator, Preferential payments, Overriding preferential payments, Settlement of list of contributories and application of assets, Removal and Replacement of Liquidator Effect of winding up order, Stay of suits, etc., on winding up order, Consequences of winding up, Exercise and control of Company Liquidator's powers, Audit of Company Liquidator's accounts, Final meeting and dissolution of company.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:8
An Overview of Corporate Governance
 

The role and purpose of the corporation. What is corporate governance? How do the definitions of corporate governance differ and what do they have in common? History of corporate governance. Issues in corporate governance, Evolution-Introduction. Need and Importance of corporate governance. Theories of Corporate Governance, Stewardship theory, Agency theory , Stakeholder theory, Committee recommendations, Naresh Chandra Committee, Kumar Mangalam, Birla committee, Narayana Murthy Committee.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:6
Internal Control System
 

Internal Control-Objectives, role and importance of Management and Auditor in Internal Control Mechanism of a Corporation. Corporate Governance and Internal Control over Financial Reporting - A Comparison of Regulatory Regimes.

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:8
Disclosure Requirements and Reporting Requirements
 

Disclosures as per the Companies Act, 2013-Disclosures may be made in respect of but not limited to- Financial and operating results, Company objectives, Ownership, Related party transaction, Board, Remuneration of the boards, Risks.

Text Books And Reference Books:

1. A C Fernando (2009). Corporate Governance: Principles, Policies & Practices, Pearson Education 

2. Avatar Sigh. (2014). Company Law, Eastern Book Company, Lucknow

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1. Giles Proctor & Lilian Miles. Corporate Governance, Cavendish Publishing Ltd, London,

2. Aggarwal, S. (2003). Corporate Governance: Concept and Dimensions, Snow White Publications Pvt.Ltd.

 

Evaluation Pattern

Students are evaluated for each paper on the basis of written examination and continuous internal assessment. Each paper carries maximum of 100 marks and is evaluated as follows:

 

 

End Semester Exam (ESE)

30%

Mid Semester Exam (CIA-II)

25%

Continuous Internal Assessments (CIA- I & III)

40%

Attendance

05%

Total

100%

BBBH434 - HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

Out of all the resources used by organizations, human resources are very unique because of the emotional labour they experience and the environment in which they operate hence managing them is always a challenge. The course helps the learners to understand how human resources are managed, what functions are performed in a HR department, how they are performed and various challenges an organization will face and solve with respect to their human resources

Course Objectives

· To be able to familiarize the students with the relevance of modern human resource requirements and challenges in the ever-changing business environment

· To be able to know the elements of human resource management at domestic and global level.

· To be able to understand and apply HR intervention in conjunction with organization need.

 

Course Outcome

CLO 1:To have an understanding of the basic concepts, functions and processes of human resource management

CLO2 :To Design and formulate various HRM processes such as Recruitment, Selection, Training, Development, Performance appraisals and Reward Systems, Compensation Plans and Ethical Behavior.

CLO3 :o Develop necessary skill set for application of various HR issues.

CLO4:  Evaluate the developing role of human resources in the global arena. 

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:4
Human Resource Management
 

Introduction, evolution of HRM, theory of HRM, perspectives in people management, best fit models, SHRM, themes of HRM

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Forces Shaping HRM at work
 

Introduction, globalization and global comparisons, labor market patterns of employment, flexibility and fragmentation at work, legal framework for HRM and employment relations, the institutional framework for HRM

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:6
HRP & Job analysis
 

Concept of HRP, Different stages of HRP, Short-Term and Long-Term Planning, forecasting techniques, Action Plans in case of shortage and surplus of HR, Concept of Job Analysis, Importance and Benefits of Job Analysis, Job Analysis Process, Job Description, Job Specification and other Job-related concepts.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
Employee Resourcing: Recruitment, selection and induction
 

Concept of Recruitment, Factors affecting Recruitments, Sources of Recruitment; Alternative to Recruitment, Definition and Importance of Selection, Stages involved in Selection Process, Types of Selection Tests and Types of Interviews, Meaning and benefits of Induction, Content of an Induction Program.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:7
Learning & Development
 

Definitions, overview of learning principles, levels of learning, Kolb’s learning cycle, transfer of learning, learning and development methods, informal learning, management development 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:7
Performance management
 

Contribution and components of performance management, Purpose of Performance Appraisal, Trait, Behavioral and Result Methods of Performance Appraisals, Process of Performance Appraisal.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:7
Reward management
 

Definition of concepts, Objectives of Compensation Planning, Factors Influencing Compensation, Pay systems, types, non-pay benefits, cafeteria approach, job evaluation

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:4
Internal mobility
 

Career Planning & Development, Stages in Career Planning, Internal and External Mobility of Employees

Unit-9
Teaching Hours:5
Employee relations
 

Dealing with conflict, negotiating and bargaining, collective bargaining, dispute resolution, industrial action, employee engagement

Unit-10
Teaching Hours:8
HRM: A new paradigm
 

Work life balance, quality of work life, employee engagement, gamification of HRM, ergonomics, forging psychological contract, social media leverage, diversity management, returnship management, flexi work management

Unit-10
Teaching Hours:8
Role of HR in changing times
 

Introduction, development of HR function as a specialist function, analysing the role of HR function, new forms of delivery-outsourcing, shared service centres, E-HRM, High involvement or high-performance work practices, HR analytics, ICT in HRM, careers for HR specialists, trends in HRM

Text Books And Reference Books:

 Dessler, G. (2010). Human Resource Management. New Delhi: Prentice Hall.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading
  • Armstrong, M. (2010). Handook of HRM Practice. USA: Kogan Page.
  • Basak, S. P. (2012). Human Resource Management: Text & Cases. New Delhi: Pearson 
  • Dessler, G. (2010). Human Resource Management. New Delhi: Prentice Hall.
  • Rao, S. (2010). Essentials of Human Resource Management & Industrial Management: Text & Cases. New Delhi: Himalaya Publication.
  • Robbins, D. A. (2010). Fundamentals of Human Resource Management. New Delhi: Wiley.
Evaluation Pattern
  • EVALUATION PATTERN

    Students are evaluated for each paper on the basis of written examination and continuous internal assessment. Each paper carries maximum of 100 marks and is evaluated as follows:

     

    End Semester Exam (ESE)

    30%

    Mid Semester Exam (CIA-II)

    25%

    Continuous Internal Assessments (CIA- I & III)

    40%

    Attendance

    05%

    Total

    100%

BBBH435 - MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

 

The course aims at developing the fundamental knowledge of the analysis and interpretation of financial statements of the business organizations. It enables the learners to understand how functional budgets are prepared and used as a managerial tool for financial control and decision making in the business units. It also imports the learners the knowledge of management reporting and management audit.

To impart the knowledge of analysis of financial statements of business organization for decision making

To familiarize students with various tools and techniques of financial statements including Ratios fund flow statement and Cash flow analysis

To make known the learners concept and preparation of budget and budgetary control

To equip the learners to prepare management reporting and understand management audit

 

Course Outcome

v  Capability to analyze and interpret financial statements of business

v  Ability to interpret financial performance and position of business

v  Competent to prepare functional budgets of a business unit

v  Aptitude to make a managerial decision in a business organization

v  Capacity to prepare management report and conduct management audit

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:4
Introduction to Management Accounting
 

Introduction, meaning, definition, importance and scope of management accounting - Role of Management Accountant - Differences between financial, cost and management accounting

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
Analysis of Financial Statements
 

Meaning, definition, need and scope of financial statement analysis - Steps involved in financial statement analysis, Tools for financial statement analysis – Comparative Statements, Common size statements and Trend Analysis, practical problems

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:12
Ratio Analysis
 

Meaning, definition, objectives of ratio analysis, Classification of ratios – Liquidity ratios, Solvency ratios, Profitability ratios, Turnover ratios, Practical problems DuPont analysis - Z score – M score, Practical Problems

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:10
Fund Flow Statement
 

Introduction, Concept of fund, Statement of changes in Working Capital, Funds from Operations, Sources and Application of Funds

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:8
Cash Flow Statement
 

Meaning of cash flow statement - Distinction between funds flow and cash flow statement - Uses of cash flow statement, Limitations of cash flow statement - Concept of cash and cash equivalents, Cash from operating activities, Cash flows from investing activities and cash flows from financing activities – Preparation of cash flow statement - Practical Problems as per Accounting Standard 3

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:8
Budgetary Control
 

Introduction to budget - Meaning, objectives and advantages of budgetary control – Limitations of budgetary control – Types of budgets, Functional budgets & Fixed and Flexible budgets – Cash budget – Practical problems

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:5
Marginal Costing
 

Meaning of marginal costing and marginal cost – Absorption costing and managerial costing, objectives – advantages - contribution, profit volume ratio, break even analysis, Practical Problems including make or buy decision

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:5
Management Reporting and Management Audit
 

Meaning of Management Reports- Essentials of effective reporting-Reports to different levels of management-Forms of reporting-Kinds of reports-Specimen form of a Management report-Review of reports, Management Audit -Definition of Management Audit-Objectives of Management Audit-Scope of Management Audit –Areas of Management Audit.

Text Books And Reference Books:

 

  • M.N.Arora. (2015). Management Accounting. New Delhi: Himalaya Publications.
  • Shashi K Gupta & R K Sharma(2014), Management Accounting; Kalyani Publlishers.
Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

 

  • Arora, M.N. (2016). Advanced Management Accounting. New Delhi: Himalaya Publishing House.
  • Gupta, S.K, R K Sharma and Neeti Gupta (2015). Management Accounting. New Delhi: Kalyani Publishers.
  • Gordon, E.,& Jeyram, N.  (2015). Management Accounting. New Delhi: Himalaya Publishing House.
  • Khan, M. Y., &  Jain, P.K. (2015). Management Accounting. New Delhi: Tata Mcgraw Hill Education.
  • P Periaswamy (2013), Financial cost and Management Accounting; Himalaya publishing House
  • Rajesh S & Gangadharappa (2014), Management Accounting;  Kalyani Publishers.
Evaluation Pattern

End Semester Exam (ESE)

30%

Mid Semester Exam (CIA-II)

25%

Continuous Internal Assessments (CIA- I & III)

40%

Attendance

05%

Total

100%

BBBH461 - BANKING AND INSURANCE (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course covers the various stages in the growth and development of banking in India to its present status, relationship between banker and customer, the legal status of banks as a paying banker and collecting banker and principles and procedures for sanctioning of loans. This course also covers insurance in general as well as different types of insurance such as life, general and different type of general insurance.  

  • To familiarize the students with the growth and development of banking industry in India, the changing dimensions of banking services.
  • To provide with thorough knowledge about the legal aspects of the relationship between banker and customer, negotiable instruments, paying banker and collecting banker, loan sanctioning procedures and also the various modern banking services.
  • To familiarize the learners with the insurance business in general and life insurance and various insurance products and also different types of general insurance business.

Course Outcome

 

  • To demonstrate the knowledge on the growth and development of banking industry in India, the changing dimensions of banking services.
  • To practice legal aspects of the relationship between banker and customer, negotiable instruments, paying banker and collecting banker, loan sanctioning procedures and also the various modern banking services.
  • To do and practice insurance business in general and life insurance and various insurance products and also different types of the general insurance business.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:6
Introduction to Banking
 

Meaning Features and Mechanism of E-Banking & Internet Banking, Mobile Banking & Telephone

Banking, ATM & Electronic Money (Credit Cards) ,Electronic Funds Transfer System & INFINET

Modern Banking Services. ITES and the worldwide banking sector

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:7
Relationship between Banker & Customer
 

General relationship,–Special relationship –Statutory Obligation to honor Cheque, Bankers lien Bankers duty to maintain secrecy of Customer Accounts .Exemption from law of limitation, legal framework – corporate banking, loan documentation

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:7
Paying Banker
 

Rules & Regulations, Payments of cheques, Negotiable Instruments Crossing of cheques& Endorsements, Protection to Paying Banker.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Principles & Procedures of Bank Lending
 

Introduction of Funds, Principles of good lending, Types of advances, Security, Types& charges Lien –Pledge –Hypothecation –Mortgage Appraisal procedure and Documentation for corporate credit.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:7
Introduction to Insurance
 

Meaning and Importance of Insurance, Definition of risk and uncertainty; classification of risk; Sources of risk - external and Internal. Brief History of Insurance, Indian Contract Act, Special Feature of Insurance Contract Act, Insurance Laws.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:7
Life Insurance
 

Principles of life insurance. Contracts of Life Insurance: proposals and policy, assignment and nomination, title and claims, Life insurance products, pensions & Annuities

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:8
General insurance
 

Principles of general Insurance Personal general insurance products (Fire, personal liability, home owners, personal motors, miscellaneous insurance) Terminology, persists, clauses & covers .Risk assessment, Underwriting & ratemaking, product design, Development & evaluation

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:7
Various Branches of General Insurance
 

Brief History –Fire –House owners’ insurance, Marine Engineering –personal Motor Insurance aviation –Personal liability, agriculture miscellaneous insurance

Text Books And Reference Books:

Maheshwari, S.K. &Maheshwari. S N. (2010). Law & Practice of Banking. New Delhi Kalyani Publishers.

Srinivasan, T.M.N. (2010). Principles of Insurance Law. Nagpur: Lexis NexisButterworthsWadhwa.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1)      Gupta, S.N. (2010). Banking Law in Theory & Practice (5thedition). New Delhi: Universal Law Publishers

2)      Guruswamy, S. (2010). Banking theory, law & practice (2nd edition). New Delhi: McGraw hill-higher publication

3)      Srinivasan, T.M.N. (2010). Principles of Insurance Law. Nagpur: Lexis Nexis

Butterworth Wadhwa

4)      Tannan, M.L. (2010). Banking Law & Practice in India. Nagpur: LexisNexis Butterworth  

Wadhwa.

Insurance

1) Kumar, G. (2013). Hand Book of Insurance Laws. Allahabad: Law publishers

2) Narayanan, H. (2008). Indian Insurance – A Profile (2ndedi).Mumbai: Jaico Publishing House.

3) Singh, B.N. (2014). New Insurance Law. Allahabad: Universal Law Agency.

 

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1: 20 Marks

CIA 2: 20 Marks

CIA 3: 20 Marks

Attendence:5 Marks

ESE 25 Marks

BSDBS412 - KNOWLEDGE APPLICATION SKILLS (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:2
Max Marks:50
Credits:1

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Knowledge Application refers to the ability to use learned material in new and concrete situations. This may include the application of such things as rules, methods, concepts, principles, laws, and theories. Learning outcomes in this area require a higher level of understanding than those of comprehension.

Course Outcome

  • Students will learn the purpose and benefits of using statistical software programs such as SPSS for managing and analyzing data.
  • Students will gain critical hands-on experience using various features of SPSS software database design and perform descriptive and inferential statistics analysis.
  • Choose appropriate statistical techniques/tools to address specific business problems.
  • Complete mini project with application of SPSS for analysis. 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:15
Unit-1 Data Analysis using SPSS -I
 

Introduction to SPSS: general description, functions, menus, commands , SPSS file management, Manual input of data , Automated input of data and file import ,Defining variables , creating a new data set, measurement scales,  Descriptive statistics analysis- Frequencies ,Descriptive ,Explore , Crosstabs ,Charts, validation, Statistical significance, Hypothesis testing ,Types of Hypothesis, P-value, Normality tests, Means, Validation of data, Interpretation-meaning, techniques of interpretation.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:15
Unit-2 Data Analysis using SPSS:-II
 

Types of inferential tools, T-test – independent and paired sample test, One-way ANOVA, chi-square testing, correlation analysis, Regression(Simple, multiple linear regression, Logistic , ordinal regression and multinomial regression).

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.      Chawla, D., & Sondhi, N. (2011). Research Methodology: Concepts and cases. New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House

2.      Kothari, C. R. (2004). Research methodology: Methods and techniques. New Age International.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.      A.K.P.C.Swain(2010),A text book on Research Methodology, Kalyani Publishers, 3rd edition.

Evaluation Pattern

Subject teachers will do class activities for assessment after each module.

BBBH531 - INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description: The course focuses on: a) history, evolution, growth &  development of International Business. b) reasons for existence of MNCs and their strategies c) Government policies & Procedures applicable for International Business. This course is designed to impart sound knowledge about International Business operations through lectures, seminars, case studies & Group Discussions etc. to make learning challenging.

Course Objectives: Growing importance of globalization makes it mandatory for every budding manager to be well versed with the dynamics of International business. This course intends to familiarize the students of management with the advanced knowledge of global business scenario from an Indian perspective.

 

Course Outcome

 

  • Explain the basics of International Business and trade.
  • Identify the different modes of International Business expansion.

  • Evaluate the effectiveness of the Globalization concept in the 21st century.

  • Analyze the importance of International Business related institutions.

  • Develop the documentation regarding export finance and promotion.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
INTRODUCTION TO INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
 

Evolution of international business, nature of international business, need & importance of International Business, stages of internationalization, (EPRG) approaches to international business, theories of international business – Mercantilism, Absolute Advantage, Comparative Advantage, Factor Endowment, Competitive Advantage, Tariff and non tariff and barriers, Introduction to Political, Economic, Social-Cultural & technological environment of international business.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
MODES OF ENTERING INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
 

International business analysis- modes of entry- exporting (direct and indirect) licensing, franchising, contract manufacturing, management contracts, turnkey projects, Joint ventures- Mergers and Acquisitions- Foreign direct investment -Comparison of different modes of entry.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:7
GLOBALIZATION
 

Meaning- Definition and Features, Globalization-Advantages and Disadvantages, Socio–Cultural, Political &Legal and Economic Implications, Globalization and India, GATT and WTO.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
MNCs AND INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
 

Definitions & Distinction among Domestic Companies, International company, MNC, Global Company and TNC, Merits and Demerits, MNC s and India, OECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises. a) Concepts and Principles b) General Policies c)Disclosure, d) Employment and Industrial Relations, e) Environment, f) Combating Bribery, g) Consumer Interests h) Science and Technology, i) Competition., j) Taxation.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
INTERNATIONAL MARKETING INTELLIGENCE
 

Information required, Sources of information, International marketing information System, International marketing Research.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:7
INTRODUCTION TO INTERNATIONAL FINANCE
 

Trade and Balance of payment, Current items, Capital Items, Disequilibrium of balance of payments and rectification, components of International financial systems, FOREX market, Euro currency market, IMF and International Monetary system, Exchange Rate determination (Concept only), Capital account convertibility.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:10
EXPORT FINANCING AND DOCUMENTATION
 

Export credits, Method and sources of credit, Methods of payments in International Business, Financing techniques, RBI and EXIM bank – Roles, functions in exports.

Important Trade Terms in International Trade:

[Introduction: CIF, F.O.B, F.O.B Contract with additional services, F.O.B Contract (Buyer contracting with carrier), FAS, EX SHIP & Arrival Contracts, C& F, EX WORKS & EX STORE CONTRACTS, FOR CONTRACTS, SALE OF A CARGO & EX- QUAY Contracts. Export and import procedure, document required their relevance.

 

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:8
EXPORT PROMOTION
 

Assistance and Incentives to Indian Exporters, Export Promotion measures/Schemes: Market development assistance, Cash compensatory scheme, duty drawback scheme, Replenishment licensing scheme, Duty exemption scheme.

Role and functions of DGFT, IIFT, RBI, ECGC & EPCs in promoting international trade, FDI Trends, Rules and regulations.

 

Text Books And Reference Books:
  • Rakesh, M. J. (2013). International Business, New Delhi, Oxford University Press
Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

 

  • Laura, H. & Werhane, P. H. (2013). The Global Corporation, Routledge Taylor & Francis Group, New Delhi

  • John, B. C., & Parboteeah, K. P. (2011). International Business: Strategy and the Multinational Company, Routledge Taylor & Francis Group, New Delhi

  • Varma, S. (2013). International Business, New Delhi, Pearson Publication

  • Charles, H. (2011). International Business: Text & Cases, New Delhi, Tata McGraw  Hill

  • Warren, J. K. (2013). Global Marketing Management, New Delhi, Prentice Hall

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1- 20 Marks

CIA 2 - Mid semester exam - 25 Marks

CIA 3 -  20 Marks

End semester exam - 30 Marks

 

Attendance - 5 Marks

BBBH532 - TAXATION LAW- 1 (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

The course intends to provide basic knowledge on Direct taxes, tax structure in India, framework of the legislation, Incomes exempted from tax and computation of income under the Heads Salary, House property, Business or profession, Capital Gains and other sources. It provides thorough knowledge of various concepts and their application relating to direct tax laws with a view to integrate the relevance of these laws with tax planning anddecisions through various deductions.

1)To impart the basic and practical knowledge on Income Tax Structure in India

2)To understand the procedure to identify residential status and incidence of taxation

3) To know the chargeability, provisions and exemptions under various heads of income

4)To understand the methodology in computing Gross Total Income by considering various deductions available for individuals

5)To calculate tax liability for individual with applicable tax slab rates

Course Outcome

1.Assess Residential status of Individual and chargeability of tax based on their residential status as per income tax provisions

2. Compute taxable income from various heads like Salary, House Property, Capital Gains and other sources

3. Calculate Gross total income with the best use of deductions under various sections of income tax act and amendments

4. Compute Tax liability for individual for the respective assessment year

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:4
Introduction to Taxation:
 

Introduction To Taxation-Direct And Indirect Tax, Income Tax Act 1961, Income Tax Rules 1962, Finance Act, Scheme of IT An Over-View Basic Concepts- Assessee, Person, Assessment Year, Previous Year, Agricultural Income, Income, GTI, Total Income, Average Rate Of Tax Capital And Revenue

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
Residential Status And Incidence Of Tax
 

Residential Status and Incidence of Tax, Determination of residential status, Kinds of income, incidence of tax, Tax free income

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:12
UNIT III Income from Salary
 

                                                                                                                                                                                                               

Chargeability,VariousAllowances,Perquisites,

and,their Valuation, Treatment of Provident Fund, profit the Lieu of salaryductions From

Gross Salary, Retirement Benefits (Practical Problems).

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
UNITIV Income from House Property
 

Chargeability, annual value and its determination, deductions from annual value, (practical problems)

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:8
UNIT V Profits and Gains of Business and Profession
 

Meaning Of Business and Profession, Incomes Chargeable Computation Of Taxable Income, Treatment fringe benefit tax, Deemed Profit And Incomes Treatment Of Depreciation 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:4
UNIT VI Capital Gains
 

Meaning of important terms, Computation of capital gains exemptions from LTGC u/54, 54B, 54EC, 54 F

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:4
UNIT VII Income from Other Sources
 

Incomes taxable, deductions allowed, grossing up of income, computation of taxable income Clubbing of income & set off and carry forward

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:8
UNIT VIII Deductions from gross total income Assessment of individuals
 

Computation of total Income, Deduction u/s 80 C to 80 U and tax liability. Assessment procedure, Income tax authorities and their powers, Collection and Recovery of Tax

Text Books And Reference Books:

Gaur, V.P.and Narang, B.K. . Income Tax Law and practice. (Latest edition). New Delhi :Kalyani Publishers

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Vinod.K.Singhania, Latest Edition. Direct Taxes-Law & Practice. Taxman Publication

Evaluation Pattern

ASSESSMENT OUTLINE

Components of CIA-I       20 marks

 

CIA I A:Write a comparative report on Finance Bill of 2018  and 2019

 

 

CIA I B: MCQ test through Moodle (20 MARKS converted 10 Marks) Time and date will be notified in the class by respective subject teachers.

 

                                                                                           

Components of CIA-II                                                                                        50 Marks

Mid Term Exam Syllabus: Unit I, II, III

      

Components of CIA-III                                                                                        20 Marks

             

CIA III : Group Assignment on computation of Tax liability under different heads with Analysis of Tax Planning.

 

 

                                                                                           

 

BBBH533 - STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

·      To learn the fundamentals of strategic management using the case method.

·      To understand the fundamental principles & interrelationships among business functions such as: R & D, Production, Marketing, Customer Service, finance, human resources and Information Technology

·      To understand the interrelationships of business to individuals, other organizations, government and society.

Course Outcome

·      To explain the strategy adopted by the companies in response to environmental changes

·      To understand the manner in which strategic and competitive advantage is developed.

·      To study various methods and techniques for internal analysis.

·      To observe how positioning of the firm in the industry help to determine the   competitive advantage.

·      To explore the tools and technique for strategic analysis o understand different business strategies

·      To study the interrelationship of formulation and implementation.

·      To examine how strategic management contributes to effective corporate governance of an organization

·      To study the importance of values and ethics in Business

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:5
Strategic Planning And Strategic Management
 

Defining strategy- levels at which strategy operates- approaches to strategic decision making, the strategic management process- Strategic intent: Vision, mission and objectives

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:7
Environmental Analysis
 

The organizations environment- External and internal environment, components of external and internal environment- Environment scanning- Organizations responses to the environment

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
Industry and Resource Analysis
 

A framework for industry analysis, Michael porter’s analysis- usefulness of Industry analysis- Competitive analysis: Forces shaping competition in an industry- interpreting the Five force models- Strategic group, and competitor analysis- Internal analysis.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:5
Strategy Formulation And Choice
 

Corporate level strategy: Introduction- The balanced score card- Grand strategies- Growth/Expansion strategy- Diversification Strategy- Stability strategy- Retrenchment strategy- combination strategy, BCG matrix.

 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:5
Corporate Restructuring
 

The concept of corporate restructuring- the process of restructuring- mergers and acquisition- takeovers- cooperative strategies- Reasons for strategic alliances- risks and costs of strategic alliances

 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:6
Global Strategies
 

Globalization-risks- global expansion strategies- the MNC mission statement- deciding which market to enter- market entry strategy international strategy - Business level strategy - Strategic analysis and choice

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:5
Strategy Implementation and Functional Strategies
 

Issues in strategy implementation- Activating strategy and resource allocation- strategy-structure relationship- the functional structure- divisionalisation- Functional level strategies:

Operational strategy, financial strategy, marketing strategy and Human resource strategy

 

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:5
Behavioural Implementation
 

Corporate Governance and strategic management- Strategic Leadership- Corporate culture and Strategic management- Corporate Politics and Power- Personal values and Business Ethics

 

Unit-9
Teaching Hours:5
Strategic Evaluation and Control
 

Importance, barriers- evaluation criteria- strategic control- operational control- evaluation techniques for operational control- characteristics of an effective control system

 

Unit-10
Teaching Hours:5
Strategy And Technology Management
 

Designing a technology strategy- Technology forecasting and R & D Strategies- Strategies for acquisition and absorption of technology- Social audit.

Text Books And Reference Books:

  1. Amason, A.C. (2014). Strategic Management :From theory to Practice(1st ed.). New York: Routledge.
  2. Barney, J.B. &Hesterly, W.S.(2013).Strategic Management & Competitive Advantage: Concepts & Cases(4th ed.). Prentice Hall.
  3. Dess, G., Eisner, A., Lumpkin, G      .T., &Namara, G.M. (2014).Strategic Management: creating competitive advantages (6th ed.).McGraw Hill Education.
  4. Hill, C.W.L., & Jones, G.R. (2015). Strategic Management-An Integrated Approach (10th ed.).South Western: Cengage Learning.
Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Rao, V.S.P., & Krishna, V.H., (2015). Strategic Management: Text and Cases. New Delhi: Excel Books.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA

Marks

CIA1 A

10 Marks

CIA1 B

10 Marks

Mid Semester Exam (CIA-II)

25 Marks

CIA3 A

10 Marks

CIA3B

10 Marks

End Semester Examination

30 Marks

Attendance

05 Marks

 

BBBH534 - MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM AND COMPUTING (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Information and information systems (IS) are vital organizational resources and constitute an integral part of managerial decision making. It is important to understand how managers can effectively utilize IS to achieve organizational goals. Accordingly, the objective of this course is to train students to identify and resolve managerial issues surrounding the use of IS in organizations. The purpose of this course is to provide the fundamentals associated with the information technology in a business perspective. These fundamentals are business concepts in which the influence of information technology has made some change or brought in new concepts. The course also gives insights on current technology that aids business decision making.

Course Objectives:

 

  1. To be able to identify and learn the role of information systems in competitive environment.
  2. To analyse the use of various technologies in managing dynamic workplace.
  3. To introduce the business issues relating to information systems.
  4. To understand how Information Technology (IT) support systems such as Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP), Decision Support Systems (DSS), Artificial Intelligence (AI) and Expert Systems (ES), can be leveraged to provide business value. 
  5. To be able to outline the role of the ethical, social, and security issues of information systems.

Course Outcome

CLO1 Demonstrate a basic understanding of application of Business Information systems in organizations.

CLO2 Illustrate the impact of information systems in society.

CLO3 Identify the current changes in technology which is essential for better business decision making.

CLO4 Evaluate the business issues and challenges in IT perspective.

CLO5 Develop functional modules with softwares such as ERP and CRM and examine the nature of its working.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:7
INTRODUCTION TO INFORMATION SYSTEMS
 

Concept of Management Information system- management, information, system, Functions and characteristics of MIS, Types of information system-operation support system, management support system, Components of MIS-hardware, software, data resources, network, people, Pyramid Structure of MIS, Data Processing-Data Processing Cycle, MIS vs Data Processing, Digital eco-system in global perspective (security issues, competition in digital ecosystem to be discussed)

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
DATA RESOURCES
 

Database Management System (DBMS) concepts, Models, Intelligence Data systems- Business Intelligence System (BIS), Background to BIS, Business Marketing Intelligence System-Latest Trends in DBMS- Data Warehousing, Data Mining, Web Mining, and OLAP.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
MIS AND INTERNET
 

Internet Revolution-Digital Firm-Internet, intranet, extranet, ERP, SaaS, PaaS, IaaS SCM, e-CRM,SFA, RFID, Internet Induced digital innovation-key characteristics of digital innovation, Digital Transformation, Importance of digital transformation in today’s business scenario, Importance of digitization for organization and it’s stakeholders.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
IMPLEMENTING INFORMATION SYSTEM
 

Planning of implementation, Challenges of implementation, stages of implementation, Implementation process, Approaches to implementation roll out-causes of success and failure of implementation, management support and commitment, level of complexity and risks.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:8
E-BUSINESS APPLICATION
 

E-business enterprise and applications, Functional Business systems-Marketing, HR, Finance, Operations, Production, E-commerce-categories, E-payment systems, Challenges and trends in e-commerce, E-commerce and its impact on international business.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:7
M-COMMERCE
 

Emerging mobile digital platform- Evolution of M-commerce, M-commerce applications, Challenges of M-commerce, Components of mobile commerce, Growth of M-commerce and its effect on business.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:7
EMERGING TECHNOLOGIES IN BUSINESS
 

Overview of Emerging technologies- Data to Analytics to Machine Learning to Artificial Intelligence, Connected Clouds (public, private and Hybrid), Augmented Reality, Internet of Things (IoT), Big Data, Industry 4.0

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:7
ETHICAL and SOCIETAL CHALLENGES OF IT
 

Ethical and social issues connected with systems-legal issues, privacy issues, ethical issues, Accountability and liability issues, Internet challenges to privacy, IPR, Copy rights and Patents.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Joshi, G. (2013). Management Information Systems. New Delhi: Oxford University Press.

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading
  1. Kamat, N. C., &Zaveri, J. (2011). Management Information System. Mumbai: Himalaya Publishing House.
  2. Murthy, C.S.V. (2013). Managagement Information System: Text and Applications. Mumbai: Himalaya Publishing House.
  3. Murthy. C.S.V. (2013). Management Information System (7 ed.). Mumbai: Himalaya Publishing House.
  4. O' Brien, J. (2011). Management Information System. New Delhi: Golgotha Publications.
  5. Raj, S. (2013). Management Information System. New Delhi: Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd (Pearson).
Evaluation Pattern

 

End Semester Exam (ESE)

30%

Mid Semester Exam (CIA-II)

25%

Continuous Internal Assessments (CIA- I & III)

40%

Attendance

05%

Total

100%

BBBHE541D - DESIGN THINKING AND INNOVATION MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Innovation is no longer a strategic choice. It is necessary for business continuity in almost every industry. The course is designed to impart skills of innovation and introduce the concept of  Design thinking which enables systematic and human centric approach to finding unique solutions to common problems.

COURSE OBJECTIVE:

 To engage students in lateral thinking process

To enable them synthesize ideas into a practical product/solution

 To be able to empathize with customer requirements

To equip them to use simple prototyping tools.

Course Outcome

 

Enable students to visualize  and think out of the box

 

Provide tools to become an innovative thinker and uncover creative opportunities

 

Integrate human centric perspective in design

 

Develop end to end solutions through Ideation, Innovation, Iteration and implementation 

 

 

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
INTRODUCTION TO CREATIVITY AND INNOVATION
 

Mindset, Convergent thinking vs. Divergent thinking, Right brain thinking lateral thinking, out of box approach, creativity, risks and overcoming failures, need-based innovations, highly innovative companies and strategies, radical thinkers, Disruptive innovation

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
INNOVATION TECHNIQUES
 

Organizational culture and innovation, Methods and techniques of innovation management, Creative approaches, Systemic and analytical methods and techniques of innovation management, Financing innovation

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
MARKETING INNOVATION PRODUCTS
 

Strategic considerations on innovations, innovation platforms that incorporate new product development, process innovations, service innovation, service design innovation, multiple product options, portfolios and standards

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN THINKING
 

Design thinking, Phases, Importance, Tools of Design thinking

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:12
PHASES OF DESIGN THINKING ? I
 

Phase1 – Explore- tools of phase 1- Steep analysis, Stake holder mapping, opportunity framing, Phase 2 – empathize – tools of phase 2- observation, user interviews, need finding, Persona development.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:12
PHASES OF DESIGN THINKING ? II
 

Experiment – Phase 3 – Tools –Ideation, prototyping and experience design Engage Phase 4 –tools - Story telling – co-creation, evolve – Phase 5 – Strategic requirements – Evolved activity systems, Change management .

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.Prahalad C.K, Krishnan M.K (2008).The new age of innovation, McGraw Hill

2. Paul Traut(2008). Innovation Management and New product Development , Pearson

3. Khandwalla(2003). Corporate Creativity, McGraw hill

4.Tim Brown Change by Design,harper collins

5. Gavin Ambrose & Paul Harris, Design Thinking, AVA Publishing SA.2010

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.Mauborgne, Rene(2005).Blue Ocean Strategy,Harvard Business School Press.

2. Snyder, Duarte(2008). Unleashing Innovation, How Whirlpool Transformed an Industry, Jossey-Bass

4. Fraser(2012). Healther, Design Works; Toronto: University of Toronto Press.

5. Govindarajan,Vijay Trimble,Chris(2005). 10 Rules for Strategic Innovators, Harvard Business School Press

Evaluation Pattern

End Semester Exam (ESE)

30%

Mid Semester Exam (CIA-II)

25%

Continuous Internal Assessments (CIA- I & III)

40%

Attendance

05%

Total

100%

BBBHE542D - FAMILY BUSINESS MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

 

Course Description: 

Family business has been dominating Indian industrial scenario since its inception during British Raj. The course is aimed to offer students a comprehensive understanding of the dynamics and nuances of family business globally and provide skills to scale up or diversify family business to the next level.

Course Objectives:

  • To develop understanding of family business system and the challenges it faces in transitional economy.

  • To apply theoretical and practical knowledge in the changes of family business at global and local levels.

  • To gain knowledge and skills on the growing concerns relating to family business conflicts and diverse strategies for conflict resolution.

  • To gain knowledge and skills on the need and scope of succession planning for family business to stay and grow. 

Course Outcome

  • Demonstrate understanding of the need, nature, scope, uniqueness, and challenges of family business system.

  • Apply theoretical and practical knowledge in family business practices globally.

  • Analyse problem solving skills used in family business conflicts across culture.

  • Evaluate succession planning strategies towards family business sustainability.

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:9
Introduction to Family Business Management
 

The nature, importance, uniqueness of Family Business; 4 primary theoretical perspectives on family business; Difference between family-owned and non-family-owned business.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
Family Business Attributes
 

Role of kinship in family Business; Relationship between family and business; Complexity, conflicts, and circle model of family influence.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:6
Contributions of Family Business Enterprises
 

Prevalence of family firms world-wide – United States, Europe, Asia Pacific Rim, Africa, and India; Family firms’ contribution to GDP and employment; Stock Market listing of family firms.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Governance of Family Business Enterprises
 

Governance constellation and its impact on family business; Family involvement in business management; Family wealth and ownership issues; Family involvement in new entrepreneurial activity.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:6
Succession Planning
 

Meaning and scope of family succession; Legal norms of succession; Insider vs. outsider succession challenges; Declining relevance of intra-family succession, Succession planning road map.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:6
Multi-Generational Value Creation Generational Value Creation
 

Changing landscape of family firms; Recognition, decision making and policy implementation; Value creation and sustainability. 

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:6
Relationships and Conflict Management in Family Business Firms
 

Social structure of family business; Family values; Types of conflict – relationship conflict, task conflict and value conflict; Conflict management strategies.

 

Text Books And Reference Books:
  1. Alderson, Keanon (2018). Understanding the Family Business: Exploring the Differences Between Family and Nonfamily Businesses. Business Expert Press.

  2. Zellweger, Thomas (2017). Managing the Family Business: Theory and Practice. Edward Elgar Publishing, UK.

  3. Peter, Leach & Dixit, Tatwamasi (2016). Indian Family Business Mantras. Rupa Publications, New Delhi: India.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading
  1. Rhodes, K. & Lansky, D. (2013). Managing Conflict in the Family Business: Understanding Challenges at the Intersection of Family and Business. Palgrave Macmillan, USA. 

  2. Ward, John L. & Aronoff, Craig E. (2011). Family Business Governance: Maximizing Family and Business Potential. Palgrave Macmillan, USA. 

  3. Giudice, Manlio D., Peruta, Maria Rosaria D. & Carayannis, Elias G. (2010). Knowledge and the Family Business: The Governance and Management of Family Firms in the New Knowledge Economy. Springer.

  4. Gimeno, A., Baulenas, G. &  Coma-Cros, J. (2010). Family Business ModelsPractical Solutions for the Family Business. Springer.

  5.  Kaslow, Florence W. (Ed.) (2008). Handbook of Family Business: A Global Perspective. The Haworth Press Inc., USA.

  6. Ibrahim, A. Bakr & Ellis, Willard H. (2008). Family Business Management: Concepts and Practice (Edition 2). Kendall Hunt Publishing Company.

Evaluation Pattern
Component of Final Grade

Max Marks per Component

Weightage towards Final Grade

Total Marks per Component in Final Grade

CIA-I

20

20%

20

CIA-II

50

25%

25

CIA-III

20

20%

20

End –Term

50

30%

30

Attendance & Class Participation/ Interaction/Asynchronous Task

5

5%

5

Total

   

100

BBBHE543D - CLIENTELE DEVELOPMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:50
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This is an elective course offered in the fifth semester to students of ED specialization. As competition in the market place has become fiercer, clientele development has become a core sales function within mid-size and large companies. This course is about how to build clientele and successfully organize sales, marketing and business development, with special reference to B2B markets. This is useful for a new venture or an existing business entering a new market.

Course Objective

To understand the problems and needs of clients

To analyse sales models for creating and driving end user demand.

To help the learner distinguish between consumer marketing and industrial marketing

To understand the process by which strategic market analysis guides the development of B2B marketing 

Course Outcome

Identify the market types- creating a new market, bringing a new product to an existing market, and resegmenting an existing market.

Explain how companies find new markets for their specified products.

Interpret the various phases of company’s growth- client discovery, client validation, client creation and company building.

Assess how companies learn and iterate before they launch their products

Examine the traditional sales, marketing and business 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:5
Introduction to Clientele development
 

The “startup process”, Vertical markets- The “three types of startups”, market risk, start-up goals, Customer needs versus product features, The startup team, Client Development process, product development, Sales, Marketing & Business Development Execution

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
Types of Industrial Products
 

Major Equipment; Accessory Equipment; Raw and Processed Materials; Component Parts and Sub- Assemblies; Operating Supplies; Standardized and Non-standardized parts, Industrial services

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
Organisational Buying
 

Factors influencing Organizational Buying: Buying Roles; Organizational Buying Decision Process; Environmental & organizational Influences - Organizational Influences on Buying Behaviour: Buying Roles; The Buy Grid Model; The Organizational Buying Decision Process

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:10
Client Discovery
 

The team, client needs vs. product features, understanding the client, market selection, B2B vs. B2C markets, Strategic Industrial Marketing - Marketing Information Systems and Marketing Research – B2B Commerce

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:10
Client creation
 

Classification of B2B Products and Services - New Product Development and Introduction - Industrial Product Management - Pricing Decisions in Industrial Markets.

Industrial Product Decisions: Industrial Product Life Cycle –Industrial Product Mix determinants viz. technology – competition – operating capacity – shift in location of customers – government controls – changes in level of business activity

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:5
Channel strategies
 

Formulating Channel Strategies and Physical Distribution decisions – Channel Management -Promotional Strategies for Industrial Goods/ Services.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:10
Promotional strategies of Industrial Goods
 

Developing Marketing Strategies and Programs for Industrial Goods / Services. – Formulating channel strategy – Pricing strategy, Promotional strategy – Sales force automation.

Purchasing systems – Auctions-Documentation – bids – order placement – follow up – receipt and inspection, Promotion for Industrial products – Supporting salesman – Motivating distributors – Stimulating primary demand – Sales appeal – Publicity & sponsorships – Trade shows – exhibits – Catalogs – Samples – promotional letters – Promotional novelties

Text Books And Reference Books:

Hawaldar, K. Krishna, INDUSTRIAL MARKETING, TATA McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi. 2008

Peter M. Chisnall, STRATEGIC INDUSTRIAL MARKETING; Prentice-Hall International

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Michael D Hautt and Thomas W Speh, INDUSTRIAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT, The Dyden Press.

Evaluation Pattern

Component of Final Grade

Max Marks per Component

Weightage towards Final Grade

Total Marks per Component in Final Grade

CIA-I

20

20 %

20

CIA-II

50

25 %

25

CIA-III

20

20%

20

End – Term

50

30 %

30

Attendance

5

5 %

5

Total

   

100

BBBHH541C - INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS LAW (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This course is offered in the fifth semester of BBA Honors for the students specializing in Human Resources. The subject on Industrial relations law deals with the industrial relations law in Indian context .It is gives a fundamental understanding of employment relations which covers all aspect of relations between employees and employers/management. It makes the students understand basic laws related to employment which govern this relationship. It also throws light on the consequences of when these relations turn bad and what are the proactive and remedial actions that an HR professional take to resolve such issues.

Course Objectives

  • To understand and trace the necessity and evolution of approaches to the study of industrial relation and system of industrial relation in India
  • To identify the significance of factories act1948
  • To propose/design/develop effective conflict/dispute models models
  • To examine the current employment laws
  • To propose possible solutions to employee and employer problems

 

 

 

Course Outcome

Course Learning Comes

  • Demonstrate the understanding of the history and evolution/approaches and theories  of industrial relations in India
  • Apply effectively the factories act
  • Propose or design or develop effective conflict management models in business
  • Examine the current employment laws such as social security laws and wage legislation
  • Propose possible solutions for building industrial relations

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
Industrial Relation: Evolution and Growth
 

Evolution of Industrial Relations – Definition and Scope of Industrial Relations – Objectives and Essential Features of Industrial Relations – Participants and Dynamics of their participation in Industrial Relations – Industrial Relation Perspective and Approach and International Labour organization.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
Trade Unionism and Trade Unions
 

The concept of Trade Unionism – Politics and Trade Unions – Rights of Trade Unions – Roles, Functions and Objectives of Trade Unions – Classification of Trade Union – Trade Unions in India – Structure of Trade Unions in India – Union Security – Political Affiliation of Trade Unions – Problems of Trade Unions in India – Recognition of Unions – Rights of Recognized Unions – Trade Union Act 1926; Scope and Coverage, Objectives, Provisions. 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
The contract Employment and Standing Orders
 

The Contract Labour Act 1970; Objectives, Scope and Coverage, Definitions- Registration and Licensing- Duties of Controlling Authorities, Duties of Contractors, Duties of Principal Employer – The Engagement of Contract Labour – The Prohibition of Employment of Contract Labour          . Standing order-need and importance.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:12
The Factories Act & Industrial Employment Act
 

The Factories act, The Industrial Employment Act 1948; Objectives, Scope and Coverage, Main Provisions Industrial Conflicts and industrial disputes, Industrial Dispute; Concept – Industrial Dispute under ID Act 1947 – Industrial Dispute and Individual Disputes - Causes of Industrial Conflicts - Managing Discipline: Misconduct and Approaches to Handle Misconduct - Conducting Domestic Enquiry – Grievance Procedure.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:8
Industrial Conflict
 

Objectives – Definitions- Different forms of strike and lockout - Prohibitions for Strikes and Lockout – Illegal Strike and Lockouts – Layout, Retrenchment and Closure – Closure of Undertaking – Last IN First OUT – Unfair Labour Practices.

 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:8
Conflict Settlement Machinery
 

Industrial Conflict Settlement Machinery: Conciliation; Conciliation Officer , The Protection of Workmen During Pendency of Conciliation Proceedings – Obligation of Employers – Obligation of Employees – Board of Conciliation – Arbitration; Compulsory and Voluntary – Adjudication; Labour Court, Industrial Tribunals, National Tribunals – Recommendations of National Commission on Labour Settlement Machinery.

 

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:8
Labour Laws
 

Social security laws: The employees’ state insurance act 1948, The maternity act 1961, The payment of gratuity act 1972, The workmen compensation act 1923, The EPF act 1952, Wage Legislation: The payment of wages act 1936, The minimum wages act 1948, The payment of bonus act 1965.

 

Text Books And Reference Books:

P. N Singh, Neeraj Kumar (2011). Employee Relations Management: Pearson Education.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

 

1. Venkata Ratnam, C.S. (2010). Industrial Relations (5th edi), Oxford University Press.

2. Mamoria, C.B.,  Mamoria,S.,  & Gankar, S.V. (2010). Dynamics of Industrial Relations (13th edi), Himalaya Publications.

3. Srivastava, S.C. (2009). Industrial Relations and Labour Laws (5th edi), Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.

4.  Singh, B.D. (2009). Industrial Relations- Emerging Paradigm (2nd edi). Excel Books

5. Kaur, A., & Agarwal,P. (2010).  Industrial Relations(4th edi), Kalyani Publications.

6. Kumar, N. (2011). Human Resource Management & Industrial Relations (1st edi). Himalaya Publications.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 01 : 20 Marks

CIA 02 : 25 Marks (Mid Semester Exam)

CIA 03 : 20 Marks

End Semester Exam: 30 Marks

Attendance: 05 Marks

BBBHH542C - PERFORMANCE AND COMPENSATION MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

 

1.     To enable   Students  have an  exposure  to broaden areas in Compensation Management concepts and its  applications and research .

 

2.     To demonstrate a panoramic view of  tools and methods  to effectively manage individual and group rewards within organizations .

 

3.     To enable students to  design a compensation strategy and translating the same  into a pay structure. 

  

4.     To illustarare  employee performance evaluations, raises and promotions, short-term incentives, long-term incentives ,nonmonetary rewards.

 

  5.  To design an organization’s performance and compensation management process that complies with law and supports organizational mission and strategy..

Course Outcome

 

CLO1

To understand Employ job-related performance standards and performance indicators that reflect the employee’s range of responsibilities.

 

CLO2

To analyse  the  importance of financial and non-financial benefits offered by different categories of industries for motivating and keeping the potential employees satisfied

CLO3

To design matching compensation structure.

 

CLO4

To analyse and correlate  effective performance of the the employee and challenges and problems of the  the employer

 

CLO5

To create and develop different strategies to identify and retain potential empl

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:6
Performance management
 

 

Concept and Reality, Performance management defined, A short history of performance management, Features of performance management, Performance management in the dock, How well is performance management working, Lessons from research, Why does performance management fail?

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
Effective performance management-a changing
 

 

Guidelines on effective practice in performance  management, What’s happening to performance management, Examples of changes to performance management  system

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:7
Performance management issues-Improving objective setting
 

 

The issues, The role of HR, Improve objective setting, The conceptual background, Criteria for an effective performance objective, Setting performance objectives, Objective-setting issues, Developing objective-setting skills, An alternative to objectives

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:7
Replacing annual reviews-Abolish rating
 

 

Introduction: performance reviews under attack, the traditional approach to performance reviews, how are organizations responding to the challenge   and the problems? Reinventing the performance review, abolish rating, Introduction, Rating, forced ranking, Performance pay decisions without ranking, Identifying potential

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
Reinventing performance management
 

 

Introduction, Areas for reinvention, future methods of performance review.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:6
Fundamentals of reward management
 

 

Reward management defined, Aims of reward management, Reward philosophy, Guiding principles, Reward systems, Reward systems defined, Description of the main elements of a formal reward system, Reward systems in action, Developing formal reward systems, The development and implementation program

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:6
Financial, non-financial and total rewards
 

 

Introduction, Incentives and rewards, The theoretical framework,  The role of money, Research on the effectiveness of financial rewards, Opponents of financial rewards, Arguments for and against financial rewards, Criteria for effectiveness, non-financial rewards, The significance of non-financial rewards, Types of non-financial rewards, concept of total rewards, The approach to total rewards, Bridging the gap, Total rewards in practice

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:6
Rewarding and recognizing performance and merit
 

 

Merit pay, bonus schemes, team pay, rewarding for business performance, recognition

   
Unit-9
Teaching Hours:6
Rewarding special groups
 

 

Executive reward, rewarding sales and customer service staff, rewarding knowledge workers and manual workers

Unit-10
Teaching Hours:6
Employee benefits
 

 

Provision of employee benefits, flexible benefits

Text Books And Reference Books:

Michael Armstrong,on Reinventing Performance Management-Building a Culture of Continuous Improvement, (2017) Kogan page

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

 

1.     Rober Bacal, Performance Management, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi

2.     B D Singh, “Performance Management System – A Holistic Approach”, Excel books 

3.     S Kohli and T Deb, “Performance Management”, Oxford Higher Education 

4.     Bhatia, K. (2014).Compensation Management (2ndedi), Himalaya Publications.

 

5. Michael Armstrong & Helen Murlis, Reward Management- Remuneration Strategy and Practice, Crest Publishing House, 4THEdition, 2014

Evaluation Pattern
 

Assessment Component

Description

Weightage

CIA I

CIA I A

Title: Critically evaluate any of the performance appraisal methods, viz; 360 degree,BARS

CIA I B

 Title:Design a new performance evaluation tool  for a start up 

20%

CIA II

Mid Semester written examination conducted for 2 hours duration. Unit 1,2,3 (Topic covered up to car rental companies)

25%

CIA III

Assignment in groups -Provide a description for a job based in India by clearly specifying a job title ,job summary,job tasks,job context,job requirements,and KSAs .

20%

End Semester Examination

Written examination conducted for 2 hours duration. 

30%

Attendance

 

5%

Total

 

100%

BBBHH543C - PEOPLE ANALYTICS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:50
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

People analytics is a data-driven approach to managing human resources in the workplace. HR managers can take decisions which are based on deep analysis of data rather than the traditional methods. An introduction to research methods for human resource management offers students an insight to the nuances that guide quality research in HR-related issues. The course offers valuable insight into using tools and techniques which enables students, not only appreciate the role of number game in HR decision but also equips them with the knowledge to do so. This course is an introduction to the theory of people analytics, and is intended to prepare learners to perform the basic talent management data analysis. 

Course Objectives

  • To provide an understanding of various people analytics aspects and how it is been used in organizations
  • To provide an understanding of the fundamentals of analyzing HR data using data visualization and data analyzing techniques.
  • To identify and examine various metrics used for HR functions and decision making
  • To analyze the use of  technology in the area of human resource information system (HRIS), data visualization and data analysis for managing employees
  • To evaluate and infer the results produced by various data analysis tools for understanding the behavior patterns of employee data for making evidence-based HR decisions.

Course Outcome

Demonstrate a basic understanding of various people analytics aspects and how it is been used in organizations

Demonstrate a basic understanding of the fundamentals of analyzing HR data using data visualization and data analyzing techniques.

Identify the right metrics that can be  used for HR functions and decision making

Analyze the case and capable of determining the right  technology in the area of human resource information system (HRIS), data visualization and data analysis for managing employees

Evaluation and inference of the results produced by various data analysis tools for understanding the behavior patterns

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:12
Introduction
 

Pre-requisites to get started with People Analytics (PA) - Introduction to People Analytics – Meaning – Need for People Analytics - Changing nature of work – Introduction to drivers - From business analytics to people analytics - Big data & HR analytics - Competence in PA – kinds – need - PA process: List the competencies - comparison with the drivers - Branches in HR analytics: descriptive analytics - predictive analytics - prescriptive analytics – the role of AI/machine learning and deep learning

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
HRIS
 

HR metrics for various pillars - Asking the right questions - New pillars - HR data - availability and where it can be fetched – HRIS - Exploring various HRIS software

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:12
Data Analysis for HR decision-making
 

Diversity Analytics - dash board - chi-square - sample t-test - multiple linear regression - Employee Attitude Surveys - Engagement and Workforce Perception - Workforce/headcount tracking - Recruitment metrics - reliability & validity of selection methods - Predicting Performance using multiple linear regression - Predicting turnover

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
Data Analysis for HR decision-making
 

Talent Acquisition Analytics - Workforce planning analytics - Employee turnover/attrition (dashboard and predicting) - measuring at individual and team level - ANOVA - Kaplan Meier survival analysis technique - modeling the turnover costs

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:12
Exploring SPSS and Tableau
 

Warming up with SPSS - Installing, basics - importing data -  working with data - understanding results and inferring - copying results from SPSS to reports - List of tests to apply to various HR problems /scenarios - checklist. Introducing Tableau – usage - instruction to install Tableau – versions - norms & rules - Importing data from excel - HRIS - Understanding dimensions and measures - demo on various tabs - Basic visualizations (tools and techniques) - Case applications using Tableau - Case applications using MS-Excel

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:4
Advanced methods and tools
 

Cases on other HR domains; emerging HR domains with unstructured data; behavioral analytics - Other tools used in HR analytics - Rapid miner, SPSS – AMOS - Scenario modeling; Advanced HR analytic techniques - Mediation and moderation analysis; polynomial regression analysis 

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:4
Issues and future of people analytics
 

Reflection on HR analytics - issues and future of HR analytics

Text Books And Reference Books:

Isson, J. P. and Harriott, J. S. (2015), People Analytics in the Era of Big Data: Changing the Way You Attract, Acquire, Develop, and Retain Talent, Wiley Publications. 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Edwards, M.R., & Edwards, K. (2016 & 2019), Predictive HR Analytics: Mastering the HR metric, (1st or 2nd edition) Kogan Page

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern

  • CIA 1: 20 marks
  • CIA 2: 50 marks (converted to 30)
  • CIA 3: 20 marks
  • ESE: 50 marks (converted to 30)

BBBHM541B - CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:50
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

 

Consumer behavior encompasses complex variables that influence the purchase decision of consumers. Understanding consumer behavior is one of the fundamental requirements for any marketer. With the introduction to the study of consumer behavior, it covers the underlying concepts, principles, and theories of the subject and gives a clear explanation of the consumer psychographics and demographics affecting his behavior in both individual and group buying situations. It also considers the extent to which influences of consumer’s external factors on their buying decision process. An effective marketing mix strategy cannot be possible to frame unless studying the behavior of consumers.

 

 

Course Outcome

 

Explain the basics of consumer behavior and understand the relevance of the subject in the realm of contemporary business and marketing.

Relate the buying patterns in both the consumer and the organizational markets and analyze their applicability in diverse real-world buying situations.

Develop the students to be better decision makers in the field of marketing management through a better of consumer behavioral pattern.

Analyze the awareness of rights and power obtainable by the  consumer  through consumerism

 

Appraise the consumerism in India and benefits of consumerism to achieve organizational effectiveness

 

 

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:6
Introduction to Consumer Behavior:
 

 

Meaning, Types of consumers, Interdisciplinary nature of CB, Scope and Application of CB, Market segmentation and CB, Consumer Research.

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:7
Consumer Decision making Process
 

 

Problem recognition, Pre purchase search, purchasing process, Post purchase behavior, Models of Consumer decision making, Customer Loyalty

 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:12
Individual determinants of Consumer behavior
 

 

Personality, Motivation, Perception, Learning, Attitudes – concepts only

 

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:5
External Determinants of CB: Family, Age and Gender
 

 

Functions, FLC stages, Family decision making, Dynamics of husband wife decision making. Role of child in decision making, women’s buying behavior

 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:5
Influence of Social Class
 

 

Categories, Measurement of social class, Life style profiles, VALS, AIOS, Social class mobility.

 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:5
Influence of Culture and Subculture on Consumer Behavior
 

 

Characteristics, Measurement of Culture – Content analysis, Consumer Fieldwork

 

Subculture – religious, regional, racial, age and gender, culture – religious, regional, racial, age and gender

 

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:5
Diffusion of Innovation
 

 

Innovation, Diffusion process, Channels of communication, Social system and time, Stages - adoption process. Information sources

 

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:5
Organizational Buying Behavior
 

Nature, Purpose, Factors, Organizational buying decisions: Types, Process,

Criteria for Segmenting Organizational Markets

Unit-9
Teaching Hours:4
Consumerism
 

 

Introduction to consumerism, Consumerism in India, Benefits of consumerism, Government measures, Consumer protection Acts.

 

Text Books And Reference Books:

 

Schiffman, L.G., Kanuk.L.L,& Kumar.S.R (2010).Consumer Behaviour(10thedi). Prentice Hall.

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

 

 1) Blyth, J. (2008).Consumer Behavior. London:Thomson Learning.

 

 2) Lantos, G.P. (2010). Consumer Behaviour in Action- Real Life Applications for Marketing Managers. New York: M.E Sharpe.

 

 3) Nair.S.R (2010). Consumer Behaviour in Indian Perceptive. Mumbai: Hymalya Publishing House.

 

 4)Engel.J.F,Kollat.D.T,& Minar.P.W (2008).Consumer Behaviour Hinsdale IL Dryden Press.

 

 5) Howard.J.A, Sheth.J.N.(2008). Theory of Buyer Behaviour: Scott Foresman Glenview.

 

Evaluation Pattern

Continuous Internal Assessment - 1: 20 marks

Continuous Internal Assessment -2: 25 marks

(Mid-sem examination)

Continuous Internal Assessment -3:20 marks

End-semester Examination -          : 30 marks

Attendance                                    : 5 marks

BBBHM542B - BRAND MANAGEMENT AND LUXURY MARKETING (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course is designed to give students a good working knowledge of the many aspects of ofproduct and brand management. The separation of the product from the brand and the focus on building and maintaining brand equity has created a need for marketers to understand the complex relationship between products and brands. The topic covered in the course includes: the components of Consumer Based Brand Equity (CBBE); the relationship between products and brands; the history of brands; brand audits and brand architecture decisions; understanding brand associations; brand performance measurement; creating, maintaining and measuring brand equity.

Course Objective:

·         To  explain strategies that build brand equity

·         To Demonstrate knowledge of branding to applied in marketing

·         To teach the application of various methodologies, processes, and tools a marketing manager may use in order to critically evaluate a brand and its products

·         To teach how to prepare a professional, logical and coherent brand development report within a specific context.

To develop a brand audit and to use the information for brand planning

Course Outcome

CLO1: Identify and explain strategies that build brand equity

CLO2: Demonstrate how knowledge of branding can be applied to marketing

CLO3: Apply various methodologies, processes, and tools a marketing manager may use in order to critically evaluate a brand and its products

CLO4: Prepare a professional, logical, and coherent brand development report within a specific context.

CLO5: Develop a brand audit and to use the information for brand planning.

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
Introduction to Branding
 

Introduction to the concept of Brand Management: Brand –Meaning, Definition, Evolution of Brands, Functions of Brand to consumer, Role of Brand- Advantages of Brand, Product Vs Brand, Branding- Meaning, Creation of Brands through goods, services, people, Organization, Retail stores, places, online, entertainment, ideas, challenges to Brand builders Brand Management-Meaning & Definition. Strategic Brand Management Process-Meaning, Steps in Brand Management Process Strong Indian Brands.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:9
Customer Based Brand Equity
 

Customer-Based Brand Equity: Customer-Based Brand Equity-Meaning, (Keller Brand Equity Model) Model of CBBE Brand Equity: Meaning, Sources, Steps in Building Brands, Brand building blocks-Resonance, Judgments, Feelings, performance, imagery, salience-Brand Building Implications, David Aaker’s Brand Equity Model. Brand Identity & Positing: Meaning of Brand identity, Need for Identity & Positioning, Dimensions of brand identity, Brand identity prism, Brand positioning – Meaning, Point of parity & Point of difference, positioning guidelines Brand Value: Definition, Core Brand values, Brand mantras, Internal branding, Brand Resonance and Brand value chain

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
Choosing Brand Elements To Build Brand Equity
 

Choosing Brand Elements to Build Brand Equity: Criteria for choosing brand elements, options & tactics for brand elements-Brand name, Naming guidelines, Naming procedure, Awareness, Brand Associations, Logos & Symbols & their benefits, Characters & Benefits, Slogans & Benefits, Packaging. Leveraging Brand Knowledge: Meaning of Brand Knowledge, Dimensions of Brand Knowledge, Meaning of Leveraging Secondary Brand Knowledge & Conceptualizing the leverage process

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:9
Measuring & Interpreting Brand Performance
 

Measuring & Interpreting brand performance: Brand Value chain- Designing Brand Tracking studies, Establishing brand Equity Management Systems. Measuring Brand Equity: Methods for measuring Brand Equity- Quantitative Techniques & Quantitative Techniques, Comparative Methods-Brand based comparisons, marketing-based comparisons-Conjoint Analysis, Holistic methods. Managing Brand Equity: Brand Reinforcement, Brand Revitalization, Brand Crisis.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:8
Designing And Sustaining Branding Strategies (Architecture And Extension)
 

Designing and sustaining branding strategies: Brand hierarchy, Branding strategy, Brand extension and brand transfer, Managing Brands overtime. Brand Architecture and brand consolidation. Brand Imitations: Meaning of Brand Imitation, Kinds of imitations, Factors affecting Brand Imitation, Imitation Vs Later market entry, First movers’ advantages, Free rider effects, Benefits for later entrants, Imitation Strategies

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:8
Introduction And Evolution In Luxury Branding
 

Introduction: Luxury Brand Management: Luxury definition and relativity, luxury goods and luxury brands, basic psychological phenomena associated with the luxury purchase, luxury marketing mix, luxury retail, International luxury markets Definition and Crisis of Luxury Issues of Defining Luxury the Luxury Industry Reaction to the Crisis of Global Markets Effect of Crisis on the Luxury Industry Strategic Response to Crisis Evolution of the Global Luxury Market Evolution How Has It Changed? Luxury Industry Trends

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:8
The Art of Creating And Managing Luxury Fashion Brands
 

The luxury fashion marketing strategy the product Pricing The place of distribution Promotion The celebrity connection People Positioning. The confusion and clarification of fashion co-branding. The menace of fake luxury goods the luxury branding death-wish list. Luxury retail design and atmosphere

Text Books And Reference Books:

Essential Readings

·         Keller, K.L. (2015). Strategic Brand Management. (3rd edi). Prentice-Hall of India

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

·         Som,A.,& Blanckaert,C.(2015). The Road to Luxury: The Evolution, Markets, and Strategies of Luxury Brand Management. Wiley.

·         Aaker, D.A. (2011). Brand Relevance: Making Competitors Irrelevant, Jossey-Bass.

·         Aaker, D.A. (1991). Managing Brand Equity. New York: Free Press.

·         Aaker, D.A.. (1996). Building Strong Brands .New York: Free Press.

·         Aaker, D.A., & Joachimsthaler. E. (2000).  Brand Leadership. New York: Free Press.

·         Kapferer, Jean- Noel. (1997). Strategic Brand Management. Dover, NH Kogan Page.

·         Holt, D.B. (nd). How Brands Become Icons. The Principles of Cultural Branding, Harvard Business School Press.

·         Deming, S. (2007).The Brand who Cried Wolf. Wiley Publishers.

·         Ries, A.I., & Trout, J. (nd). Positioning: The Battle of Minds.

Evaluation Pattern

Component of Final Grade

Max Marks per Component

Weightage towards Final Grade

Total Marks per Component in Final Grade

CIA-I (15 + 5)

20

20%

20

CIA-II

25

25 %

25

CIA-III

20

20%

20

End Semester

30

30 %

30

Attendance

5

5 %

5

Total

100

 

100

BBBHM543B - RETAIL MANAGEMENT AND ANALYTICS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

COURSE DESCRIPTION:

This course introduces students to the new features in retail management, a real -world approach focusing on both small and large retailers. Students will examine the dynamics of business decision making and demonstrate the ability to identify, describe and apply the essential business concepts, theories and practices with respect to the subject retail marketing.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

· To introduce the current trends in the field of retailing

· To provide the basics about the functioning of retailing and help students strategize ideas for the betterment of the retail industry

· To identify and understand the areas where analytics can be applied in retailing

 

Course Outcome

Understand the importance of Retail in the context of businesses

Comprehend and validate the theoretical knowledge of retail locations with realistic models

Analyse the aspects of retail service quality and suggest measures to improve quality levels

Compare various pricing methods and design appropriate Customer Relationship programs

Correlate the nature of retail supply chain operations with analytical models that can benefit retailers at varied levels

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:7
Introduction to Retailing
 

Reasons for studying retailing, economic significance & opportunities in retailing, types of retailers – food retailers, general merchandise retailer, non-store retail format, service retailing, single store establishmentCorporate retail chain, multi-channel retailing, benefits offered by electronic channel, retailing in emerging world, multinational brand and retailing in different tiers in India.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
Retail Market Strategy
 

Target market retail format, building a sustainable competitive advantage, for growth strategies, steps in strategic and retail planning and operation management, evaluating competition in retailing, retail market information system

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:9
Retail site location and store management
 

Retail locations, factors affecting retail site location, retail location theories, factors affecting the demand for a region under consideration, attractiveness and evaluation of a retail site.

Store layout, types & features, store design – merchandise presentation techniques, atmospherics, customer service GAPS model for improving retail service quality.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:9
Merchandise Management and Pricing
 

Objectives for merchandise plan, assortment planning process, establishing and maintaining relationships with vendors, pricing strategies – cost oriented, demand oriented, competition oriented & use of breakeven analysis, price adjustments to stimulate retail sales.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:9
Retail communication mix and CRM
 

Communication programs to develop brands & build customer loyalty, methods of communicating with customers, planning retail communication process, retail branding.

Overview of retail CRM, collecting customer database, identifying target customers, developing and implementing CRM programs, use of technology in CRM.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:9
Retail supply chain management
 

Advantages of supply chain management, flow of information, logistics – distribution centre, quick response delivery systems, e-retailing, outsourcing, reverse logistics, case study in the Indian context

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:9
Introduction to retail analytics
 

Introduction to big data, Retail and Data Analytics, Perceptual mapping in retail branding, Market Basket Analysis, Trade Area Modeling, Retail Site Selection Modeling, Competitor Threat Analytics, Merchandise Mix Modeling, Conjoint and Cluster Analysis for product segmentation and positioning in retail stores

Text Books And Reference Books:

·         Levy, M., & Weitz, B. (nd). Retail Management (5th edi). Irwin/McGraw Hill.

·         Gilbert, D. (2008). Retail Marketing Management (2nd edi), Pearson Education.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

·     Cox, E. (2011). Retail analytics: the secret weapon (Vol. 45). John Wiley & Sons.

Dion, J., &Topping, T. (2007). Start & Run a Retail Business, Jaico Publishers.

Nair, S. (2011). Retail Management (4th edi), Himalaya Publishing House.

Pradhan, S. (2007). Retail Management Text & Cases (2nd edi), McGraw Hill Co.

Vedamani, G.G. (2003). Retail Management, Jaico Publishing House.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA IA - 10 Marks

CIA IB - 10 Marks

CIA II - 25 Marks

CIA III - 20 Marks

Attendance - 5 Marks

End semester exam - 30 Marks 

BBBHT541 A - SECURITY ANALYSIS AND PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Security Analysis and Portfolio Management is an introductory course in Investment. This course provides broad coverage of basic concepts of investments, various investment avenues in the domestic and global market. It also provides with specific attention to the returns and risk associated with investing in securities and in the portfolio in terms of risk-return analysis. The course also offers conceptual and practical insights into the valuation of securities and also fundamental and technical analysis. It also attempts to cover the portfolio construction, evaluation and revision.

Course Outcome

Demonstrate a basic understanding of the investment environment with the different investment avenues available

Evaluate the securities in terms of their risk and return

Perform fundamental and technical analysis for security analysis

Apply appropriate methods to value the securities 

Construct, evaluate and revise the optimum portfolio 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:5
FINANCIAL MEANING OF INVESTMENT
 

Significance of savings and investment - understanding of security, portfolio, speculation, gambling, and arbitrage mechanisms - Legal framework of securities market, Comparison between investment and speculation and its significance in Indian financial system - Profile of Indian investors and factors influencing investment decisions - Financial positions, tax positions, risk perception and attitude

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
INVESTMENT AVENUES & ATTRIBUTES
 

Investment options in India and foreign markets - characteristics features of financial instruments - company shares, debentures, bonds, convertible securities, hybrid securities, fixed deposits, Gilt- edged securities, post office schemes, company and public provident funds,  Gold, ETFs, Mutual Funds, Real estate, and Insurance schemes. Investment attributes - risk, return, security, marketability, liquidity and convenience.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
RISK AND RETURN
 

Analysis of risk & return, concept of total risk, factors contributing to total
risk, systematic and unsystematic risk, Capital allocation between risky & risk free assets, Risk measurement - Standard deviation – Meaning of Beta – Computation and interpretation – Use of beta in estimating returns, Covariance, Correlation Coefficient (Including simple problems)

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
SECURITY ANALYSIS: FUNDAMENTAL AND TECHNICAL
 

Fundamental analysis – company, industry and economy analysis - Technical Analysis of stock -points and figures chart, bar chart, Indicators and Oscillators - ROC, RSI, Volume of Trade, Support and Resistance Level, Exponential Moving Average Analysis, MACD, Japanese Candlesticks

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:5
SHARE VALUATION
 

Factors influencing valuation - methods of equity valuation - Earning Valuation model, DCF methodology, P/E ratio, Dividend model, Zero and constant growth models - Intrinsic value method. Calculation of present and forecasted price of the stock, Efficient Market theory     

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:5
INTRODUCTION TO BOND ANALYSIS
 

Types of bonds – Major factors in bond rating process – Bond returns – Holding period return – Concept of yield – Current yield – Yield-to-Maturity – Price-yield relationship

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:10
PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT
 

Introduction- Meaning, return on portfolio, risk on portfolio, portfolio managers, SEBI guidelines for portfolio managers, portfolio management services.

Portfolio Construction- Approaches, Determination of Objectives, Selection of Portfolio and Markowitz Efficient Frontier

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:7
PORTFOLIO EVALUATION AND REVISION
 

Portfolio theory - contribution of William Sharpe, Jensen and Harry Markowitz, Single index model, Capital Asset Pricing model, Arbitrage Pricing Theory, Capital Market Line and Security Market Line.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Punitavathi Pandian (2013), Security Analysis and Portfolio Management, New Delhi: Vikas Publications

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

S Kevin, Security Analysis and Portfolio Management, PHI

Evaluation Pattern

Component of Final Grade

Max Marks per Component

Weightage towards Final Grade

Total Marks per Component in Final Grade

CIA-I(15 + 5)

20

20%

20

CIA-II

25

25 %

25

CIA-III

20

20%

20

End Semester

30

30 %

30

Attendance

5

5 %

5

Total

100

 

100

BBBHT542A - GLOBAL BUSINESS FINANCE (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description:

The players in the foreign market are increasing in numbers with the presence of the much more liberalized policies and regulations. Students need to acquire knowledge on the functioning of trade globally and its financial implications. The course imparts knowledge of foreign exchange activities and the hedging of foreign exchange exposures and other related aspects of risk coverage while doing international business. 

Course Objectives:

1).To introduce students to the purpose and scope of multinational companies and the foreign exchange market.

2).To impart a sound blend of knowledge of foreign exchange economics, evolotuion of global exchange rate system.

3).To understand the causes of important financial crisis that took place in the history of various world economies.

4).To introduce the students to the methods of hedging foreign exchange exposures and other aspects of risk coverage that can be considered undertaking business internationally.

5).To impart knowledge on international corporate strategies in diversified international financial markets.

6).To provide an overview of functioning of international financial instituions and features of international finanacial instruments.

1.      

Course Outcome

1) Demonstrate an understanding of the objectives and scope of MNCs and the purpose of foreign exchange market.

2) Exhibit conceptual understanding of effects of economic variables on the foreign exchange and knowledge of the evolution of the global exchange rate system. 

3) Recognize the causes behind major financial crisis that took place in the different economies of the world.

4) Identify the methods of hedging risk in foreign exchange market.

5) Analyse and assess international corporate strategies in diversified financial markets.

6) Evaluate different global financial insturments and assess the functioning and pupose of recogninzed world financial instituions. 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:4
INTRODUCTION
 

Meaning, Features, Need, Internationalization of Financial Markets. The evolution of Multinational Corporation, Role and Functions of multinational financial manager, Issues and Challenges of Global Business Finance.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
INTERNATIONAL MONETARY SYSTEM
 

Evolution- Bimetallism, Classical Gold standard (1821-1914), Interwar period, Bretton woods system (1946-1971), the post Bretton woods (1971 – Present), IMF, The current exchange rate agreements, Fixed Versus Flexible Exchange Rate regime, European Monetary system, Emerging Market Currency Crisis- Mexican Peso Crisis (1994-1995), Asian Crisis (1997), Russian Crisis (1998), Brazilian Crisis (1998-1999The currency Crisis of September 1992.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:12
FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKETS
 

The structure of the FOREX markets, Functions of Foreign exchange markets, The foreign exchange rates, Quotations, Bid-ask spreads, Arbitrage, Covered Interest Rate Arbitrage, The Spot Rate, Cross Rates – Spot Market, Forward Market- Currency Derivatives. Parity Conditions- Purchasing Power Parity, Interest Parity Theory, International Fisher Effect.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:12
FOREIGN EXCHANGE RISK MANAGEMENT
 

Concepts- Measuring Foreign Exchange Exposure- Transaction Exposure, Translation Exposure and Economic Exposure in accordance with IAS 21. Managing Foreign Exchange Exposure- Forward Market Hedge, Money Market Edge, Exposure Netting, Exposure Matching, Lead and Lag Payments, Risk Shifting, Currency Risk Sharing, Currency Collars, Cross Hedging.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:12
INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION AND CAPITAL BUDGETING
 

Introduction, International Capital Budgeting, Incremental Cash flows, Issues in Foreign Investment Analysis- Estimation of cash flows – Adjustment of Repatriation of Revenues withholding Tax (Including Problems).

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:6
FOREIGN DIRECT INVESTMENT & CORPORATE STRATEGY
 

Foreign Direct Investment- Meaning, Importance, Theory of Multinational Corporation, Strategy of multinationals, Designing a global expansion strategy.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:6
INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS AND INSTRUMENTS
 

Basic Concepts: Meaning, Importance and Development. World Bank, International Monetary Fund, Asian Development Bank. Global Depository Receipts, American Depository Receipts, External Commercial Borrowings, Foreign Currency Convertible Bonds.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Shapiro Alan. C., Multinational Financial Management, Prentice Hall, New Delhi. (Text Book)

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Madhu Vij. C., International Financial Management, 3rd Edition, Excel Books.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Component

Description

Weightage

CIA I

Part A - Quiz. (MCQs).

Part B – Assignment Submission

20%

CIA II

Mid Semester Examination.

25%

CIA III

Assignment Submission

20%

End Semester Examination

Written Examination.

30%

Attendance

 

5%

 

Total

100%

BBBHT543 A - FINANCIAL MODELLING AND DERIVATIVES (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description: First part of the course consists application of Microsoft Excel for various financial calculations and building Integrated Financial Statements. In order to give hands on knowledge, this course includes Industry-relevant financial models like Mergers and Acquisitions (accretion/dilution), Project Financiering and Company valuation. Second part of the syllabus includes theory and application of Derivatives, course emphasize on understanding basic concepts of financial derivatives and application of derivatives instruments like Forward, Futures and Options in risk management aspects relating to stock trading.

Course Objectives: The objectives of this course is to;

  • Work on Excel and use of basic Microsoft Excel functions relevant to applications in finance.
  • Build integrated financial statements with real-time drivers and assumptions for various industries.
  • Perform Mergers and Acquisition deal analysis for deciding about the viability of the deal by constructing a model.
  • Measuring the fair value of equity of a company with real-time assumptions.
  • Pricing of forward, futures and options contracts using pricing models.
  • Applying different trading strategies related to options for maximizing the pay-off and to manage the risk.

Course Outcome

Course Learning Outcomes: On having completed this course student should be able to:

CLO 01 Apply financial data mining using basic Microsoft Excel functions like Pivot table, Sort, Vlookup, H lookup, Scenario Building, Goal seek and other relevant applications in Finance.

CLO 02 Apply different options trading strategies that are relevant for a speculator or trader for effective risk management.

CLO 03 Measure fair value of forwards, futures and options using different pricing models.

CLO 04 Construct integrated financial statements with real-time drivers and assumptions for various industries.

CLO 05 Create feasibility decision of Merger and Acquisition and can able to suggest the company.

CLO 06 Develop company valuation models under terminal value method to calculate fair value equity of a company with real-time assumptions.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:12
Excel Proficiency
 

Formatting of Excel Sheets, Data Filter and Sort , Charts and Graphs, Table formula and Scenario building, Goal seek, lookups, pivot tables, Macros, Recording of Macros, understanding Visual Basic Environment (VBE).

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
Valuation Modelling
 

Understanding Integrated Financial Models - Excel Efficiency Shortcuts and formulae - Cash and Interest Revolver - Building Historical Financial Statements - Ratio Analysis - Projecting Financial Statements.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:12
Mergers and Acquisitions (M&A) Modelling
 

Mergers and Acquisitions (M&A) Modelling

Building Merger Inputs - Stock and Cash Mix Deal - Contribution Analysis - Accretion and Dilution -

Project Finance Modelling

Why Project evaluation; stage of project; construction & development phase; funding  during investment phase; costs during investment phase; life of project; decision making, cash flow waterfall & resolve circular reference problem in interest during construction; Understanding Date functions, Modelling Cash flow waterfall, Delays in Projects

Equity Research Modelling

Prepare an Income Statement, Balance sheet, Cash Flow Statement, Geographic Revenue Sheet, Segment Revenue Sheet, Cost Statement, Debt Sheet, Analyze Revenue Drivers. Forecast Geographic Revenues, Segment Revenues, Geographic Revenues, Cost Statement, Debt, Income Statement, Balance Sheet, and Cash Flow Statement. Performa Adjustments, Income Statement - Compute Margins, Balance Sheet -Compute Ratios. Cash Flow Statement Projection, Valuation- Discounted Cash Flow Method (DCF), Valuation – Relative Valuation (Football Field Chart), Valuation – Assumptions for Valuation Model, Prepare Valuation Model and Prepare Presentation Sheet.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
Introduction to Derivatives
 

Derivatives defined - factors driving the growth of derivatives - derivative products -participants in the derivatives markets - economic function of the derivative market - exchange-traded vs. OTC derivatives markets - NSE'S derivatives market - participants and functions - trading mechanism – turnover.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:8
Futures and Options
 

Meaning - types of Futures – Index and stock futures - Forward contracts -Limitations of forward markets - Distinction between futures and forwards contracts - Options – Meaning – Types – European and American Options - Put and Call Options - Option terminology - Distinction between Futures and options.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:14
Application of Futures and Options
 

Applications of futures and options  - trading underlying versus trading single stock futures - futures payoffs  payoff for buyer of futures: long futures - payoff for seller of futures: short futures  - pricing futures - pricing equity index futures  - pricing index futures given expected dividend amount  - pricing index futures given expected dividend yield - pricing stock futures - pricing stock futures when no dividend expected - pricing stock futures when dividends are expected - application of future s - hedging: long security, sell futures - speculation: bullish security, buy futures - speculation: bearish security, sell futures - arbitrage: overpriced futures: buy spot, sell futures - arbitrage: underpriced futures: buy futures, sell spot -  options payoffs - payoff profile of buyer of asset: long asset  -  payoff profile for seller of asset: short asset -  payoff profile for buyer of call options: long call - payoff profile for writer of call options: short call - payoff profile for buyer of put options: long put. Payoff profile for writer of put options: Short put.

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.      Alstair L Day, Mastering Financial Modelling in Excel – (Pearson Publications)

2.      Robert A. Jarrow and Arkadev Chatterjea (2016, Indian Edition), An Introduction to Derivative Securities, Financial Markets, and Risk Management, Viva Books.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.      Simon Benninga , Financial Modelling.

2.      Jayanth Rama Varma (2011). Derivatives and Risk management. New Delhi. Tata Mc Graw Hill

3.      Hull, John C., “Options, Futures and Other Derivatives”, 6th edition, Prentice Hall India.

4.      S.L.Gupta (2011) Financial Derivatives – Theory, Concepts and Problems. New Delhi. Prenctice hall publications.

5.      “Futures and Options” Mumbai, BSE Book's Publication.

6.      Avadhani, V.K., “Security Analysis and Portfolio Management” 7th edition, Himalaya Publication.

Mahajan R., (2011), “Futures & Options - Introduction to Equity Derivatives”, Vision Books

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1 = 20 Marks

CIA 2 = 25 Marks

CIA 3 = 20 Marks

End semester exam = 30 Marks

Attendance = 5 Marks 

BBBHT581 - INTERNSHIP (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:50
Credits:2

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

To Understand functioning of an organisation.

Course Outcome

Students get to learn the intricasis of an organisation on a day to day basis for a period of 45 Days.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:5
Introduction
 

Introduction to specific sector of their Internship.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
Company Profile
 

A detail description of the organisation and its structure.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
Learning experience
 

SWOT Analysis

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:10
Findings and observations
 

Students prepare findings and observations based on their log book.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:10
Suggestions and Conclusion
 

Summery of suggestions provided and conclusion to the report.

Text Books And Reference Books:

APA

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

APA

Evaluation Pattern

Viva Voce RExams & Report Valuation

BSDBS512 - SELF ENHANCEMENT SKILLS 1 (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description and Course Objectives
 

·         To educate students about the upcoming trends in domain-specific areas.

·         To develop insights and provide practical solutions in solving business issues

  • To enable the recipients to develop and demonstrate the skills needed to be effectively employed.

Course Outcome

  •  A thorough understanding of the contemporary issues in the field of human resources/marketing/finance/international business/Entrepreneurship Development.

·         Ability to apply specific skills needed to make proactive and creative response to management challenges.

·         Ability to implement the best practices in various domain specific areas.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:30
Modules under HR/Finance/Marketing/ED/IB
 

Human resource

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION                                                                                     6 Hours

 

Self-Enhancing Skills – Aligning to our current and future needs - Preparing for placements or higher studies - Becoming aware of the kinds of jobs to apply (courses to study) - Resume building - Self-branding

 

UNIT 2 APTITUDE TESTS                                                                                   6 Hours

 

Aptitude tests – Quantitative and Verbal; Aptitude tests – Psychometric Assessment - Group Discussion

 

UNIT 3 TECHNICAL INTERVIEWS                                                                  6 Hours

 

Technical interviews -HR interviews - Converting projects and dissertations into Pre-Placement offers

 

UNIT 4 MANAGING  THE FIRST JOB                                                                8 Hours

 

What to expect in the job during the first few months - HR domain knowledge – latest trends – how to keep ourselves updated - HR Forums, Journals and Magazines, online HR sites…

 

UNIT 5 NETWORKING SKILLS                                                                           4 Hours

Networking skills – HR Associations – memberships – utilising them to our advantage; Certificate courses and updating the knowledge and skill-sets forever

 

Marketing

UNIT: 01  WHAT MAKES IDEAS STICKY? & HOW SOCIAL INFLUENCE SHAPES BEHAVIOUR 15 Hours

 What makes products, ideas, and behaviors contagious; in other words, why they catch on. You'll explore the science behind why some things become popular while others fail. You'll also discover the key principles, or six SUCCESs” factors that make messages stick.Social influence shapes everything people do: from the products we buy and candidates we vote for to the food we like and careers we pursue. You’ll learn how people use others to help them make choices and how companies leverage this power to shape the products and services we use. You'll discover when people are more likely to conform or do the same thing as others, and when they are more likely to diverge or do something different.

 UNIT: 02  THE POWER OF WORD OF MOUTH & SOCIAL NETWORKS         15 Hours

 Why word of mouth, or person to person communication, is 10 times as effective as traditional advertising. Further, discover why some products or ideas get talked about more than others. Why some online content goes viral or some things get more buzz. Six key STEPPS that drive people to share, and how by understanding those drivers, you can make anything more contagious.

What social networks are, and how they shape the spread of information and influence. How the patterns of social ties between people determine what we do, and what catches on. How people we’ve never even met can influence our tastes and preferences. How strong and weak ties help get people jobs, and whether to concentrate or spread out marketing resources when launching a new product.

 

Finance

UNIT: 01  TIME VALUE OF MONEY AND CAPITAL BUDGETING IN MS EXCEL 10 Hours

 Introduction to Finance function in Ms Excel – Time Value of money –Application of MS Excel in computing of free cash flow - Capital budgeting (NPV and IRR) using MS Excel

 UNIT: 02  VALUATION USING MS EXCEL                                                              10 Hours

  Valuation - Valuation of shares using MS Excel – Estimates for Valuation using MS Excel – Valuing a business

 UNIT: 03 ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE AND SECURITY ANALYSIS                                                                                                                            10 Hours

 Analysis of Financial Performance and Security AnalysisCompany analysis andRatio analysis using MS Excel – Technical analysis

   

Entrepreneurship Development     

UNIT: 01 AGILE LEADERSHIP                                                                                     15 Hours

Introduction- Being an Agile Leader- Agile ways of working-Building an agile business- Agile in practice                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 

 UNIT: 02  TRENDS IN AGILE DEVELOPMENT                                                                   8 Hours

 Agile decision making ,Agility and the digital society

 UNIT: 03 THE NEW AGE OF AGILE CULTURE                                                     7 Hours 

Agile culture beyond software and digital enterprises        

Text Books And Reference Books:

NA

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

NA

Evaluation Pattern

 Each module is assigned 20 marks. each skill will have atleast 5 modules designed.

BBBH631 - GOODS AND SERVICES TAX AND CUSTOMS DUTY (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

The paper is intended to provide students the knowledge of the largest paradigm shift in Indirect Tax regime- the “Goods and Services Act”- which came into force under the principle of One Nation- One Tax and One Market. The course includes the structure of GST Act- procedure for registration- chargeability of GST on supply of Good and Services - procedure to claim ITC- reverse charge mechanism- payment of GST- returns and assessment and GST network. It also covers an overview of Customs Act provisions with Baggage Rules

 

 

Course Objectives:

 

· To identify the steps and documents essential for Voluntary or Compulsory registration under GST

· To find out the time, place and value of supply of goods and services as per GST provisions

· To know the eligibility and procedure to avail input tax credit

· To understand the importance and procedure to file GST returns

. To know the Customs Act regulations along with Baggage rules

Course Outcome

· Indentify the event of chargeability, date,time and value of supply of goods and service

· Match tax paid on inwards supply and tax collected on outward supply and computation of GST payable

· File GST returns as per the provisions and time line under GST

· Compute Assessable value and Customs payable as per Customs act

. Distinguishes General Free allowance and Prohibited goods with the help of Baggage Rules

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
Introduction and Concept of GST
 

 

Introduction To Taxation-Direct And Indirect Tax, Income Tax Act 1961, Income Tax Rules 1962, Finance Act, Scheme of IT An Over-View Basic Concepts- Assessee, Person, Assessment Year, Previous Year, Agricultural Income, Income, GTI, Total Income, Average Rate Of Tax Capital And Revenue

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:5
Registration Under GST
 

Significance of GST Registration – Liable for Registration – Compulsory Registration – Procedure- Registration Certificate – GSTIN

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:12
Supply of Goods and Services: Place and Time
 

Taxable Under GST –Goods-Services-Significance of Consideration-Schedule I (Activities to be treated as supply even if made without consideration), Schedule II (Activities to be treated as supply of Goods or services) and Schedule III (Negative list)- Place of Supply to a Register and Unregistered Person – Time of Supply – Issue of Invoice- Composition Scheme – Advance Receipt - Reverse Charge Mechanism

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
Value of Taxable Supply
 

 

Importance – Transaction Value- Consideration not in Money – Related Party or distinct party- Agent-Valuation Based on Cost-Residual Method-Supply of Foreign Currency-Second Hand goods-Lottery, Betting, Gambling and Horse Racing

 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:10
Input Tax Credit and GST Liability
 

 

Provisions-Conditions-Utilization of CGST, SGST, UTGST and IGST-Capital Goods - Matching and Reversal of input tax credit. Computation of GST liability

 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:5
Tax Invoice and GST Returns
 

 

Meaning- Importance- Time of Issue – Contents –HSN-Bill of Supply- Receipt and Payment Voucher- Transportation of Goods without Invoice- Credit and Debit Notes- Different GST Returns – Calendar for GST Returns-Electronic Liability Ledger-Electronic Credit Ledger-Electronic Cash Ledger-Interest and Penalty – Chargeable- E Way Bill - GSP

 

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:12
Customs Duty and Baggage
 

 

Introduction – Definitions-Statutory Provisions- Dutiable Goods-Home Consumption- Warehouse Goods-Abatement- Types: Basic Custom Duty, IGST, Protective Duties, Safeguard Duties, Anti Dumping Duties – Valuation Under Custom – Transaction Value – Identical Goods – Similar Goods – Deductive Value – Computed Value – Assessable Value as per under section 14 of the Customs Act, 1962- Baggage – meaning – Prohibitions- Rules – Jewellery, Unaccompanied Baggage –General Free Allowance (GFA)

 

Text Books And Reference Books:

 

1.      Singhania and Singhania “Students guide to Income tax including GST”, Taxmann Publication

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Mehrotra H.C and Agarwal  V.P “Good and Services Tax”, Sahitya Bhawan Publications

Harshad.C.Chowdhry. (2019). Central Excise & Customs. Ashoda Publications.

V.Balachandran. (2019). Indirect Taxes. New Delhi: Sultan Chand Sons

Evaluation Pattern

 

       End Semester Exam (ESE)

30%

Mid Semester Exam (CIA-II)

25%

Continuous Internal Assessments (CIA- I & III)

40%

Attendance

05%

Total

100%

 

 

 

BBBH632 - PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

World class performance in the delivery of high quality, cost competitive products and services is essential to survive in today’s global economy. In view of the increasing importance of production and operations management it is essential that budding mangers are introduced to strategic decision making, design, planning and control in the production of goods and services. This course aims to acquaint students with sound conceptual knowledge of the subject by adopting a practical approach to address various topics related to production management.

 Course Objectives:

· To give students an overview of various functions of Production management.

· To provide insights on how these theoretical concepts are applied in the business.

· To help budding entrepreneurs in the field of manufacturing by highlighting various issues they have to tackle for effective and smooth operations.

Course Outcome

· Students will get to know about the basic activities which a production department will take care.

· Students will get to know the latest trends in production management.

· Irrespective of the specialization they choose, students will be able to appreciate the role Production management plays for a manufacturing organization’s success.

· Entrepreneurs in the field of manufacturing will get to know about the production issues they will have to tackle.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS
 

Historical evolution of production and operations management, concept of production, production system, classification of production system, production management, objectives of production management, concept of operations, distinction between manufacturing operations and service operations, operations management, interlink between production, operations and other departments.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:7
PLANT LOCATION AND LAYOUT
 

Need for selecting a suitable location, factors influencing plant location/facility location, location theories, methods of location evaluation, plant layout - objectives and principles, classification of layout, design of layouts, service layout, organization of physical facilities.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
MATERIALS MANAGEMENT AND HANDLING
 

Scope and functions of materials management, material planning and control, purchasing, stores management, inventory control or management, standardization, simplification, just-in-time (JIT) manufacturing.

Objectives of Material Handling, Principles of Material Handling, Selection of Material Handling Equipments, Automated Guided Vehicles, Evaluation of Material Handling System, Material Handing Equipments, Guidelines for Effective Utilization of Material Handling Equipments, Relationship between Plant Layout and Material Handling.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:9
PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL
 

Need for production planning and control, objectives of production planning and control, components and phases of production planning and control, functions of production planning and control, operations planning and scheduling systems, aggregate planning, master production schedule (MPS), material requirement planning (MRP 1 and 2), lot-sizing techniques, capacity planning, routing, scheduling, bill of materials.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:7
QUALITY CONTROL TECHNIQUES
 

Introduction to quality, fundamental factors affecting quality, control, need for controlling quality inspection, types of quality control, steps in quality control, objectives of quality control, benefits of quality control, seven tools for quality control, causes of variation in quality, statistical process and quality control, control charts, quality circles, process capability, OC curves,  total quality management, ISO 9000 series.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:7
WORK, TIME AND MOTION STUDY
 

Introduction, productivity, work study, method study - objectives, scope, steps, motion study, time study, work measurement, tools used, benefits of work study.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:7
MAINTENANCE AND WASTE MANAGEMENT
 

Introduction, objectives, types, maintenance planning and scheduling, Modern Scientific Maintenance Methods - Six Sigma Maintenance, Enterprise Asset Management (EAM), Computer Aided Maintenance, Total Productive Maintenance (TPM), Lean Maintenance.

Introduction to waste management, regulations related to waste management, types of waste in production houses, reasons for generation and accumulation of obsolete, surplus and scrap items, identification and control of waste, disposal of scrap.

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:7
AUTOMATION AND MODERN MANUFACTURING
 

Introduction, Types of Automation, Computer Integrated Manufacturing, Reasons for Automation, Advantages of Automation, and Disadvantages of Automation, Automation Strategies, Automated Flow Lines, Assembly line balancing, Virtual Manufacturing, Additive manufacturing, 3D printing, managing technology and cost in modern production.

Text Books And Reference Books:

· Aswathappa, Sudarsana Reddy, Krishna Reddy, (2009) Production and Operations Management, Himalaya Publishers

· Kumar, S. A., & Suresh, N. (2006). Production and operations management. New Age International.

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

· Buffa Elwood S. and Sarin Rakesh K, (1987), Modern Production/Operations Management, John Wiley & Sons Publications.

· Gaither, N & Frazier, (2002), Production & Operations Management, Thomson Learning Publications.

· Stevenson WJ, (1998), Production and Operations Management, Irwin McGraw Hill Publications.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1 -  20 Marks

CIA 2 - Mid semester exam - 25 Marks

CIA 3 -  20 Marks

End semester exam - 30 Marks

Attendance - 5 Marks

BBBH633 - BUSINESS LAW (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description:

The course focuses on various aspects of Business Laws in the current scenario and covers important components of Business Laws such as, Contract Law, Intellectual Property Law, Consumer Protection Law, Competition Law and Law of Sale of Goods. With the complexities of Business Operations rising every day, basic understanding of the legalities involved in handling business is of paramount importance. This course tries to introduce to the student the legalities of Business through multiple perspectives.

 

Course Objectives:

To familiarise the students with the dynamics involved in conducting business vis a vis law.

Course Outcome

Course Learning Outcomes:On having completed this course student should be able to:

CLO1   To familiarize the students with the legal scenario of doing business in India

CLO2   To provide an understanding of various laws in India to manage the business efficiently.

CLO3   To develop an understanding about the best business practices.

CLO4  To orient the students with the knowledge on legalities of Business through multiple

            perspectives

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:2
Introduction
 

Meaning and Scope of Business Law – Sources of Indian Business Law.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:16
Law of Contracts
 

[Indian Contracts Act of 1872]: Definition – types of contracts- Government Contracts: Art. 299 Requirements Under Constitution, Scope and Extent of Art. 299, 'Equity, Fairness and reasonableness, Doctrine of Promissory Estoppel V/s. Executive Necessity, No person liability. E-Contracts: Meaning & need for Digital Goods, Unfair terms in E-contract, Information technology Act and E-Contract.Indian Evidence Act–essentials – offer, acceptance, consideration, capacity of parties, free consent, legality of object and consideration, various modes of discharge of a contract, remedies for breach of contract.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:5
Contract of Guarantee
 

Distinction between Indemnity and GuaranteeKinds of GuaranteeRights of Surety, Liability of Surety, and Discharge of Surety.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:10
Intellectual Property Laws
 

Meaning and scope of intellectual properties – Patent Act of 1970 and its amendments as per WTO agreement, back ground, objects, definition, inventions, patentee, true and first inventor, procedure for grant of process and product patents, WTO rules as to patents, rights to patentee – infringement – remedies. The Copy Rights Act, Meaning – Its uses and rights.The Trade Marks Act, its meaning, registration, procedures – infringement – Authorities concerned –Remedies.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:7
Competition Law
 

Concept of Competition, Development of Competition Law, overview of MRTP Act 2002, Anticompetitive Agreements, Abuse of dominant position, combination, regulation of combinations, Competition Commission of India; Appearance before Commission, Compliance of Competition Law. Competition Law 2003: Meaning and scope, salient features, offences and penalties under the Act.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:7
The Sale of Goods Act 1930
 

Definition of goods, Sale and Agreement to Sell, Conditions and Warranties, Rights &Liabilities of a Buyer & Seller, Rights of an Unpaid Seller.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:7
Law of Consumer Protection
 

Consumer Protection Act 1986:Back ground – definitions – consumer, consumer dispute, Complaint Procedure, defect, deficiency, and service, Remedies, Consumer Protection Council, Consumer Redressal Agencies, District Forum, State Commission and National Commission.

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:6
Cyber Laws
 

Information Technology Act, 2000: Objectives, definitions and salient features, provisions pertaining to piracy and related offences and personalities.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Gulshan, S.S. (2013). Business & Corporate Law, Excel Books, New Delhi

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Anson, W. R. (2009). Law of contract (29th edition), Oxford University Press, Oxford, New Delhi.

Avtar, S. (2011). Principles of Mercantile Law (9th Edition), Eastern Book Company, New Delhi.

Kapoor, N.D (2012.). Elements of Mercantile Law, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi.

Padmanabhan, A. (2012. Intellectual property rights: Infringement and remedies, LexisNexis Butterworth’s, Nagpur.

 

Tulsian, P.C. (2013). Business Laws, 5thEdition),Tata-McGraw Hill Education Limited, New Delhi

Evaluation Pattern

 

 

 

 

End Semester Exam (ESE)

30%

Mid Semester Exam (CIA-II)

25%

Continuous Internal Assessments (CIA- I & III)

40%

Attendance

05%

Total

100%

BBBHE641D - INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:50
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This is a cross-functional elective course offered in the Sixthsemester to students . Students learn various aspects of Intellectual Property Rights in terms of concepts, types, relevance, applications,  opportunities and challenges. 

Course Objectives

To enable students to apply relevant theories and concepts to various aspects of Intellectual Property Rights

To help the students be comfortable in application of IPR in various Entrepreneurial initiative. 

Course Outcome

Identify the role and importance of IPRs.

Demonstrate the meaning and provisions of Product and Process Patents.

Interpret the role and nature of Copyrights.

Examine the importance of Trademarks Registration for a Entrepreneurial Initiative.

Assess the reasons for the success or/and failure of Plant varieties as IP protection.

Explore the evolution of Industrial Designs for Innovation Management of MNEs.

Delve into role of GIs in understanding inclusive economic growth. 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
Overview of Intellectual Property
 

Introduction and the need for intellectual property right (IPR) - Kinds of Intellectual Property Rights: Patent, Copyright, Trade Mark, Design, Geographical Indication, Plant Varieties and Layout Design – Genetic Resources and Traditional Knowledge – Trade Secret - IPR in India : Genesis and development – IPR in abroad 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
Patents
 

Patents - Elements of Patentability: Novelty , Non Obviousness (Inventive Steps), Industrial Application - Non - Patentable Subject Matter - Registration Procedure, Rights and Duties of Patentee, Assignment and licence , Restoration of lapsed Patents, Surrender and Revocation of Patents, Infringement, Remedies & Penalties - Patent office and Appellate Board

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
Copyrights
 

Nature of Copyright - Subject matter of copyright: original literary, dramatic, musical, artistic works; cinematograph films and sound recordings - Registration Procedure, Term of protection, Ownership of copyright, Assignment and licence of copyright - Infringement, Remedies & Penalties – Related Rights - Distinction between related rights and copyrights

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:9
Trademarks
 

Concept of Trademarks - Different kinds of marks (brand names, logos, signatures, symbols, well known marks, certification marks and service marks) - Non Registrable Trademarks - Registration of Trademarks - Rights of holder and assignment and licensing of marks - Infringement, Remedies & Penalties - Trademarks registry and appellate board

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:9
Plant varieties
 

Plant breeders' rights (PBR), also known as plant variety rights (PVR), are rights granted to the breeder of a new variety of plant that give the breeder exclusive control over the propagating material (including seed, cuttings, divisions, tissue culture) and harvested material (cut flowers, fruit, foliage) of a new variety for a number of years.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:8
Designs
 

Industrial Designs – Subject matter of Design – Exclusion of Designs – Novelty and originality – Rights in Industrial Designs: Nature, Acquisition and duration of rights.

 

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:8
Geographical Indication (GI)
 

Geographical indication: Meaning, difference between GI and trademarks - Procedure for registration, effect of registration and term of protection

 

Text Books And Reference Books:

Nithyananda, K V. (2019). Intellectual Property Rights: Protection and Management. India, IN: Cengage Learning India Private Limited.

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Cornish, William Intellectual Property: Patents, Copyright, Trademarks and allied rights, (2010) 7 th ed.,

Neeraj, P., & Khusdeep, D. (2014). Intellectual Property Rights. India, IN: PHI learning Private Limited.

Loganathan, E.T. “IPR” (IPRS), TPIPS Agreement and Indian Laws.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 01 : 20 Marks

CIA 02 : 25 Marks (Mid Semester Exam)

CIA 03 : 20 Marks

End Semester Exam: 30 Marks

Attendance: 05 Marks

BBBHE642D - PROJECT FINANCING AND INSTITUTIONAL MECHANISM FOR START UPS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Entrepreneurial Finance provides the know-how for building a strong foundation for business endevours. It further deals with various sources of funding  and Govt. initiatives in India. Entrepreneurial Finance explores opportunities for exercising financial control of your enterprise and mechanisms to avail funding.

Course Objective

 

1.      To give students information of funding sources.

 

2.      To enable them understand how to tap proper channels for funding.

 

3.      To create an understanding on opportunities for women and minorities under Govt. schemes.

 

Course Outcome

Demonstrate awareness about the fundamentals of  financing Start Ups

Analyse various funding mechanism.

Develop and manage venture lifecycle.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
INTRODUCTION TO STARTUP FINANCE
 

Introduction, Entrepreneurial Finance- Meaning and definition, role/Importance of entrepreneurial finance, Principles of entrepreneurial finance, Venture life cycle-Financing in Venture life cycle-Seed Financing, Start-up financing, First-round financing, Liquidity stage financing, Seasoned Financing. Sources of Entrepreneurial Finance. Stages in venture life cycle and entrepreneurial process activities which happen in each stage,characteristics and traits of a successful entrepreneur.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
VENTURE CAPITAL
 

Introduction, meaning of venture capital, Feature of venture capital, Advantages and Disadvantages, Top 25 venture firms in India, venture capital funding in India, SEBI Venture capital funds regulation 1999, Registration of VC Funds, eligibility criteria, consideration of application, placement memorandum and investment conditions, stages and risk of financing, Finding a VC and angel investors, Angel investors.  Features, advantages and disadvantages of Angel Investors, Venture capital Vs. Angel investor

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
MICROFINANCE
 

Micro finance: Introduction, History, Meaning, Importance – features-role of Micro finance in Poverty Reduction. Meaning & Definition of Micro Credit –Micro Finance components -Models of microfinance in India ,Channels

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
MICRO FINANCE INSTITUTIONS
 

 

Micro Finance Institution pros & cons of MFI‘s, Types of Rural Credit, Short term, medium  and long term credit ,sources of rural credit-institutional and non-institutional sources-procedure for Microfinance Company Registration in India, Sustainable  Development-meaning, MDG’s and SDG’S.

 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:8
CROWDFUNDING
 

Introduction, Meaning- Features of a crowd funding site, crowd funding partners, Advantages and disadvantages, Types of crowd funding- Equity-based, Donation-based, Lending-based and Reward-based merits and demerits.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:10
CROWDFUNDING IN INDIA
 

Crowd funding websites in India, SEBI Guidelines for crowd funding in India, crowd funding scenario in India, How to crowdfund your project, drivers, Key points involved in crowd funding, challenges of crowd funding in India.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:10
INSTITUTIONAL FINANCING
 

Financial Institutions-meaning and definition, functions of financial institutions, types of financial institutions in detail, NBFC’s vs bank, NABARD, IDBI, SIDBI, SFC,ICICI-Meaning, functions and other important details of each institutions, commercial bank -meaning, functions of commercial bank, cooperative bank -meaning and functions, difference between commercial bank and cooperative bank, Institutions supporting women Entrepreneurs-AWAKE, CWEI, WIT and FIWE.

Text Books And Reference Books:

·         

1.      Rogers,S. (2014). Entrepreneurial Finance and Business Strategies for the Serious Entrepreneur,McGraw-Hill Professional

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.      Metrik, A.&Yesuda, A.(2007).Venture capital and the finance of innovation(2ed.) ,Wiley.

2.      Mistra, S.K.&Puri, V.K. (2008). Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing House.

3.      Dingra, I.C. (1997). Rural Banking in India, S.Chand& Co. Limited.

Karmakar, K.G. (2008).Microfinance in India, Sage Publishers.

Evaluation Pattern

End Semester Exam (ESE)

30%

Mid Semester Exam (CIA-II)

25%

Continuous Internal Assessments (CIA- I & III)

40%

Attendance

05%

Total

100%

BBBHE643D - PROJECT ASSESSMENT AND BUSINESS PLAN (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:50
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Entrepreneurship is about managing risk than taking risk, Project analysis is process of evaluating the opportunities on multiple aspects so as to ensure optimum success of the venture. The idea is tested to assess market risks, operational risks, perceived value and benefit and financial risks and then a detailed plan is developed. The course covers topics Opportunity assessment, Strategic choices, Legal aspects, Business Plan formulation and pitching the idea for funding

Course Objectives:

·         To impart an understanding on modalities for assessing an idea/opportunity.

·         To understand the process of risk mitigation in ventures .

·         To enable an understanding on developing sustainable and profitable ways of managing a venture.

To develop skills for writing a business plan

Course Outcome

Demonstrate the understanding of how to develop a business plan 

Demonstrate an understanding of minimising risks.

Analyse and raise funds 

Create real time business pitch

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
OPPORTUNITY ASSESSMENT
 

Opportunity Identification and Selection, Environmental dynamics and changes, Business Opportunities in emerging environment, challenges of new venture start ups, Pit falls in selecting new ventures, Critical factors for new venture development

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
LEGAL FRAME WORK AND OWNERSHIP
 

Ownership patterns, Selection of an appropriate legal ownership pattern - Sole Proprietorships, Partnerships, Limited Liability Partnership, Franchising, Companies, Companies under section 25-NPOs, Trust, SHGs.  legal compliance

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
RISK ANALYSIS IN CAPITAL BUDGETING
 

Techniques of risk analysis in Capital Budgeting-Introduction, risk and uncertainty, sources of risk, reasons for adjustment of risk in capital budgeting decisions, techniques of risk analysis in capital budgeting-Statistical techniques(Probability, variance and standard deviation and coefficient of variation-theory and problems),Conventional techniques(Risk adjusted discount rate, certainty equivalents-theory and problems), sensitivity analysis, scenario analysis, simulation, break even analysis and decision tree analysis-theory and problems

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS
 

Manufacturing process/technology, technical arrangements, material inputs and utilities, product mix, plant capacity, location and site, machineries and equipments, structures and civil works, environmental aspects, project charts and layout, schedule of project implementation and need for considering alternatives

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:10
NETWORK TECHNIQUES FOR PROJECT MANAGEMENT
 

Introduction, PERT and CPM an overview, applications of PERT and CPM techniques, phases of project management-planning, scheduling and controlling, components of Pert and cpm network-activities.

 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:8
BUSINESS PLAN
 

Business plan - Meaning, Significance, Contents – Executive summary-General information about the company- Opportunity - industry and Market description, Strategy-Business model, Team-Marketing plan, Operational plan, financial plan-Appendix. Business plan-formulation and presentation of Business Plan

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:8
MAKING THE BUSINESS PITCH
 

Business Pitch – meaning, objectives, Difference between a business pitch and presentation, Types essentials of startup pitch – oral, written

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.      Raichaudhuri,A. (2010). Managing New Ventures – Concepts and Cases on Entrepreneurship, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd

2.      Zimmerer , Norman,T.W.,Scarboraugh,M. (2008). Essentials of Entrepreneurship and Small Business Management, PHI

3.      

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Jeffry,A.,Timmons & Spinelli,S. (2009). New Venture Creation, Entrepreneurship for the 21st Century, Tata McGraw Hill.

4.      Mullin J.(2009),The New Business Road test, Pearson education,2ed

 

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 01 : 20 Marks

CIA 02 : 25 Marks (Mid Semester Exam)

CIA 03 : 20 Marks

End Semester Exam: 30 Marks

Attendance: 05 Marks

BBBHH641C - INTERNATIONAL HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description:

The subject International Human Resource Management is an elective paper which contains basic theoretical knowledge about the enduring concepts in IHRM, Internationalization of HRM, sustaining international operations through assignments and managing recruitment, staffing, training and development, compensation management. It also focuses on the expatriate’s entry and reentry problems. IHRM focuses on the ethical practices of a business enterprise across the world.

Course Outcome

Course Learning Outcomes: On having completed this course student should be able to:

CLO1 : Students will be equipped with the basic theoretical knowledge about IHRM

CLO2 Students will be able to liaison with HR departments for roles that demand international

HRM knowledge

CLO3 Will be change leaders in IHRM operations

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:7
Introduction
 

Definition and Meaning of entrepreneur, Evolution, myths, Approaches to entrepreneurship Functions of an Entrepreneur, Types of Entrepreneur, Intrapreneur, Entrepreneurial Culture; Stages in entrepreneurial process. Ethical and social responsibility challenges for entrepreneurs. Social entrepreneurship, Woman Entrepreneurship.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
Creativity & Innovation
 

Creativity, Process, Techniques, Innovation,techniques of innovation Management,Creative approaches, Systemic and analytical methods of innovation management, Intellectual Property rights

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:7
Entrepreneurship competency
 

 

Entrepreneurial competency, individual competency, advantages of competency based approach; identification of entrepreneurial competency, Developing competency, manifests needs theory, entrepreneurial behavior, Analyzing ECs, Assessing ECs.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:10
Initiating Entrepreneurial ventures
 

Assessment and evaluation of entrepreneurial opportunities, challenges of service venture, and factors for new ventures development, pitfalls and failures – case studies (tourism Industry), Ownership patterns in India, Legal issues related to emerging ventures – Registrations, Licenses, Fees and Permits with regard to tourism industry

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:8
Entrepreneurship Financing
 

Basic Concepts- Meaning, Need, Importance, Sources of Financing- Personal Investment- Venture capital –approaching venture capitalist - Angel Investor- Business Incubators- Government Grants and Subsidies- Bank Loans- Crowd Fund- Meaning, Process, Importance.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:6
Institutional Support System
 

Small industry financing developing countries, Overview of financial institutions in India, Central level and state level institutions,  DIC , NABARD , SIDBI, , IDBI, SIDCO, Indian Institute of Entrepreneurship, , Single Window, Industrial Policy of Government of India ,Government of India Initiatives under Make In India.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:10
Tourism business plan
 

Developing a Business Plan - Conducting Initial Market Research, Developing Goals and Objectives, Developing an Organizational Form and Human Resource Plan, Developing a Project Schedule, Developing an Operations Plan, Developing a Marketing Plan, Developing a Green Plan, Developing a Financial Plan, Risk Analysis , Assessment of Project’s Viability, Case studies

 

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:4
Project report on a new venture
 

 

Feasibility report of a new venture

Unit-9
Teaching Hours:8
 
Equal Opportunity and Diversity Management in the Global Context

 

Introduction, equal opportunities, diversity management, work life balance of international assignees. 

Unit-10
Teaching Hours:2
 
Equal Opportunity and Diversity Management in the Global Context

 

Introduction, equal opportunities, diversity management, work life balance of international assignees. 

Text Books And Reference Books:
 

Anne-Wil Harzing&Ashly Pinnington (2016) International Human Resource Management. SAGE 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1. Hilary, & Harris. (2012). Interantional HRM. VMP Publications.

2. Daniel Wintersberger.(2017) International Human Resource Management. Kogan page

3. Jane, B., & Punnet. (2010). Internationational Perspective on Organization Behaviour and HRM. New Delhi: Excell Books.

4. Monir, & Tayeb, H. International Human Resource Management. Oxford Publication.

5. Senguta, N., & Bhatacharya, M. S. (2009). International HRM. Delhi: Excell Books

Evaluation Pattern
 

Assessment Component

Description

Weightage

CIA I

Part A Moodle-based quiz. (MCQs)

Part B Identify travel components based on travel motivations

05%

15%

CIA II

Mid Semester written examination conducted for 2 hours duration. Unit 1,2,3 (Topic covered up to car rental companies)

25%

CIA III

Poster submission and Presentation

20%

End Semester Examination

Written examination conducted for 2 hours duration. 

30%

Attendance

 

5%

Total

 

100%

BBBHH642C - ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Organization Development as an area of study has been going through multitude of changes with respect to environmental changes and socio-cultural norms of the environment. Today, OD Interventions are highly customized as per the specific requirements of the organization and it calls for special expertise, not just to manage the organization but also enables the interface between people and organization. The subject aims at providing the conceptual frame work on the relevant issues related to OD.The subject also focuses on developing the critical interpersonal skills needed to manage in a changing world, where the individuals will be actively be participating in individual and team based exercises. This subject provides both conceptual and experiential approaches to the study of OD.

Course Outcome

 

  • To enable the student to understand that there are many multiple views of organizations that influence organizational change
  • To learn various group processes and intervention
  •   To gain knowledge about the history of organizational development.
  • To understand the career options available related to OD
  • To understand the various approaches and interventions adopted by the organization
  • To enable the students to understand how diagnostic process works.
  • To undertake various experiential exercises related to OD interventions.

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
Introduction to OD
 

 

Concept- Characteristics- Evolution of OD - OD and Organization Culture A model for OD - Organization Renewal: Adapting to change - The System Approach - Planned change process - Changing the Culture: Corporate - Culture Cultural Resistance to change - Tools for change - The goals and values of Change

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:5
Understanding the OD process
 

 

Role of OD Practitioner: OD Practitioner styles and The Intervention Process - The Diagnostic Process: Meaning of Diagnosis - Data Collection Process - Diagnostic Models - Overcoming Resistance to Change: Leading Change - A change Model - Strategies to Lessen Resistance

 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:5
Developing Excellence in Individuals
 

Process Intervention Skills Group Process - Types of Process Interventions - OD Intervention Strategies: Basic strategies to Change - The major OD intervention Techniques - Employee Empowerment and Interpersonal Interventions: Laboratory Learning - Johari Window Model - Transactional analysis - Career Life Planning Interventions - Stress Management, Managing Workforce Diversity, Employee Wellness

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:5
Structural Interventions
 

Socio-Technical Systems, Techno-Structural Interventions, Physical Settings and OD, Types of Techno-Structural Interventions

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:7
Strategic Intervention
 

 

Integrated Strategic Change, Trans-organization Development, Merger and Acquisition Integration, Culture Change, Self-Designing Organizations, Organization Learning and Knowledge Management, Confrontation Meetings, System 4 Management, Learning Organizations

 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:10
Developing High Performance in Teams
 

Team Development Interventions: Team approach - The team development process - Role Negotiation and Analysis - Intergroup Development Interventions: Collaboration and Conflict - Intergroup Operating Problems -  Managing Conflict - Goal Setting for Effective Organizations: Goal Setting Theory - Model for Goal setting – MBO - Work Team Development: Total Quality Management - Self Managed Work Teams

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:6
Developing Success in Organizations
 

High-Performing Systems and the Learning Organizations: Survey Research and Feedback - Learning Organizations - The Grid OD program - Third-Wave Organization - Organization Transformation and Strategic Change: Strategy and Transformation - Strategic Change Management

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:5
Research on Employee motivation, Organizational culture and development
 

Motivational research in organizations, employee motivation research techniques, developing questionnaires for employee motivation, organizational commitment questionnaire, organizational health survey, attitude survey, HRD and attitudinal change

Unit-9
Teaching Hours:5
Six sigma practices in HR research
 

Introduction, six sigma and TQM, how to calculate sigma, relating six sigma to HR strategy

Unit-10
Teaching Hours:4
OD-The challenge and the Future
 

Emerging Issues and Values - Future Trends in OD, Expanding the use of OD, combining traditional “hard” business competencies and OD, creating whole system change, Using OD to facilitate partnerships and alliances, Enhancing constant learning

Text Books And Reference Books:

Harvey, D.R., & Brown, R, D. (2012). An Experiential approach to organization development (5th ed.). New Delhi: Pearson Prentice Hall.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1. Jones, R, G.(2006). Organizational Design and Change (5th ed.).Canada: Pearson Education Prentice Hall.

2. Daft, R.L. (2004). Organization Theory & Design (8th ed.).Southwestern: Cengage Learning.

3. Cummings, T.G., & Worley, C.G. (2008).Organization Development and Change (9th ed.).Southwestern: Cengage Learning.

4. French, L.W., & Cecil, B.H. (1999).Organization Development (6th ed.). New Delhi: Pearson Prentice Hall.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 01 : 20 Marks

CIA 02 : 25 Marks (Mid Semester Exam)

CIA 03 : 20 Marks

End Semester Exam: 30 Marks

Attendance: 05 Marks

BBBHH643C - LEARNING AND DEVELOPMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:50
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description: This course provides students with an overview of the role of Training and Development in Human Resource Management.  It covers a variety of approaches to instruction and learning and contrasts these with their practical application. It also includes the study of core functions of human resource development and the development of an understanding of workplace competency standards.  The key elements covered include needs analysis, program design, development, administration, delivery, and program evaluation. Other topics include learning theory, transfer of training, training techniques, and trends in training.

Course Objectives:

CO1: Familiarize students with the fundamentals of learning  function and how to analyze training needs

CO2:  To analyze and design various methods and techniques based on training needs.

CO3: To execute the planned training methods and techniques for the employees

CO4: Examine and evaluate the effectiveness of the training programs implemented

CO5: Give them a glimpse of various learning and development practices

Course Outcome

Course Learning Outcomes: On having completed this course student should be able to:

CLO1:   Understand how to analyze the training needs of an organization

CLO2:  Analyse and design various methods and techniques based on the training needs.

CLO3:   Execute the planned training methods and techniques for the employees

CLO4:  Examine and evaluate the effectiveness of the training programs implemented

CLO5:  Understand the benchmarked practices and trends in the area of training and development 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
Introduction
 

 Introduction to Employee Training and Development – Types of Training practices - Forces influencing learning.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
Strategic Training
 

Evolution of Training Role, Strategic Training Process, Models of Organizing the Training Department: Faculty Model, Matrix Model, Corporate University Model, Business Embedded Model

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:12
Need Assessment
 

Concept, The Need Assessment Process, Competency Models, Scope of Need Assessment, Learning Theories – Reinforcement Theories, Social Learning Theory, Goal Theory, Need Theory, Expectancy Theory, Adult Learning Theory, Learning Process, Learning cycle 

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Transfer of Training
 

Introduction, Training Design, Work environment: Climate for transfer, Manger Support, Peer Support, Organizational Environment, Knowledge management

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:12
Training and Development Methods
 

Introduction, Traditional Training Methods - Training Methods - Training Requirements, Business Game, Lab Training, Training for Personnel and OD, Incidents / Cases, Seminars and Lectures, Sampling Real Life, Role Playing, Sensitivity Training, In Basket, Designing the Programme - Building Training Groups. E-Learning and use of Technology: Introduction, Technology Influence, Developing Effective Online learning, Blended learning, Mobile technology learning, Simulations, Technologies for training Support 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:6
Evaluation of Training Methods
 

Introduction, Reasons for evaluation, Evaluation Process, Outcomes used in Evaluation, Evaluation Practices, Evaluation Design

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:8
Future Trends
 

Training and Development Research; Training Issues resulting from the external environment, Training Issues related to internal need of the company, Implications of future trends for trainers, Skill and competencies 

Text Books And Reference Books:

Noe, R. A., & Kodwani, A.D (2015), Employee Training and Development, McGraw Hill Publications, 7th Edition

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Phillips, P.P (2010), ASTD Handbook of Measuring and Evaluating Training, Viva Publications

Bangaruswamy, M (2014), Practitioner’s Guide to Training & Development, Ane Books

Naik, G.P (2012), Training and Development: Text, Research & Cases, Excel books

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1: 20 marks

CIA 2: 50 marks (converted to 30)

CIA 3: 20 marks

ESE: 50 marks (converted to 30)

BBBHM641B - ADVERTISING AND DIGITAL MARKETING (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Advertising Management intends to inculcate in students a passion for advertising as an effective tool of marketing communications. This course is designed to expose the student to local and international Advertising practices. The course discusses the Strategic Planning and Management of Advertising Campaigns and explores issues related to Advertising and other forms of the Marketing Mix.

Course Objective:

1. To develop an awareness of the major types of advertising problems faced by organizations with emphasis on the application of marketing concepts for effective decision making.

2. To provide analytical skills useful in planning and evaluating advertising campaigns.

3. To analyse critically the task of advertising under contemporary conditions and to examine the role of advertising as it relates to other marketing functions.

Course Outcome

On having completed this course student should be able to:

CLO1  Develop analytical and creative skills necessary to prepare a marketing communications plan.

CLO2  Analyze specific marketing communications problems and devise sound and practical solutions to these problems.

CLO3 Describe the elements of contemporary marketing communications – the tools, the players, the scope and future direction of the marketing communications industry, including the different ways in which marketers communicate with their target audiences.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:5
Introduction to Advertising Management
 

Description: Definition and Key Concepts; The roles and functions of advertising; Functions; The Key Players-Five Key Players; Classification –Types of Advertising; Evolution of Advertising; Pyramid(AIDAS)

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:5
Ethics and regulation in Advertising
 

Advertising and social responsibility; Impact of advertisements on children; Women and Advertising; Ethics in Advertising, Review of Regulatory Environment; Codes of ethics and regulatory bodies

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:5
Relationship between advertising and marketing
 

Marketing Concepts; Marketing Process; Marketing Tools; Advertising Agencies ; Synergy between Marketing and Advertising

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
Advertising Planning and Research
 

Advertising Research and account planning; Strategic Research; Evaluative Research; Challenges in research; How communication works; Message development research; The advertising plan.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:8
Advertising Media
 

Setting media objectives-DAGMAR; developing strategies; Media selection procedures; Media buying functions; Print Media-Newspapers, Magazines, Out-of-home advertising, Directories, Broadcast and Television advertising, Radio advertising, Internet Media

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:7
Creating Advertising
 

Creative roles; Creative process; Creative strategy and execution; The Creative Brief; Effective creativity; Copywriting-for radio, TV, print Design and production-Visual Communication Print Art Direction, Print Production Television Art Direction, Broadcast production

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:7
Integrated Campaigning
 

Advertising and IMC; Elements of Integrated Marketing Communications; Direct Marketing; Sales Promotion; Publicity Structure of a campaigning plan; Evaluating the campaign plan; Evaluating the campaign plan;Advertising and Public relations; The practice of public relations; Types of PR programs; PR Planning; PR Tools; Institutional Advertising; Press Conference; Non-Profit PR Effectiveness and Excellence.

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:7
Co-creation
 

Introductory Definition Co-Creation is under-defined!Description, Non-market Co-creation Examples, Characteristics The Types of Value in Co-creation, Stages in Co-Creation, History, Some Issues with Co-Creation, The Five Guiding Principles of a Co-creation strategy, Towards Customer-Centric Strategies value and Co-Creation 

Unit-9
Teaching Hours:7
Affiliate Marketing
 

Introduction, Key terms and concepts, The building blocks of affiliate Marketing Setting up a campaign, Tools of the trade Advantages and challenges, The bigger picture

Unit-10
Teaching Hours:5
Social media
 

Introduction, History,Key terms and concepts,how it works,Tools of the trade, Pros and conThe bigger pictureSearch Engine Optimization,Keyword Research, How Google WorksSearch Engine Factors, On Page & Off Page Optimization, Meta Tags, Images, Content, Video Links and How to Get Them.

 

Text Books And Reference Books:

Wells, W.D., Burnett, J., & Moriarty, S. (2007). Advertising Principles and Practice (7thedi). Pearson Education Inc.

 

Recommended Reading

Steel, J. (1998).Truth , Lies and Advertising: The Art of Account Planning, Wiley.

Ogilvy, D. (1963). Confessions of an Advertising Man, Creative Advertising, Southbank Publishing.

Pricken, M. (2008).Ideas and Techniques from the World’s Best Campaigns.Thames and Hudson.

Underhill, P. (2000). Why we buy: The Science of Buying. Simon & Schuster

Halve, A. (nd). Planning for power Advertising. Sage publication

Robert, B. C. (1996). Influence: The Psychology of Persuasion, Talman Company.

Jethwaney, J., & Jain, S. (2006). Advertising Management (1stedi), Oxford University Press.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Wells, W.D., Burnett, J., & Moriarty, S. (2007). Advertising Principles and Practice (7thedi). Pearson Education Inc.

 

Recommended Reading

Steel, J. (1998).Truth , Lies and Advertising: The Art of Account Planning, Wiley.

Ogilvy, D. (1963). Confessions of an Advertising Man, Creative Advertising, Southbank Publishing.

Pricken, M. (2008).Ideas and Techniques from the World’s Best Campaigns.Thames and Hudson.

Underhill, P. (2000). Why we buy: The Science of Buying. Simon & Schuster

Halve, A. (nd). Planning for power Advertising. Sage publication

Robert, B. C. (1996). Influence: The Psychology of Persuasion, Talman Company.

Jethwaney, J., & Jain, S. (2006). Advertising Management (1stedi), Oxford University Press.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1 - 20 Marks

CIA 2 - Mid semester exam - 25 Marks

CIA 3 - 25 Marks

End sem exam - 30 Marks

BBBHM642B - SALES MANAGEMENT AND ANALYTICS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

The course examines managerial issues surrounding sales force management.  These include motivation and training issues, sales force recruitment issues, and evaluation and analysis of the sales force. It involves students in specific learning exercises that simulate ‘real world’ activities that sales managers partake in on a regular basis .

Course Objectives:

•To enable students understand the nuances of selling and its associated activities in the current and future market place.

•To familiarize the students with the various traits required for sales professional and help them acquire those traits.

 

•To develop good communication and sales oriented skills equipping students to face the real world with their conceptual knowledge.

 

Course Outcome

·         After completing the course the students will be familiar with the activities involved in managing a sales force.

 

·         Students will be able to match and strategize their learnings with the real world scenarios in sales.

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:6
Introduction to Sales Management
 

Meaning and objectives of sales management-responsibilities of the sales manager-role of sales manager as leader of sales force-sales management and marketing management relationships-Sales departments external relations-organisation of sales department-types of sales organisation structure-Centralisation and decentralisation of sales force management

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
Salesmanship
 

Introduction- Selling & Buying styles- Selling Situations- Selling Skills- Pre sale preparation- Prospecting- Approach to the customer- Sales presentation- Handling customer objections- Closing the sales- Follow up actions

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:5
Managing sales information
 

Introduction – Forecasting Market Demand - Trend projections - Factors affecting Selection of a Forecasting Method through practical application using Regression

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:5
Recruitment and sales selection
 

The pre recruiting reservoir-Sources of sales force recruits-The recruiting effort-Pre interview screening-The interview-references-credit checks-Psychological tests-Physical tests

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:7
Training the sales force
 

Defining training aims-Deciding training contents-selecting training methods,Organisation of sales training and evaluating sales training program

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:7
Motivating sales personnel
 

 Motivational help from management-Need gratification-Motivation and leadership-Motivation and communication-Unionization of sales personnel

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:7
Compensation and managing the expense
 

Devising the sales compensation plan-Types of compensation plan-Fringe benefits-Re imbursement of sales expenses-Methods of controlling and re imbursing expenses of the sales personnel

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:7
Sales meetings, evaluation of the sales force
 

Sales meetings-Different level of meetings-Objectives duration promotion and prizes of sales contest- Performance Appraisal process

Unit-9
Teaching Hours:6
Sales quotas and territories
 

Types of quotas and quota setting procedure-Administering the quota system-reasons for not using sales quota,

Reasons for establishing and reforming sales territories-Procedures for setting up territories-Routing and scheduling sales personnel

Unit-10
Teaching Hours:4
Sales budget and cost analysis
 

Purpose of budget-sales budget form and content

Text Books And Reference Books:
  • Still, R. R., & Cundiff, E. W. (2011). Sales Management (6th Edi). Pearson Education.
Essential Reading / Recommended Reading
  • Bhatt, A. & Kumar, A.  (2011). Sales Management (3rd edi). Oxford Higher education.
Evaluation Pattern

CIA

Marks

CIA1 A

10 Marks

CIA1B

10 Marks

Mid Semester Exam (CIA-II)

25 Marks

CIA3 A

10 Marks

CIA3B

10 Marks

End Semester Examination

30 Marks

Attendance

05 Marks

BBBHM643B - RURAL MARKETING (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

COURSE DESCRIPTION

Rural Marketing facilitates the students to understand the importance of Rural Markets, sensitize to the needs and behavior of consumers and channels, Utilize the understanding on peculiarities of rural markets, channels and competition in marketing decision making. 

COURSE OBJECTIVES

This course through the light about immense opportunities about Rural and Agricultural Markets in the forthcoming decades. This course also addresses the issues prevailing in the Rural and Agricultural Markets at present and seeks the appropriate solutions to sort out the issues. Further, this subject figure out the rapid growth in economic, technological and socio-political backgrounds of Rural consumers.

Course Outcome

On having completed this course student should be able to:

CLO1 Providing good insight on rural market structure, size and potentials.

CLO2 Demonstratethe strategies of rural marketing pertaining to segmentation, positioning and targeting

CLO3 Enriching the knowledge for rural marketing mix components and brand building endeavors.

CLO4 Assess therequirement of designing distribution network and communication system in specific to rural and agricultural marketing.

CLO5 Examinethe need of financial services for boosting the rural and agricultural marketing growth.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
Introduction to Rural Markets
 

Definition, scope of rural marketing, their evolution over period of time and Demographic pattern of Rural Market concepts, and components of rural markets, classification of rural markets, rural vs. urban markets. Need for rural marketing, types of rural customers, Evolution of Rural Marketing: Pre-1960s, 1960-1990 and 1990 – Present Rural Market Structure, Size of Rural Market, FMCG Market and Durable Market, Literacy Levels, Expenditure Pattern.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:9
Rural markets and STP
 

Segmenting, Targeting and Positioning, Segmentation- Heterogeneity in Rural, Prerequisites for Effective Segmentation, Degrees of Segmentation, Basis of Segmentation and Approaches to Rural Segmentation- Targeting- Evaluation and Selection of Segments, Coverage of Segments, Positioning- Identifying the positioning Concept, Selecting the positioning Concept, Urban vs. rural marketing. Rural consumer behavior – buyer characteristics, decision process, and behavior patterns, evaluation procedure, brand loyalty, innovation adoption

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:9
Marketing Mix and New Product Development for Rural Market
 

Product Strategy Introduction, Marketing Mix Challenges, Product concepts classification-Five Levels Products, Classification of Products, Rural Product Categories – Fast moving Consumer goods, Consumer Durables, Agriculture Goods, Services, New Product Development Consumer Adoption Process, Product life cycle, Product Mix, Branding in Rural India- Brand building in Rural India, Brand Spectrum in Rural, Brand Loyalty Vs Stickiness, Fake Brands : Lookalikes, Spell-alikes, Duplicates

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:9
Pricing Strategy & Rural Distribution
 

Pricing Strategy / Pricing Objectives, Pricing Methods, Accessing Rural Markets, Coverage Status in Rural Markets, Channels of Distribution, Evolution of Rural Distribution Systems- Wholesaling, Rural Retail System, Vans, Rural Mobile Traders: The last Mile Distribution, Haats/Shandies, Public Distribution System, Co-operative Societies Behavior of the Channel, Prevalent Rural Distribution Models. Distribution Models of FMCG Companies, Distribution Model of Durable Companies, Distribution of fake products, Emerging Distribution Models- Corporate –SHG Linkage, Satellite Distribution, Syndicated Distribution

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:8
Rural Communication
 

Challenges in Rural Communication, A view of Communication Process, Developing Effective- Profiling the Target Audience, Determining communication objectives, designing the message, selecting the communication channels, deciding the promotion mix, Creating advertisement for rural audiences rural media- Mass media

Non- Conventional Media, melas, Haats, Interactive games, folk media, puppet shows, POP displays, Personalised media, Rural Media: The importance of the two-step flow of communication Media Typology, The Media Model, Media innovation

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:9
Agricultural Marketing
 

Nature and Scope, Objectives of Agriculture Marketing, classification of agricultural products and markets, how agricultural marketing is different from rural marketing, Challenges in Agricultural Marketing, Channels of Distribution for agricultural products, Managing rural distribution networks. Government led incentives for agricultural marketing, online trading in India, and Agmarknet, Impact of Rural Credit and Finance on Rural Consumerism – Scope and role of Banking and NBFCs in Rural markets.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:8
Agricultural Exports
 

Export potential for farm products - Role of APEDA, Global GAP, International Marketing and Export process -Supporting Services, Cooperative Marketing –Concept, History, Functions – Reasons for slow progress of cooperative sector and successful cases such as Amul. Supply Chain Management in Agricultural products including Post harvest processes and cold chains, commodity markets and futures, understanding the economics of fresh, chilled and frozen produce

Text Books And Reference Books:

Kashyap, P.(2012). Rural Marketing (2ndedi), Pearson Education

Krishnamoorthy, R (2011). Rural Marketing (3rd Edi), Himalaya Publishing House

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1. Gopalswamy T.P (2009). Rural Marketing (3rdedi),  Vikas Publishing house.

2. Dogra (2007). Rural Marketing (7thedi), Tata McGraw-Hill Education.

3. Krishnamacharyulu C.G. (2011). Cases in Rural Marketing. (2ndedi). Pearson Education.

4. Mathur, U.C. (2008). Rural Marketing(1stedi). Excel books.

5. Prahlad C.K (2005). Fortune at the bottom of the Pyramid. Wharton School Publishing.

6. Acharya S.S. Agarwal N.L. Agriculture Marketing in India Oxford & IBH Publishing Company Pvt. Ltd.

7. Nilabja Ghosh, India’s Agricultural Marketing: Market Reforms and Emergence of New Channels, Springer India, 1st Edition, 2013 

8. Dr. SubhashBhave , Agribusiness Management in India –Text & Cases

Evaluation Pattern

CIA IA - 10 Marks

CIA IB - 10 Marks

CIA II - 25 Marks

CIA III - 20 Marks

Attendance - 5 Marks

End sem - 30 Marks

BBBHT641A - STRATEGIC COST MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

COURSE DESCRIPTION:

This course provides students with the knowledge and analytical skills necessary to use accounting cost information as a basis for formulating and evaluating corporate strategies. A central theme of the course is that one of the primary functions of accounting information is to facilitate the development of corporate strategies. A superior accounting system provides an important tool for developing a sustainable competitive advantage by enabling a deep understanding of a company’s cost structure. Further, the course focuses on strategic cost management issues. Emphasis is placed on aligning cost system functions with strategy.

 

COURSE OBJECTIVE:

This unit provides students with the skills and expertise to contribute to the strategic decision-making and management of organisations through advanced management accounting and cost management analysis. It locates management accounting techniques within a broader strategic framework that examines the various decisions that organisations need to make in configuring themselves to generate superior financial returns as well as broader notions of environmental and social value. Students learn how to structure information search and management accounting analysis processes to support strategic decision-making, design appropriate decision-criteria and select from feasible decision-making options that are supported by rigorous analysis.

Course Outcome

Learning Outcome

 

By the end of this course, students are able to;

1. Apply advanced knowledge of strategic cost management to organisational contexts which differ in terms of strategy, industry, stage of development and focus.

2. Apply problem solving to provide innovative solutions into integrated and multi-dimensional and predictive models of business performance.

3. Critically analyse an organisation’s performance in creating economic financial returns as well as in terms of a broader notion of value, comprising environmental and social value.

4. Apply problem solving methodology to generate innovative solutions to organizational effectiveness, efficiency and key short-term and long-term drivers of these performance dimensions.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:12
INTRODUCTION
 

Cost – Ascertainment, Control, Reduction, Avoidance and Management; Cost Management System; Cost Leadership Strategy; Strategic Cost Management (SCM); SCM Programme; and Importance of SCM.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
DECISION MAKING THROUGH APPLICATIONS OF MARGINAL COSTING
 

Impact Of Key Factors Including Sales Mix, Mergers Of Two Plants / Factories, Make Vs. Buy Decisions, Sell or Process Further, Replace or Retain, Decisions Relating to Acceptance And Rejection of a Special Offer / Order, Selling Price Decisions, Add or Drop Products, Product Line Decisions, Operate Or Shut Down Decisions.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
ACTIVITY BASED COSTING
 

Inadequacies of Traditional Methods of Overhead Absorption, Concept of ABC, Kaplan and Cooper’s approach to ABC, Cost Drivers and Cost Pools, Main Activities and their Cost Drivers, Allocation of Overheads under ABC – Characteristics, Steps, Implementation; Benefits and Limitations of ABC System.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:7
LEARNING CURVE MODEL
 

Concept and Phases of Learning Curve, Graphical representation, Learning Curve Applications and Factors affecting Learning Curve, and Experience Curve.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:5
LIFE CYCLE COSTING
 

Concept and Characteristics activities and Phases in Product Life Cycle, Short Product and Extension of Product Life Cycle, Turning Point Indices in Product Life Cycle; and Project Life Cycle Costing.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:5
JUST-IN-TIME APPROACH
 

 

Concept, Philosophy of JIT, Sources of Waste, Objectives of JIT, Features and Methodology of Implementation of JIT, Planning for adoption and Limitations of JIT Costing.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:7
TARGET COSTING
 

Meaning and Definitions, Basic Concepts, Unique Features, and Cost determination procedure under Target Costing.

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:6
BALANCED SCORE CARD (BSC) AND OTHER TECHNIQUES
 

Concept, Objectives, Four Basic Business Perspectives of BSC - Components and Measures of Performance; Kaizen Costing; Theory of Constraints; and Value Analysis and Value Engineering.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Text Books And Reference Books

 

 

1. J. Madegowda, Cost Management, Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai.

 

2. Horngren et al., Introduction to Management Accounting, PHI, New Delhi.

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

 

1.      Don R Hansen and Maryarne M Mowen, Cost Management, Accounting and Control, Thomson.

2.      Don T Decoster and Anthony A Atkinson, Advanced Management Accounting, John Wiley & Sons.

3.      Edward Blocher, Cost Management, A strategic Emphasis, TMH, New Delhi.

4.      Hilton, Cost Management, TMH, New Delhi.

5.      Horngren, Foster and Datar, Cost Accounting, A Managerial Emphasis, PHI, New Delhi.

6.      John K Shank and Vijay Govindarajan, Strategic Cost Management, Free Press, Calcutta.

7.      Kaplan and Atkinson, Advanced Management Accounting, PHI Publications, New Delhi.

8.      Leslie G Eldenburg and Sussan K Wolcott, Cost Management, John Wiley & Sons.

9.      Ravi. M. Kishore, Cost Management, Taxman Publications, New Delhi.

10.   Roman L Weil and Michael W Maher, Handbook of Cost Management, John Wiley & Sons.  

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1: 20 Marks

CIA 2:MSE 25 Marks

CIA 3: 20 Marks

Attendance: 5 Marks

BBBHT642A - MERGERS AND ACQUISITIONS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

The corporate world is undergoing a sea change and firms have been growing in size, becoming global and diversifying into new areas. They quite often face different challenges, more so in case of Indian companies.  The last decade has seen numerous M&As, which have often forced firms to adopt special strategies for growth and survival. Today M&As have become a global phenomenon and Indian companies which had often been targets of Mergers and acquisitions, reversed the trend and started acquiring other companies both in India and abroad.This course intends to provide knowledge on different aspects of Mergers and acquisitions.

 

Course Objectives

v  To understand Mergers and acquisitions happening in corporate world

v  To make the participants understand the M&A process

v   Understand different business valuation approaches

v  To make the participants understand the legal aspects involved in M&A

v  Understand need for and performance  of cross border mergers and acquisitions.

 

It is to enable students to understand how businesses capitalize on organisational synergies and thereby reap significant financial advantages. 

Course Outcome

To demonstrate an understanding of the corporate restructuring process, types, motives, and need.

To apply the appropriate valuation method to calculate the true value of a business

To formulate strategies for solving post-merger integration issues.

To critically analyse the legal rules governing M&A in India

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:12
Mergers and Acquisitions
 

Introduction – Forms of corporate restructuring –M&A, Joint Ventures, sell-off and spin-off, divestitures, LBO, MBO,MLP, ESOP- History of merger movement –types of merger- Economic rationale  for different types of merger - Motives behind Mergers – theories of merger- synergy of mergers and acquisitions – Internal and external change forces contributing towards M&A activities

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
Merger Process
 

Identification of target – Negotiation – closing the deal – due diligence – M&A integration – organisational and human aspects – Managerial challenges of M&A

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:11
Valuation
 

Different approaches to valuation – discounted cash flow valuation – relative valuation – Valuation of operating and financial synergy – Other methods of valuation MVA, EVA and Enterprise value- Valuation of LBO – Methods of financing- cash offer, share exchange ratio – M&A as a capital budgeting decision.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
Takeover
 

Types of takeover – Hostile takeover approaches – Takeover defences – Anti-takeover amendments- SEBI takeover code   

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:7
Legal and Accounting aspects of M&A
 

Legal and Accounting aspects of M&A – accounting for amalgamation- Pooling of interest method, Purchase method – Provisions of companies Act of 1956, Income Tax Act 1961, Provisions of competition Act.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:5
Doctrine of due diligence
 

Doctrine of due diligence – Introduction, ethical policies, Buyers due diligence, Sellers due diligence, Corporate governance issues in M&A and M&A integration, M&A and shareholder value, How M&A can lead to governance failure.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:7
Cross Border Mergers and Acquisitions
 

Cross Border Mergers and Acquisitions – The theory of MNE – Reasons – strategies and performance of CBMA.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Essential Reading

1)      Godbole, P. (2012). Mergers Acquisitions and Corporate Restructuring. Noida: Vikas Publishing House.

 

Recommended Reading

1)      Kale, R. S. (2011). Mergers and Acquisitions. New Delhi: Oxford University Press.

2)      Rajesh, K.B. (2010). Mergers and Acquisitions. Text and Cases. New Delhi: Tata Mcgraw Hill.

3)      Sudarsanam, S. (2010). Creating Value through Mergers and Acquisitions. New Delhi: Peasons Education.

 

4)      Pandey, I.M. (2010). Financial Management. New Delhi: Vikas Publishig house.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Essential Reading

1)      Godbole, P. (2012). Mergers Acquisitions and Corporate Restructuring. Noida: Vikas Publishing House.

 

Recommended Reading

1)      Kale, R. S. (2011). Mergers and Acquisitions. New Delhi: Oxford University Press.

2)      Rajesh, K.B. (2010). Mergers and Acquisitions. Text and Cases. New Delhi: Tata Mcgraw Hill.

3)      Sudarsanam, S. (2010). Creating Value through Mergers and Acquisitions. New Delhi: Peasons Education.

 

4)      Pandey, I.M. (2010). Financial Management. New Delhi: Vikas Publishig house.

Evaluation Pattern

Students are evaluated for each paper on the basis of written examination and continuous internal assessment. Each paper carries maximum of 100 marks and is evaluated as follows:

End Semester Exam (ESE)

30%

Mid Semester Exam (CIA-II)

25%

Continuous Internal Assessments (CIA- I & III)

40%

Attendance

05%

Total

100%

  • Written Examinations consists of:

 

    • Mid Semester Exam – 50 marks (2 hours duration)
    • End Semester Exam – 50 marks (2 hours duration)
    • A student should have secured minimum 40% marks in the ESE to pass in that paper.
    • In aggregate for each paper, for internal and end semester put together, at least 40 marks out of 100 must be secured to pass in that paper.

BBBHT643A - PROJECT APPRAISAL (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:60
No of Lecture Hours/Week:4
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course description

This course intends to introduce the student to the various aspects of project planning, financing, appraisal and control with particular emphasis on the appraisal practices of financial institutions and on the various avenues of financing available to promoters today.

 

Course objective

The objective of this course is to familiarize the student with both capital budgeting aspect and the contents of a bankable feasibility report. The course content will be supplemented by case studies of capital investments undertaken by corporate. The students will prepare a preliminary feasibility report covering all the elements of the course.

Course Outcome

1.   To study the importance of capital budgeting in decision making

2.   To understand the concept of Generation and screening of project ideas.

3.   To study the importance of project planning in financial decision making.

4.   To study the contents of the feasibility report.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:4
Introduction
 

Project  appraisal  and  evaluation,  Project  cycle,  Project  cycle management, Private and Public sector Projects; Identification of investment opportunities – industry  analysis  review  of  project  profiles,  feasibility  study,  Project  identification  and formulation,  Basic  Principles  of  Project  Analysis to conglomerate diversification - interface between strategic planning and capital budgeting

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
Generation and screening of project ideas
 

Generation of ideas – monitoring the environment - regulatory framework for projects - corporate appraisal -preliminary screening - project rating index - sources of positive NPV -qualities of a successful entrepreneur - the porter model for estimation of profit potential of industries. Market and demand analysis: Situational analysis and specification of objectives - collection of secondary information - conduct of market survey. Characterization of the market - demand forecasting - market planning. Technical analysis: Study of material inputs and utilities – manufacturing process and technology - product mixes - plant capacity - location and site -machinery and equipment - structures and civil works - project charts and layouts - work schedule

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:12
Financial Analysis
 

Estimation of cost of project and means of financing -estimates of sales and production - cost of production - working capital requirement and its financing - estimates of working results – breakeven points - projected cash flow statement – projectedBalance sheet .Project cash flows: Basic principles of measurement of cash flows -components of the cash flow streams - viewing a project from different points of view - definition of cash flows by financial institutions and planning commission - biases in cash flow estimation. Appraisal criteria: Net Present Value - benefit cost ratio - internal rate of returns urgency - payback period - accounting rate of returns – investment appraisal in practice. Analysis of Risk

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:10
Types and measure of risk
 

Simple estimation of risk - sensitivity analysis -scenario analysis – Monte Carlo simulation - decision tree analysis – selection of project - risk analysis in practice. Special decision situations: Choice between mutually exclusive projects of unequal life - optimal timing decision - determination of economic life -inter-relationships between investment and financing aspects - inflation and capital budgeting. Analysis of firm and market risk: Portfolio theory and capital budgeting -capital asset pricing model - estimation of key factors

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:5
Cost Benefit Analysis(SCBA)
 

Rationale for SCBA – UNIDO approach to SCBA - Little and Mirle approach to SCBA

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:4
Multiple projects and constraints
 

Constraints - methods of ranking -mathematical programming approach - linear programming model -Qualitative Analysis: Qualitative factors in capital budgeting – strategic aspects - strategic planning and financial analysis – asymmetry information and capital budgeting - organizational considerations. Environmental appraisal of projects: types and dimensions of a project -meaning and scope of environment - Environment – Environmental resources values - environmental impact assessment and environmental impact statement

 

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:5
Project financing in India
 

Means of finance - norms and policies of financial institutions - SEBI guidelines - Sample financing plans Structure of financial institutions in India - schemes of assistance - term loans procedures - project appraisal by financial institutions

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:10
Project Management
 

Forms of project organization - project planning - project control - human aspects of project management - prerequisites for successful project implementation. Network techniques for project management - development of project network - time estimation - determination of critical path - scheduling when resources are limited - PERT and CPM models - Network cost system (Only problems on resources allocation and resources leveling). Project review and administrative aspects: Initial review – performance evaluation - abandonment analysis - administrative aspects of capital budgeting - evaluating the capital budgeting system of an organization

Text Books And Reference Books:

Prasanna Chandra (2013). Project Preparation Appraisal Budgeting and Implementation (7th ed.). New Delhi. Tata Mc Graw Hill.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1. Nicholas - Project Management for Business and Technology:Principles and Practice - Pearson / PHI.
2. Gray & Larson - Project Management: The Managerial Process -TMH, 3/e , 2005.
3. Vasant Desai - Project Management - HPH
4. Bhavesh M Patel - Project Management - Vikas
5. Chitkara - Construction Project Management, Planning, Scheduling
and Control - TMH, 1/e
6. Choudhury - Project Management - TMH, 1/e
7. Project Management - K Nagarajan - New Age International, 2004
8. Project Management - Merdith & Gopalan - Wiley India (P) Ltd.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Description:

Individual Assignment Details

CIA I A:Each group (4) is asked to select a Project and the same should not be repeated .The marks are awarded for the group.Identify and select a Project. Study and also evaluate the various components of it.

 

CIA I B: To enhance academic knowledge among students regarding the subject of Project Appraisal

CIA 3 A & B: Students are asked to analyze the various risks involved in projects. Students of 3-5 are formed in groups to do the same. The marks are allotted to groups and for presentation it is awarded individually.

 

Evaluation Rubrics:

CIA I A & B:

Component 1

10 marks

Selection and identification of Project

1 marks

Listing out the unique reason of the same

a)      Project Objective

    -Minimum three should be identified

b)     Project Description

    -Project components

    -project Financing

c)      Project Appraisal

      -Economic and Financial Analyses          

      -Technical Analysis           

      -Social Analysis(including Safeguards)   

      -Environment Analysis

      -Legal Anaysis

8 marks

Conclusion

1 mark

Component 2

10 marks

Moodle quiz on first  4 units(all topics)-objective

10 marks

 

CIA 3 A & B:

Component 1

20 marks

Identify various risks

2 marks

Methods to manage and minimise those risks

5 marks

Content delivery

5 marks

Opinion/Conclusion

3 marks

Presentation of the same is done by individual

5 marks

 

BBBHT681 - PROJECT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

To develop the students withprofessional and academic inputs to adapt to the requirements of the changing environment

Course Outcome

Facilitate a meaningful transition for an aspiring scholar from acquiring knowledge towards a higher stage of its creation and application.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:5
INTRODUCTION
 

The introduction starts on a broad basis and then narrows down to your particular field of study. The introduction gives an overall view of the topic, and addresses slightly different issues from the executive summary. It works upon the principle of introducing the topic of dissertation and setting it into a broad context, gradually narrowing down to a research problem, thesis and objectives/hypothesis. 

(a)    Need for the study

 

(b)    Statement of the problem/Title of the study

 

(c)    Scope of the study

 

(d)   Objectives of the study

 

(e)    Limitations of the study 

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:10
REVIEW OF LITERATURE
 

   Critical review and summary of previous papers similar to the study/topic chosen:

i) Primary papers.

ii) Secondary or related papers.

There can be a maximum of half a page for each review.      

The last part of the chapter has to summarize the complete reviews undertaken.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY/RESEARCH DESIGN
 

This chapter shall consist of the following sub-topics.

(a)    Introduction ( how the chapter is presented)

(b)   Operational definitions/terms

(c)    Hypotheses( if any)

(d)   Sampling size and sampling technique

(e)     Data and the sources of data collection

(f)     Methods of data collection

(g)   The various techniques used in analysis of data

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:10
DATA ANALYSIS & INTERPRETATION
 

This chapter includes interpreting of results with help of tables, graphs and text

The table shall be listed first, then the graph, followed by the finding and brief interpretation all fitting into one page per table.

 

In case of any hypothesis testing, the outcome related to hypothesis testing should be mentioned and also the final conclusion of proving or disproving the null/alternate hypothesis.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:10
FINDINGS, SUGGESTIONS & CONCLUSIONS
 

·         Suggestions based on the findings should be discussed and a overall conclusion

·         Implications

·         Scope for future study.

This chapter has to be stated in paragraph form. No bullets or numbering is encouraged.

References (Strictly according to APA format)

ANNEXURE

Text Books And Reference Books:

APA

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

APA

Evaluation Pattern

Dissertation –75 Marks &Viva -Voce –25 Marks 

BSDBS612 - SELF ENHANCEMENT SKILLS II (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:2
Max Marks:100
Credits:0

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

·         To educate students about the upcoming trends in domain-specific areas .

·         To develop insights and provide practical solutions in solving business issues

  • To enable the recipients to develop and demonstrate skills needed to be effectively employed.

Course Outcome

·         A thorough understanding of the contemporary issues in the field of human resources/marketing/finance/international business/Entrepreneurship Development.

·         Ability to apply specific skills needed to make proactive and creative response to management challenges.

·         Ability to implement the best practices in various domain specific areas.

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:30
modules under HR/Marketing/Finance/ED/IB
 

UNIT: 01  LATEST TRENDS IN HRM                                                                                  10 Hours

 

HR area (Procurement; Development; Performance Management; Technology, Data & HR Analytics; Compensation & Benefits; Employee Welfare; Labor Relations; Change, Culture & Diversity Management, Employee Retention)

 

UNIT: 02  GROUP DISCUSSION   AND EMPLOYABILITY SKILLS                              10 Hours

                   

Introduction to group discussion, preparation before GD, do’s and don’t’s of group discussion, techniques of group discussion, roles of group discussion, professional dress code and body language in a group discussion and employability skills.

 

UNIT: 3 COMPETENCY MAPPING AND CASE WRITING                                  10 Hours

 

Meaning of competency mapping, identify and map competencies. Case-lets writing

 

MARKETING 

UNIT: 01  MARKETING RESEARCH AND ANALYS                                                           10 Hours

 

Importance of Marketing Information, Orientation on Marketing Research and Basic Analytics, Expectation from 21st Century consumers, Marketing Analytics.

 

 

UNIT: 02  MARKETING  SENTIMENT AND OPINION ANALYSIS                                  10 Hours

                                                         

Introduction to Marketing sentiment and opinion mining, Marketing sentiment and opinion

Mining, Sentiment Analytics, Predictive and prescriptive analytics

 

 

 

UNIT: 03 MARKETING CAREER                                                                                            10 Hours

 

 

Orientation on Marketing career planning, Opportunities and career building. Marketing higher education avenues

FINANCE

UNIT: 01  ECONOMETRICS For FINANCE                                                                           10 Hours

 

Introduction to econometrics, econometric tools for financial research.

 

 

UNIT: 02  BFSI                                                                                                                             10 Hours

                                                         

Introduction to banking, financial services and Insurance, Financial planning and Investment skills.

 

 

 

UNIT: 03 SPSS                                                                                                                               10 Hours

 

 

 

Software packages for research in social sciences, application and data analysis and interpretation. 

 

Text Books And Reference Books:

NA

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

NA

Evaluation Pattern

Each module is assigned 20 marks. each skill will have atleast 5 modules designed.